Lexus | LS430 | Owner's manual | Lexus LS430 Owner's manual

FOREWORD
Congratulations on your selection of this Lexus. In Lexus vehicles we have invested all our engineering and design resources; all
the know-how we have gained in over 60 years of making automobiles; the highest motivation of our most talented employees; and
our tradition of incessant striving toward ever greater quality.
This Owner’s Manual explains the features of your new Lexus. Please read it and follow the instructions carefully so that you can
enjoy many years of safe motoring.
When it comes to service, remember that your Lexus dealer knows your vehicle very well and is interested in your complete
satisfaction. Your Lexus dealer will provide quality maintenance and any other assistance you may require.
If there is not a Lexus dealer near you, or you need emergency assistance for any reason, please call the following number:
U.S. OWNERS
When traveling in the U.S. mainland or Canada:
Lexus Roadside Assistance 1-800-25-LEXUS (Toll-Free)
(1-800-255-3987)
HAWAII:
Lexus Customer Service Assistance
1-800-25-LEXUS (Toll-Free)
(1-800-255-3987)
CANADIAN OWNERS
When traveling in Canada or the U.S. mainland:
Lexus Roadside Assistance/Customer Service 1-800-26-LEXUS (Toll-Free)
(1-800-265-3987)
Please leave this Owner’s Manual in this vehicle at the time of resale. The next owner will need this information also.
All information and specifications in this manual are current at the time of printing. However, because of the Lexus policy
of continual product improvement, we reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.
Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you may find
some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle.
i
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT YOUR LEXUS
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT
YOUR LEXUS
Occupant restraint systems
Lexus encourages you and your family to take the time to read
Section 1-6 of this Owner’s Manual carefully. In terms of
helping you understand how you can receive the maximum
benefit of the occupant restraint systems this vehicle provides,
Section 1-6 of this Owner’s Manual is the most important
section for you and your family to read.
Section 1-6 describes the function and operation concerning
seats, seat belts, SRS airbags and child restraint systems of
this vehicle and some potential hazards you should be aware
of. These systems work together along with the overall
structure of this vehicle in order to provide occupant restraint
in the event of a crash. The effect of each system is enhanced
when it is used properly and together with other systems. No
single occupant restraint system can, by itself, provide you or
your family with the equal level of restraint which these
systems can provide when used together. That is why it is
important for you and your family to understand the purpose
and proper use of each of these systems and how they relate
to each other.
The purpose of all occupant restraint systems is to help reduce
the possibility of death or serious injury in the event of a
collision. None of these systems, either individually or
together, can ensure that there is no injury in the event of
collision. However, the more you know about these systems
and how to use them properly, the greater your chances
become of surviving an accident without death or serious
injury.
Seat belts provide the primary restraint to all occupants of the
vehicle, and every occupant of the vehicle should wear seat
belts properly at all times. Children should always be secured
in child restraint systems that are appropriate for their age and
size. SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) airbags are, as
their names imply, designed to work with, and be supplemental
to, seat belts and are not substitutes for them. SRS airbags
can be very effective in reducing the risk of head, chest and
knee injuries by preventing contact of the head, chest and knee
with interior portions of the vehicle.
In order to be effective, the SRS airbags must deploy with
tremendous speed. The rapid deployment of the SRS airbags
makes the SRS airbags themselves potential sources of
serious injury if an occupant is too close to an airbag, or if an
object or some part of his or her body has been placed between
the occupant and the airbag at the time of deployment. This
is just one example of how the instructions in Section 1-6 of
this Owner’s Manual will help ensure proper use of the
occupant restraint systems, and increase the safety they can
provide to you and your family in the event of an accident.
Lexus recommends you to read the provisions in Section 1-6
carefully and refer to them as needed during your time of
ownership of this vehicle.
ii
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT YOUR LEXUS
New vehicle warranty
Your new vehicle is covered by the following Lexus limited
warranties:
New vehicle warranty
Emission control systems warranty
Others
For further information, please refer to the “Owner’s Guide”,
“Owner’s Manual Supplement” or “Warranty Booklet”.
Your responsibility for maintenance
It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure the specified
maintenance is performed. Section 5 of this Owner’s Manual
gives details of these maintenance requirements. Included in
Section 6 is general maintenance. For scheduled
maintenance information, please refer to the “Owner’s Manual
Supplement / Scheduled Maintenance”.
Important health and safety information about your Lexus
CAUTION
WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,
and a wide variety of automobile components
contain or emit chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects and
other reproductive harm. In addition, oils, fuels and
fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste
produced by component wear contain or emit
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your hands
after handling. Used engine oil contains chemicals
that have caused cancer in laboratory animals.
Always protect your skin by washing thoroughly with
soap and water.
iii
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT YOUR LEXUS
Accessories, spare parts and modification of
your Lexus
A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for
Lexus vehicles are currently available in the market. You
should know that Toyota does not warrant these products and
is not responsible for their performance, repair, or
replacement, or for any damage they may cause to, or adverse
effect they may have on, your Lexus vehicle.
This vehicle should not be modified with non-genuine Lexus
products. Modification with non- genuine Lexus products
could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even
violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or
performance problems resulting from the modification may not
be covered under warranty.
Spark ignition system of your Lexus
The spark ignition system in your Lexus meets all
requirements of the Canadian Interference- Causing
Equipment Standard.
Installation of a mobile two-way radio system
As the installation of a mobile two-way radio system in your
vehicle could affect electronic systems such as the multiport
fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system,
cruise control system, dynamic radar/laser cruise control
system, anti-lock brake system, SRS airbag system and seat
belt pretensioner system, be sure to check with your Lexus
dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions
regarding installation.
iv
Tires and loading on your Lexus
Underinflated or overinflated tire pressure and the
excess load may result in the deterioration of steering
ability and braking ability, leading to an accident. Check
the tire inflation pressure periodically and be sure to
keep the load limits given in this Owner’s Manual. For
details about tire inflation pressure and load limits, see
pages 478 and 390.
Scrapping of your Lexus
The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your
Lexus contain explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped
with the airbags and seat belt pretensioners left as they are,
this may cause an accident such as a fire. Be sure to have the
system of the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner removed
and disposed of by a qualified service shop or by your Lexus
dealer before you scrap your vehicle.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
The contents of this manual are explained briefly on this
page to help you make the best use of the manual. Please
read this page and the rest of the Owner’s Manual
carefully to make sure you fully understand the operation
of your vehicle.
SECTION 2 - AIR CONDITIONING AND AUDIO
The features of the vehicle’s air conditioning and audio are
explained in detail. Be sure to read this section so that you can
make full use of them.
SECTION 3 - STARTING AND DRIVING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Starting the engine, driving, stopping, operation of features
affecting vehicle handling, hints on vehicle safety and safe
driving techniques are all explained. Please read everything
in this section, and remember - drive safely!
The table of contents and the pictorial index provide easy
reference to the appropriate pages.
SECTION 4 - IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
This will help you enjoy safe and comfortable driving.
Operation of basic equipment is briefly explained in an easily
understandable way for quick reference.
This section explains what to do in the event of an urgent
situation such as the engine not starting or getting a flat tire,
etc. If such a problem occurs, check the contents of this
Owner’s Manual and follow the instructions given.
SECTION 1 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
SECTION 5 - MAINTENANCE
BASIC OPERATION - QUICK REFERENCE
The vehicle’s equipment is divided into the 7 groups listed
below. Use of the equipment is explained, including any points
you should pay particular attention to.
This section explains the importance of regular maintenance.
Regular and periodic inspection and maintenance of your
Lexus will help to keep your vehicle in its best condition.
1. Keys and doors
SECTION 6 - SERVICE PROCEDURES AND
SPECIFICATIONS
2. Switches
4. Interior equipment
Simple maintenance procedure and service data are provided
here for your reference should you wish to perform inspection
and maintenance yourself.
5. Exterior equipment
INDEX
6. Occupant restraint systems
The page number is listed for each item in the Owner’s Manual
so that you can rapidly find the item and page you are
searching for.
3. Gauges, meters and service reminder indicators
7. Steering wheel and mirrors
v
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
GAS STATION INFORMATION
Safety and vehicle damage warnings
The information you need to know for appropriate servicing at
the gas station is provided here.
In this manual you will see CAUTION and NOTICE warnings.
These are used in the following ways:
QUICK INDEX
This is designed so that you can quickly find the needed
information when an urgent situation arises.
Safety symbol
CAUTION
This is a warning against anything which may cause
injury to people if the warning is ignored. You are
informed about what you must or must not do in order
to reduce the risk of injury to yourself and others.
NOTICE
This is a warning against anything which may cause
damage to the vehicle or its equipment if the warning is
ignored. You are informed about what you must or must
not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of damage to
your Lexus and its equipment.
In this manual, you will also see a circle with a slash through
it. This means ”Do not”, ”Do not do this”, or ”Do not let this
happen”.
vi
Your Lexus Owner ’s Manual provides you with a
considerable amount of information. To use this
information most effectively, please take the time to
familiarize yourself with the contents and use of the
manual.
PICTORIAL INDEX
INSTRUMENT PANEL (Vehicles with navigation system)
00L184a
1
2
Power window switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Shoulder anchor control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
3
4
Driving position memory switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
vii
PICTORIAL INDEX
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Window lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Side vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Headlight, turn signal and fog
light switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 57, 58
Wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Automatic air conditioning controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237, 239
Rear window and outside rear view mirror defogger
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Lexus park assist system/Rear view monitor/
Navigation system display
(See “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”) . . . . . . . . . 314/320
Outside temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
27
Rear seat and rear head restraints
return switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Traction control system off switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
28
Rear electric sunshade switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
29
CD automatic changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
30
Height control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
31
Damping mode select switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
32
Automatic transmission selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
33
Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297, 300
34
Volume adjustment knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30, 39
35
Key cancel switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
36
Tire pressure warning system reset switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
37
26
14
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
15
Center vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
38
Cruise control switch/Dynamic radar/laser cruise
control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324/327
Multi-information display control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
16
Emergency flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
39
Rear view mirror folding switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
17
Car audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
40
Steering pad switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
18
Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
41
Adaptive front-lighting system cancel switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
19
Driving pattern selector switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
42
Trunk lid opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
20
Auxiliary box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
43
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
21
Seat heater switches/
Climate control seat switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69/71
Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
44
Hood opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
45
Lexus park assist system switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
46
Parking brake release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
47
Fuel filler door opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
48
Coin box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
49
Power rear view mirror control switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
22
24
Auxiliary box if power outlet is selected/
Ashtray if cigarette lighter is selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128/118
Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
25
Headlight cleaner switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
23
For detailed information, refer to the description given in each section.
viii
PICTORIAL INDEX
INSTRUMENT PANEL (Vehicles without navigation system)
00L185a
1
2
Power window switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Shoulder anchor control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
3
4
Driving position memory switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
ix
PICTORIAL INDEX
Window lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
26
Traction control system off switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Side vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
27
Rear electric sunshade switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Headlight, turn signal and fog
light switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 57, 58
28
CD automatic changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
29
Height control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
8
9
Wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
30
Damping mode select switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Automatic air conditioning controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237, 239
31
Automatic transmission selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
10
32
Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297, 300
33
Volume adjustment knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30, 39
11
Rear window and outside rear view mirror defogger
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Center vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
34
Key cancel switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
12
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
35
Tire pressure warning system reset switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
13
Emergency flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
36
14
Outside temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
15
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
37
Cruise control switch/Dynamic radar/laser cruise
control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324/327
Multi-information display control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
16
Car audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
38
Rear view mirror folding switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
17
Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
39
Steering pad switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
18
Driving pattern selector switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
40
Adaptive front-lighting system cancel switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
19
Auxiliary box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
41
Trunk lid opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
20
Seat heater switches/
Climate control seat switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69/71
Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
42
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
43
Hood opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
44
Lexus park assist system switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
45
Parking brake release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
46
Fuel filler door opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
47
Coin box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
48
Power rear view mirror control switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
5
6
7
21
22
23
24
25
Auxiliary box if power outlet is selected/
Ashtray if cigarette lighter is selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128/118
Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Headlight cleaner switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Rear seat and rear head restraints
return switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
For detailed information, refer to the description given in each section.
x
PICTORIAL INDEX
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (Vehicles sold in U. S. A.)
00L186a
xi
PICTORIAL INDEX
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
16
Brake system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Slip indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360, 363
17
SRS warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Master warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
18
ODO/TRIP RESET button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Adaptive front-lighting system off indicator light . . . . . . . . . 56
19
Discharge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
20
Driver’s seat belt reminder light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
21
Odometer and trip meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
22
Multi- information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
23
Anti-lock brake system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
24
Traction control system OFF indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Headlight high beam indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
25
Snow mode indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
10
Automatic transmission indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
26
Key indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 297
11
Fuel filler door indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
27
Security indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
12
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
28
Instrument panel light control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
13
Low fuel level warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
29
Power mode indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
14
Damping mode indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
30
Malfunction indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
15
Open door warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
31
Cruise control indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Turn signal indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Headlight indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Fog light indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
For detailed information, refer to the description given in each section.
xii
PICTORIAL INDEX
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (Vehicles sold in Canada)
00L187a
xiii
PICTORIAL INDEX
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
16
Brake system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Slip indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360, 363
17
SRS warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Master warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
18
ODO/TRIP RESET button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Adaptive front-lighting system off indicator light . . . . . . . . . 56
19
Discharge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
20
Driver’s seat belt reminder light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
21
Odometer and trip meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
22
Multi-information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
23
Anti-lock brake system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
24
Traction control system OFF indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Headlight high beam indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
25
Snow mode indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
10
Automatic transmission indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
26
Key indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 297
11
Fuel filler door indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
27
Security indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
12
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
28
Instrument panel light control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
13
Low fuel level warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
29
Power mode indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
14
Damping mode indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
30
Malfunction indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
15
Open door warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
31
Cruise control indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Turn signal indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Tail indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Fog light indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
For detailed information, refer to the description given in each section.
xiv
PICTORIAL INDEX
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
REAR ARMREST
00L209
1
2
3
Moon roof switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Garage door opener switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Lexus Link System switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
00L248
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Rear seat control switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Refreshing rear seat switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Rear air conditioning control switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Rear electric sunshade switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Rear seat heater switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Rear climate control seat switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Audio rear control switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
For detailed information, refer to the description given in each section.
xv
PICTORIAL INDEX
SEAT AND STEERING WHEEL
1
Tilt and telescopic steering
adjustment switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
2
Seat cushion length
control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
3
Seat position, seat cushion
angle and height control
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156, 158
4
Seatback angle and head
restraint control switch . . . . 157, 164
5
Lumbar support control
switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
00L196
For detailed information, refer to the
description given in each section.
xvi
PICTORIAL INDEX
EXTERIOR VIEW
00L191a
1
Fuel filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
2
Rear window defogger . . . . . . . . . . 63
3
Trunk lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
4
Moon roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
5
Wiper and washer . . . . . . . . . . 58, 514
6
Outside rear view mirror . . . . . . . 229
7
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
8
Tire and wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
9
Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 516
10
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
For detailed information, refer to the
description given in each section.
xvii
BASIC OPERATION
QUICK REFERENCE
Driver’s seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiper switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
3
4
6
7
1
QUICK REFERENCE
1. DRIVER’S SEAT
Seat adjustment
Seat cushion
length
Seat
position
Seat cushion
angle
00L139
Seat cushion
height
Head restraint
height
Seatback
angle
Upper lumbar
support
Lower lumbar
support
Head restraint
angle
2
QUICK REFERENCE
2. STEERING WHEEL
TILT STEERING WHEEL
00L192
To tilt the steering wheel up or down to the desired angle,
push the control switch in the required direction and
release the button when the steering wheel reaches the
desired angle.
TELESCOPIC STEERING WHEEL
00L193
To move the steering wheel to the desired position, push
the control switch away from you or pull it toward you until
the steering wheel reaches the desired position.
3
QUICK REFERENCE
3. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
OPERATION OF SELECTOR LEVER
00L188
SELECTOR LEVER POSITION
P: Parking, engine starting and key removal
position
00L189
R: Reverse position
N: Neutral position
D: Normal driving position
(Shifting into overdrive possible)
S: “S” mode driving
4
+:
Upshifting
–:
Downshifting
Shift while pressing the brake pedal.
(Ignition switch must be in the “ON” position.)
QUICK REFERENCE
NOTE:
Vehicles with the cruise control: When the cruise control is being used, even if you downshift from “D” or “6” (sixth range) to “5” (fifth
range), or “D” or “5” (fifth range) to “4” (fourth range), engine braking will not be enabled because the cruise control is not cancelled.
For vehicle speed reduction, see page 326. Vehicles with the dynamic radar/laser cruise control: When the cruise control is being
used in the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode or in the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, even if you downshift
from “D” or “6” (sixth range) to “5” (fifth range) or D”, or “5” (fifth range) to “4” (fourth range), engine braking will not be enabled because
the cruise control is not cancelled. For vehicle speed reduction, see pages 356 and 341.
5
QUICK REFERENCE
4. HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL
SWITCH
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
With the ignition OFF
Parking, tail, license plate,
side marker and instrument
panel lights turn on.
Headlights also turn on.
00L100a
Automatic light control
With the engine started and parking brake
released
Parking, tail, license plate,
side marker and instrument
panel lights turn on.
Headlights also turn on
00L101a
at full intensity.
Automatic light control
6
High beam
00L102a
Headlight flasher
TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
Right or left turn
00L103a
Lane change
(Right or left)
QUICK REFERENCE
5. WIPER SWITCH
Intermittent operation type
Raindrop detection type
Mist wiper operation
Mist wiper operation
Intermittent operation
Automatic operation
Low speed operation
Low speed operation
High speed operation
High speed operation
Washer on
Washer on
7
QUICK REFERENCE
8
SECTION
1–1
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Keys and doors
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Smart key system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wireless remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Theft deterrent system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10
17
20
36
46
50
9
KEYS AND DOORS
KEYS
Vehicles equipped with smart key system
(Type A)
11L218
1
2
10
Mechanical keys (attached to the master keys) These keys work for the doors, trunk, trunk main
switch, glove box and trunk storage extension door,
but cannot start the engine.
Mechanical key (attached to the sub key) - This key
works for the doors, but cannot start the engine and
does not work for the trunk, trunk main switch, glove
box and trunk storage extension door.
3
Key number plate - Keep the plate in a safe place
such as your wallet, not in the vehicle.
4
Smart keys (master keys) - These keys will activate
the smart key system. They will not work for the trunk
main switch, glove box and trunk storage extension
door.
5
Smart key (sub key) - This key does not work for the
trunk, trunk main switch, glove box and trunk storage
extension door. This key cannot activate the smart
key system.
Before you use these keys, be sure to read “Smart key system”
on page 20.
11L219
Using a mechanical key
1 Lock switch
2 Mechanical key
When you use the mechanical key included on the side of the
smart key, slide the lock switch in the arrow direction and pull
the key as shown. To put the key back, slide the lock switch
in the arrow direction and slide the key back. Be sure to put the
key back when not in use.
KEYS AND DOORS
A transponder chip for the engine immobilizer system has
been placed in the master and sub keys. These chips are
required for the system to function correctly, so be careful not
to lose these keys. If you make your own duplicate key, you
will not be able to cancel the system or start the engine.
To protect items locked in the trunk or glove box when using
valet parking, leave the sub key with the attendant.
Since the doors and the trunk lid can be locked without a key,
you should always carry a spare master key in case you
accidentally lock your keys inside the vehicle.
If you should lose your keys or if you need additional keys,
duplicates can be made by a Lexus dealer using the key
number.
We recommend writing down the key number and storing it in
a safe place.
Flat keys
11L250
1 Mechanical flat key
2 Engine start flat key
A mechanical flat key and an engine start flat key are
included in the key case. Both flat keys are not equipped
with smart key system.
The mechanical flat key works in every lock, but cannot
be used to start the engine.
As a transponder chip is built in the engine start flat key,
you can start the engine only with this key.
A transponder chip for the engine immobilizer system has
been placed in the engine start flat key. This chip is required
for the system to function correctly, so be careful not to lose this
key. If you make your own duplicate key, you will not be able
to cancel the system or start the engine.
Insert your flat key plates in its key case as shown. We
recommend that you always carry this with you for emergency
use. Do not leave it in your vehicle.
11
KEYS AND DOORS
Starting the engine using an engine start flat
key
11L220
11L251a
NOTICE
1. Remove the engine start flat key from the key case.
2. Insert it into the ignition switch.
The flashing security indicator light goes out. This means the
engine immobilizer system is automatically canceled. (For
details, see “Engine immobilizer system” on page 17.)
NOTICE
Do not let the key case become bent as the flat keys
may fall out or become bent also.
The flat keys are designed for emergency use only, so
do not use them regularly instead of the other master
keys.
12
When using a key containing a transponder chip,
observe the following precautions:
When starting the engine, do not use the key with a
key ring resting on the key grip and do not press the
key ring against the key grip. Doing so may prevent
the engine from starting, or may cause the engine to
stop soon after it starts.
KEYS AND DOORS
11L221
When starting the engine, do not use the key in
proximity with other transponder keys (including the
flat key and keys of other vehicles), and do not press
other key plates against the key grip. Doing so may
prevent the engine from starting, or may cause the
engine to stop soon after it starts. If this happens,
remove the key once and then insert it again after
removing other transponder keys (including the flat
key and keys of other vehicles) from the ring or while
gripping or covering them with your hand to start the
engine.
11L241a
Do not bend the key grip or flat keys.
Do not cover the key grip or engine start flat key with
any material that cuts off electromagnetic waves.
Do not knock the key or flat keys hard against other
objects.
Do not leave the key or flat keys exposed to high
temperatures for a long period, such as on the
dashboard or hood under direct sunlight.
Do not put the key or flat keys in water or wash it in
an ultrasonic washer.
Do not use the key or engine start flat key with
electromagnetic materials.
13
KEYS AND DOORS
Vehicles not equipped with smart key system
(Type B)
To protect items locked in the trunk or glove box when using
valet parking, leave the sub key with the attendant.
Since the doors and trunk lid can be locked without a key, you
should always carry a spare master key in case you
accidentally lock your keys inside the vehicle.
11L025c
1
Master keys (black) - These keys work for every lock.
For your Lexus dealer to make a new key with a
built-in transponder chip, your dealer will need one
of them.
2
Sub key (gray) - This key will not open the trunk,
trunk main switch, the glove box and trunk storage
extension door.
3
Key number plate - Keep the plate in a safe place
such as your wallet, not in the vehicle.
A transponder chip for the engine immobilizer system has
been placed in the head of the master and sub keys. These
chips are required for the system to function correctly, so be
careful not to lose these keys. If you make your own duplicate
key, you will not be able to cancel the system or start the
engine.
14
If you should lose your keys or if you need additional keys,
duplicates can be made by a Lexus dealer using the key
number.
We recommend writing down the key number and storing it in
a safe place.
KEYS AND DOORS
Flat key
Starting the engine using a flat key
11g039c
As a transponder chip is built in its key case, you can start
the engine with this key.
The flat key works in every lock.
A transponder chip for the engine immobilizer system has
been placed in the key case of the flat key. This chip is required
for the system to function correctly, so be careful not to lose this
key. If you make your own duplicate key, you will not be able
to cancel the system or start the engine.
Insert your flat key plate in its key case as shown. We
recommend that you always carry this with you for emergency
use. Do not leave it in your vehicle.
11L050a
1. Remove the key plate from the key case.
2. Insert the key plate into the ignition switch. The security
indicator light keeps flashing.
3. Bring the key case closer to the ignition switch within 10
seconds as indicated by the arrow head. The indicator light
goes out. This means the engine immobilizer system is
automatically canceled. (For details, see “Engine immobilizer
system” on page 17.) You can put the key case away then. You
cannot cancel the engine immobilizer system if 10 seconds
have passed after you inserted the key plate. You need to
remove the key plate from the ignition switch and try it again
from the step 2.
4. Start the engine within 20 seconds after the security
indicator light goes out. You cannot start the engine if 20
seconds have passed after the security indicator went off. You
need to remove the key plate from the ignition switch and try
it again from the step 2.
15
KEYS AND DOORS
NOTICE
Do not let the key case become bent as the key plate
may fall out or become bent also.
The flat key is designed for emergency use only, so
do not use it regularly instead of the other master
keys.
11L021-2
When using a key containing a transponder chip,
observe the following precautions:
When starting the engine, do not use the key with a
key ring resting on the key grip and do not press the
key ring against the key grip. Doing so may prevent
the engine from starting, or may cause the engine to
stop soon after it starts.
16
11R055
When starting the engine, do not use the key in
proximity with other transponder keys (including the
flat key and keys of other vehicles), and do not press
other key plates against the key grip. Doing so may
prevent the engine from starting, or may cause the
engine to stop soon after it starts. If this happens,
remove the key once and then insert it again after
removing other transponder keys (including the flat
key and keys of other vehicles) from the ring or while
gripping or covering them with your hand to start the
engine.
KEYS AND DOORS
ENGINE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
Deactivation using the smart key system
11L358
11L222a
Do not bend the key grip or flat key.
Do not cover the key grip or flat key with any material
that cuts off electromagnetic waves.
Do not knock the key or flat key hard against other
objects.
Do not leave the key or flat key exposed to high
temperatures for a long period, such as on the
dashboard or hood under direct sunlight.
Do not put the key or flat key in water or wash it in an
ultrasonic washer.
Do not use the key or flat key with electromagnetic
materials.
The engine immobilizer system is a theft prevention
system. When you enter the vehicle carrying a smart key
and push the ignition switch, the electronic code in the
key is automatically checked to determine whether it
corresponds to the registered ID code for the vehicle. If
the key indicator light comes on after the ID code
verification, you can start the engine.
This system is automatically set when the ignition switch is
turned to the “LOCK” position. At this time, the security
indicator light flashes. When you push the ignition switch, the
security indicator light goes out and the system is cancelled
automatically, which enables the engine to start.
The engine immobilizer system cannot be cancelled if the
cancel switch of the smart key system is turned on. For details,
see “Deactivating the smart key system” on page 34.
17
KEYS AND DOORS
For your Lexus dealer to make you a new key with built-in
transponder chip, your dealer will need your key number and
master key. However, there is a limit to the number of
additional keys your Lexus dealer can make for you.
Deactivation using the key
If you make your own duplicate key, you will not be able
to cancel the system or start the engine.
11L223a
NOTICE
Do not modify, remove or disassemble the engine
immobilizer system. If any unauthorized changes or
modifications are made, proper operation of the system
cannot be guaranteed.
1 Type A
2 Type B
The engine immobilizer system is a theft prevention
system. When you insert the key in the ignition switch, the
transponder chip in the key’s head transmits an electronic
code to the vehicle. The engine will start only when the
electronic code in the chip corresponds to the registered
ID code for the vehicle.
The system is automatically set when the key is removed from
the ignition switch. At this time, the security indicator light
flashes. When you insert the key in the ignition switch, the
security indicator light goes out and the system is canceled
automatically, which enables the engine to start.
The transponder chip of the flat key is in its key case. You can
cancel the engine immobilizer system using the flat key. (For
details, see pages 12 and 15.)
18
KEYS AND DOORS
For your Lexus dealer to make you a new key with built-in
transponder chip, your dealer will need your key number and
master key or the flat key. However, there is a limit to the
number of additional keys your Lexus dealer can make for you.
If you make your own duplicate key, you will not be able
to cancel the system or start the engine.
For vehicles sold in U.S.A.
FCC ID: MOZRI-20BTY
MADE IN JAPAN
FCC ID: MOZRI-15HTY
MADE IN JAPAN
CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
This device complies with RSS- 210 of Industry
Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of the
device.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
19
11L229b
KEYS AND DOORS
SMART KEY SYSTEM (Master keys only)
1 Locking and unlocking
2 Unlocking the trunk lid
3 Key indicator
4 Starting the engine
By carrying a smart key, which is different from a conventional key that is inserted in the keyholes or ignition switch, you
can lock and unlock the doors, unlock the trunk and start the engine.
For locking the doors, see “Locking the doors with the smart key system” on page 25. For unlocking the doors, see “Unlocking the
door(s) with smart key system” on page 28. For unlocking the trunk lid, see “Unlocking the trunk lid with smart key system” on page
31. For starting the engine, see “Smart ignition system with steering lock” on page 297.
If the smart key battery is discharged, the smart key system
cannot be used. Use the mechanical key integrated into the
smart key by inserting it in the door keyhole to lock or unlock
doors and into the trunk lid keyhole to unlock the trunk lid. To
start the engine, insert the smart key. In order to activate the
smart key system, the battery should be replaced. For details,
see “Replacing the battery (Type A)” on page 42.
You can deactivate the smart key system by using the cancel
switch. In this case, all the functions in the smart key system
will be deactivated. For details, see “Deactivating the smart
key system” on page 34.
20
KEYS AND DOORS
INFORMATION
Be sure to take the smart key with you.
In the following cases, the smart key system or
wireless remote control feature may not operate
properly. (If this happens, use a mechanical key to
lock or unlock the doors and trunk lid and a smart key
to start the engine.)
When facilities issuing strong electromagnetic
waves such as TV towers, electric power stations,
broadcasting stations are nearby.
When you are carrying a smart key together with a
mobile communications system such as a
two-way radio or cellular phone.
When the smart key is in contact with or covered
by a metallic object.
When another person is operating a wireless
remote control function on another vehicle near
your vehicle.
Alarms and warning messages
Your Lexus is equipped with alarms inside and outside, as
well as warning messages in the multi- information
display, that remind you if there is a problem involving the
smart key system.
Cases which are expected to happen frequently are
shown in the illustrations and the other cases are
described in the table. If an alarm or warning message
comes on, check to see what the problem is referring to
the illustrations and table, and take the appropriate
measure.
If you do not drive your vehicle, store the smart key,
keeping it at least 5 m (15 ft.) away from the vehicle.
21
KEYS AND DOORS
11L230
When a door is opened and closed with the ignition
switch in the “ACC” or “ON” position and with the
selector lever in the “P” position, and then the smart key
is carried outside of the vehicle.
Inside alarm: One chime
Outside alarm: 3 beeps
Multi-information display: “Key is not Detected”
See page 98 for details.
22
11L231a
When you attempted to lock the door(s) with the smart
key still in the vehicle or without turning off the ignition
switch.
Outside alarm: One beep (sounds for 2 seconds)
See page 26 and 27 for details.
KEYS AND DOORS
11L232a
When you lock the smart key in the trunk or attempt to
lock a door which is not completely closed.
Outside alarm: One beep (sounds for 10 seconds)
See page 27 and 32 for details.
23
KEYS AND DOORS
Inside warning alarm
24
Outside warning
alarm
Multi-information
warning message display
Causes
Reference
page
Chimes
None
None
You opened a door without
turning off the ignition
switch.
47
Beep
None
“Shift to P Range”
You opened a door without
turning off the ignition switch
when the selector lever is in
a position other than “P”.
99
Beep
Beep
“Shift to P Range” and “Key
is not Detected” appear
alternately.
You exited and closed a
door without turning off the
ignition switch when the
selector lever is in a position
other than “P”.
98, 99
One chime
None
“Low Key Battery”
(shown for about 5 seconds)
Smart key battery power is
insufficient.
99
One chime
None
“Key is not Detected”
(shown for about 5 seconds)
The smart key was not in the
vehicle when you pushed
the ignition switch in the
“LOCK” position.
98
KEYS AND DOORS
Locking the doors with smart key system
INFORMATION
When locking the doors, be sure to push the lock
button on the outside door handle slowly and surely.
If you push the button quickly, the doors may not
lock.
11L224
The smart key system will lock the doors without being
inserted into the door keyhole.
When you exit the vehicle carrying the smart key and push the
lock button on the outside door handle with all the doors
closed, all the doors will be locked provided that the electronic
code in the key corresponds to the registered ID code for the
vehicle.
When opening or closing a door, do not touch the
lock button on the outside door handle.
When a wireless key is used to lock the doors and a
smart key is left in the effective range of the smart key
system in the vehicle, the doors cannot be unlocked
using the smart key system. In this case, use the
wireless remote function to unlock the doors.
You cannot activate smart unlocking functions
within 3 seconds after the smart locking function is
activated.
At this time, you will hear one beep and the turn signal lights
flash once. However, when you push the lock button on the
outside door handle with any door not closed securely, a beep
sounds for 10 seconds. (For details, see page 27.)
If outer foot lights are illuminated, you can turn off the lights by
pushing the “LOCK” button on the smart key. (For details, see
“Outer foot lights” on page 232.)
25
KEYS AND DOORS
The doors cannot be locked using the smart key system
in the following conditions:
11L233a
Key reminder alarm
If you push the lock button on the outside door handle
with a smart key left in the vehicle, an alarm sounds for 2
seconds and the doors will not lock.
Before you push the lock button, make sure you are carrying
the smart key.
26
INFORMATION
Do not put a smart key on the instrument panel, rear
package tray or floor, or in the glove box or auxiliary
box near the selector lever, which falls outside of the
effective range of the smart key system. As the alarm
does not sound when a key is left in such a place, you
might accidentally lock the doors by pushing the lock
button on the outside door handle and be locked out
of the vehicle. Be sure to take the smart key with you.
If you have the smart key but bring it very close to the
window or outside door handle, the alarm might
activate. In this case, keep the smart key a certain
distance away from the window or outside door
handle and then push the lock button again.
If the smart key is left in the vehicle, attempting to
lock the door by pushing in the button located in the
inside door handle and holding up the outside door
handle will unlock all the doors and activate the alarm
for 2 seconds.
KEYS AND DOORS
11L234a
11L235a
Ignition on/off reminder alarm
Open door warning
If you push the lock button on the outside door handle
without turning off the ignition switch, an alarm sounds
for 2 seconds and the doors will not lock.
If you push the lock button on the outside door handle
while any door is not completely closed, an alarm sounds
for 10 seconds and the doors will not lock.
Before you push the lock button, make sure the ignition switch
is in the “LOCK” position.
To stop the alarm, close all the doors securely or push the
“UNLOCK” button on the smart key.
Before you push the lock button, make sure all the doors are
securely closed.
27
KEYS AND DOORS
Unlocking the door(s) with smart key system
11L225
The smart key system can be used to unlock the door(s)
without being inserted into the door keyhole.
When you get close to your vehicle (about 1 m (3 ft.) from each
outside door handle), and are carrying the smart key, the
electronic code emitted from the key is automatically checked
to determine if it corresponds to the registered ID code for the
vehicle. After this, the outer foot lights come on. (For outer foot
lights, see “Outer foot lights” on page 232.) When you take
hold of the back side of the outside door handle on the door
firmly, it will unlock and the key indicator light blinks. (You can
select the doors to be unlocked. For details, see “Changing the
doors to be unlocked” on page 30.)
28
At this time, two beeps sound and the turn signal lights flash
twice. As the door(s) is(are) unlocked, the interior light comes
on for 15 seconds if the interior light switch is in the “DOOR”
position. However, the interior lights go out when you push the
power door lock switch in the lock position or turn the ignition
switch to the “ACC” or “ON” position. For further information,
see “Interior lights” on page 111.
You have 30 seconds to open a door after operating the smart
unlocking function. If a door is not opened by then, all the doors
will be automatically locked again.
KEYS AND DOORS
INFORMATION
When unlocking the door(s), be sure to take hold of
the back side of the outside door handle firmly as
shown in the illustration. Taking hold of the handle
with a gloved hand might cause a delay in unlocking
or may not unlock.
If a large amount of water is applied to the outside
door handle during heavy rain or a car wash, and
someone carrying a smart key is near the vehicle, the
door(s) might be unlocked. However, if the outside
door handle is not pulled out, the doors will lock
automatically after about 30 seconds.
When you take hold of the handle to unlock the
door(s), be sure to confirm that the door(s) has(have)
been unlocked. If the emergency flashers flash twice,
two beeps sound outside the vehicle and the key
indicator starts blinking, the doors are unlocked. At
this time, you can pull the outside door handle to
open the door. If you quickly move closer to the
vehicle or pull the outside door handle quickly, the
doors might not unlock. If you cannot open the door
by pulling the outside door handle at this time, push
it back to the original position and then pull it out
again.
If you bring the smart key very close to the outside
door handle, the doors might not unlock.
If another person who is not carrying a smart key
takes hold of an outside door handle when you are
within the effective range of the smart key system, the
door(s) may not unlock.
29
KEYS AND DOORS
Adjusting the volume of beeps
11L340b
You can adjust the volume of the beeps which confirm the
locking or unlocking the doors or remind you when the
doors are not completely closed.
Turn the volume adjustment knob counterclockwise to
increase the volume or clockwise to decrease it. The beep
sound is completely deactivated when you turn the knob
clockwise until you hear a click.
INFORMATION
The volume of the smart key system alarm is not
adjustable.
30
Changing the doors to be unlocked
11L214
1 Unlocking a single door
3 Unlocking side doors
2 Unlocking all the doors
When you push the “LOCK” button together with the
“TRUNK” button on the smart key for about 5 seconds
with the ignition switch off, you can change the settings
for door unlocking.
The settings will change from the door on which you take hold
of the outside door handle, to all the doors, to the doors on the
side closest to the smart key, and then back to the door on
which you take hold of the outside door handle.
After setting, a tone sounds and the multi-information display
shows which setting is selected. Outside the vehicle, one beep
sounds when a door is set to be unlocked, 2 beeps sound when
side doors are set, and 3 beeps sound when all the doors are
set.
KEYS AND DOORS
INFORMATION
If you get in the vehicle from the driver’s door using a
smart key while the side doors or one door is set to be
unlocked, all the smart unlocking controls activated by
the smart key will be stopped for security. If you get out
of the vehicle from the driver’s door carrying the smart
key and reaches out of the effective range of the smart
key system, unlocking control by the smart key will be
possible. However, unlocking control may not be
carried out for 5 seconds after you get out from the
vehicle. In this case, perform unlocking operation again
after 5 seconds.
Unlocking the trunk lid with smart key system
11L236a
When you push the trunk button on the trunk lid while
carrying a smart key, the system allows you to unlock the
trunk lid without the key being inserted into the keyhole.
INFORMATION
If you bring the smart key close to the center of the
bumper, the trunk lid might not unlock.
31
KEYS AND DOORS
INFORMATION
11L237a
If you close the trunk lid while a smart key is left in the
trunk, an alarm should be activated. However, if the
key is placed near the spare tire or at the edge of the
trunk, or if the key is in a metallic bag, the trunk lid
might not be unlocked.
If you accidentally lock a smart key in the trunk, be
aware that anyone can unlock the trunk by pushing
the trunk button.
Key reminder alarm
If you lock your key in the trunk, an alarm sounds for 10
seconds to remind you that the key is in the trunk.
To stop the alarm, push the trunk button. At this time, the trunk
lid is unlocked. Even after the alarm stops sounding, pushing
the trunk button will unlock the trunk lid.
32
Even when the smart key is outside the trunk, an
alarm still might be activated if the key is near the
trunk. However, if you have the key, there is no
problem.
KEYS AND DOORS
Battery power saving
When doors are locked, the smart key system transmits
electromagnetic waves to the outside of the vehicle at regular
intervals. For this reason, the vehicle battery will be
discharged if the vehicle is left for a long time. If the key is left
within the effective range of the smart key system outside of
the vehicle, the key and the vehicle transmit electromagnetic
waves periodically.
If these conditions continue for a long time, the battery in the
key and vehicle will be discharged and from the sixth day,
smart unlocking operations will become slow.
To prevent the batteries from being discharged, the smart key
system is automatically deactivated in the following conditions:
If there is no smart door locking operation for more than 14
days
If the key is left within the effective range of the smart key
system outside of the vehicle for more than 10 minutes
To reactivate the smart key system properly, perform any of the
following:
INFORMATION
To maintain communication with the vehicle, smart
keys (including master keys) use built-in battery
power. The battery service life is about 1 to 3 years
on average. If battery power becomes insufficient,
replace the battery with a new one.
The smart key continually receives electromagnetic
waves, and if it receives strong electromagnetic
waves over a period of time, the battery can be
drastically run down. Therefore, avoid storing smart
keys near any electrical appliances.
Here is a list of electrical appliances which may have
adverse effects on the smart key performance: TVs,
personal computers, cellular phone or cordless
phone recharger units, electric light stands and
fluorescent desk lights
Note that you should always keep such electrical
appliances at least 1 m (3 ft.) away from the smart key.
(a) Press the lock button on the outside door handle while
carrying the smart key.
(b) Perform a wireless remote control operation.
(c) Insert and turn the key in the keyhole of the door.
33
KEYS AND DOORS
Deactivating the smart key system
INFORMATION
The smart key system will be deactivated in the
following cases:
The key cancel switch is turned on.
11L341b
1 Smart key system is on.
2 Smart key system is off.
The cancel switch for this system is located at the bottom
of the instrument panel on the driver side. When you push
the button, the smart key system will be deactivated.
Pushing the button again will reactivate the system.
When the smart key system is deactivated, use a mechanical
key or wireless remote control function key to lock and unlock
the doors or unlock the trunk lid. To start the engine, insert a
smart key into the ignition switch.
If you do not intend to drive your vehicle for a long time, push
the cancel switch to deactivate the smart key system.
34
The smart key is inserted into the ignition switch.
The battery of the smart key is discharged. (In this
case, the indicator on the smart key does not blink
even if you push a button on the key.)
KEYS AND DOORS
For vehicles sold in U.S.A.
FCC ID: MOZRO-1TY-1
MADE IN
JAPAN
CAUTION
Changes
FCC or
ID:modifications
NI4B11UE not expressly approved by
the party responsible
compliance could void the
MADE INfor
JAPAN
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
FCC ID: PENASAT1
MADE IN JAPAN
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTICE
This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation.
This
equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there
is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the equipment off
and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit
different from that to which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV
technician for help.
35
KEYS AND DOORS
For vehicles sold in Canada
WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROL*
This device complies with RSS- 210 of Industry
Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of the
device.
11L215
1 Type A
2 Type B
3 Indicator light
4 Locking the doors and sounding an alarm
5 Unlocking the doors, and opening the windows and
moon roof
6 Unlocking the trunk lid
NOTE:
* This feature can be deactivated as vehicle theft deterrent
measure in case of the loss of the wireless remote control
function key.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
When you operate any button on the key, push it slowly and
surely. At this time, the indicator light on the key grip flashes
once.
36
KEYS AND DOORS
The operational range of the wireless remote control is
approximately 1 m (3 ft.). The effective range may vary with
different conditions. To activate the wireless remote control
without fail, do it approximately 1 m (3 ft.) from your Lexus.
In the following cases, the battery in the key may be
discharged. If this is a case, replace the battery using a special
screwdriver. For the key of Type A, we recommend that you
have the battery replaced by your Lexus dealer to prevent the
key from being damaged.
The remote control does not work.
The wireless remote control function key is an electronic
component. Observe the following instructions in order
not to cause damage to the key.
Do not leave the wireless remote control function key in
places where the temperature becomes high such as on the
dashboard.
Do not disassemble it.
Avoid knocking it hard against other objects or dropping it.
Avoid putting it in water.
The operational range of wireless remote control becomes
extremely short.
The indicator light on the key is dimmed or does not come
on.
For the replacement of the battery of the Type B key, see
“Replacing the battery” on page 44. You can also have the
battery of the key replaced by your Lexus dealer.
If you lose the wireless function key, contact your Lexus dealer
as soon as possible to avoid the possibility of theft, or an
accident. (See “If you lose your keys or lock yourself out” on
page 434.)
If your vehicle is equipped with smart key system, you can use
up to 5 master keys and 3 sub keys for the same vehicle. In
case of the vehicle not equipped with smart key system, up to
4 master keys are available. Contact your Lexus dealer for
detailed information.
37
KEYS AND DOORS
Locking/Unlocking the doors
When you push the “LOCK” button on the key briefly, all
the doors can be locked from outside the vehicle.
At this time, you can hear one beep and the turn signal lights
flash once.* However, when you push the “LOCK” button with
any door not closed securely, the buzzer sounds for 10
seconds.** To stop the buzzer, close all the doors securely or
push the “UNLOCK” button. If the key is in the ignition switch,
locking cannot be done.
When you push the “UNLOCK” button, the driver’s door
is unlocked and outer foot lights come on. Pushing the
“UNLOCK” button once again within 3 seconds from the
first push, all other doors are also unlocked.*
For outer foot lights, see “Outer foot lights” on page 232.
NOTE:
* The 2-step unlocking function can be changed.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
NOTE:
* The turn signal lights can be set not to flash.
** The buzzer can be set not to sound if a door is not closed
securely.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
At this time, two beeps sound and the turn signal lights flash
twice.* Together with the activation of unlocking, the interior
light comes on for 15 seconds if the interior light switch is in
“DOOR” position.** However, this function does not work
when the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position. For
further information, see “Interior lights” on page 111.
If outer foot lights are illuminated, you can turn off the lights by
pushing the “LOCK” button on the key. (For details, see “Outer
foot lights” on page 232.)
You have 30 seconds to open a door after using the wireless
remote unlock feature.*** If a door is not opened by then, all
the doors will be automatically locked again.
NOTICE
Do not push the “LOCK” button any longer than 2 to 3
seconds. Pushing the button longer activates an alarm.
For details, see page 40.
NOTE:
* The turn signal lights can be set not to flash.
** The interior light can be set not to come on or the duration
of lighting can be changed.
*** The time before automatic re-locking can be changed.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
Even if the “LOCK” or “UNLOCK” button is kept pressed in, the
locking or unlocking operation is not repeated. Release the
button and then push it again.
38
KEYS AND DOORS
Adjusting the volume of beeps
Unlocking the trunk lid
11L340b
You can adjust the volume of the beeps which confirm the
locking or unlocking the doors or remind you when the
doors are not completely closed.
Turn the volume adjustment knob counterclockwise to
increase the volume or clockwise to decrease it. The beep
sound is completely deactivated when you turn the knob
clockwise until you hear a click.
INFORMATION
11L238a
1 Type A
2 Type B
When you keep the button pushed for about 1 second, you
can unlock the trunk lid.* One beep sounds.
This function does not work when the ignition switch is in the
“ON” position.
NOTE:
* The operation method can be changed.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
The volume of the smart key system alarm is not
adjustable.
39
KEYS AND DOORS
Sounding an alarm*
Operating the windows and moon roof
The windows and moon roof can be operated using a
wireless remote control key from outside the vehicle.*
11L239
1 Type A
NOTE:
* The windows can be deactivated. The moon roof can be
set to slide open or tilt up or deactivated.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
11L240
2 Type B
When you keep the “PANIC” button pushed for about 2 to
3 seconds, an alarm sounds to deter any person trying to
break into or damage your vehicle.
If you want to stop the alarm, push any button.
This function does not work when the ignition switch is in the
“ON” position.
NOTE:
* The alarm can be set not to sound.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
1 Type A
2 Type B
Push the “UNLOCK” button until the windows and moon roof
start to move. At this time one beep sounds. When you
release the button, the windows and moon roof stop operating.
This function will work even with the window lock switch
pressed in.
40
KEYS AND DOORS
For vehicles sold in U.S.A.
FCC ID: HYQ12BBK
MADE CAUTION
IN JAPAN
Changes
FCC or
ID:modifications
NI4B11UE not expressly approved by
the party responsible
compliance could void the
MADE INfor
JAPAN
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTICE
This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation.
This
equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there
is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the equipment off
and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit
different from that to which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV
technician for help.
41
KEYS AND DOORS
For vehicles sold in Canada
This device complies with RSS- 210 of Industry
Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of the
device.
Replacing the battery (Type A)
We recommend that you have the battery replaced by your
Lexus dealer to prevent the key from being damaged.
When you replace the battery, prepare a lithium battery
CR2032 or equivalent and a special screwdriver.
CAUTION
Special care should be taken to prevent small children
from swallowing the removed battery or components.
NOTICE
Replace only with the same or equivalent type
recommended by a Lexus dealer.
Dispose of used batteries according to the local laws.
42
KEYS AND DOORS
11L228
1. While sliding the lock switch using your finger, remove the
cover on the side of the key using a special screwdriver.
11L226
2. Remove the module from the main frame.
11L162
3. Pull the battery base out of the module using a special
screwdriver.
11L163
4. Remove the battery base from the module.
5. Take out the discharged battery and put a new battery with
the positive side up.
43
KEYS AND DOORS
NOTICE
Make sure the positive side and negative side of the
battery are faced correctly.
Do not replace the battery with wet hands. Water may
cause unexpected rust.
Do not touch or move any components inside the
transmitter, or it may interfere with proper operation.
Be careful not to bend the electrode when inserting
the battery and that dust or oils do not adhere to the
inside of the module.
6. Install the battery base into the module.
NOTICE
Replacing the battery (Type B)
When you replace the battery, prepare a lithium battery
CR1616 or equivalent and a special screwdriver.
CAUTION
Special care should be taken to prevent small children
from swallowing the removed battery or components.
NOTICE
When replacing the battery, be careful not to lose the
components, screws and O-ring.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type
recommended by a Lexus dealer.
Dispose of used batteries according to the local laws.
Take care not to damage or bend the battery base when
installing.
7. Install the module into the main frame.
8. Install the cover back on the side of the key by sliding it using
your finger.
9. When pushing any switch on the wireless key, make sure
the indicator light comes on.
11L028-1
1. Remove the screw, and then the cover while pushing it in the
arrow direction.
44
KEYS AND DOORS
NOTICE
Make sure the positive side and negative side of the
battery are faced correctly.
11L029-1
Do not replace the battery with wet hands. Water may
cause unexpected rust.
Do not touch or move any components inside the
transmitter, or it may interfere with proper operation.
2. Remove the module from the key frame.
Be careful not to bend the electrode when inserting
the battery and that dust or oils do not adhere to the
inside of the module.
Take care not to lose the screws and O-ring.
5. Install the lid with the 2 screws.
11L030-1
NOTICE
Take care not to damage or bend the O-ring when
installing.
6. Install the module into the key frame and secure the cover
with the screw.
3. Remove the 2 screws to take out the lid of the module.
7. When pushing any switch on the wireless key, make sure
the indicator light comes on.
4. Take out the discharged battery and put a new battery with
the positive side up.
45
KEYS AND DOORS
If a wrong key is used, the key cylinder rotates freely to isolate
inside mechanism. So, door locking is protected from thieves.
DOORS
See page 25 for locking the doors with smart key system
and page 28 for unlocking them with smart key system.
Locking with key
11L227
1 Type A
2 Type B
3 Lock
4 Unlock
Turn the key towards the front of the vehicle to lock and
towards the back to unlock.
The doors lock and unlock simultaneously with the driver’s
door. Turning the key once will unlock the driver’s door and
twice in succession will unlock all doors simultaneously.*
NOTE:
* The 2-step unlocking function can be changed.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
46
The windows and moon roof can be opened and closed from
outside the vehicle using the key. For details, see “Power
window switches” on page 64 and “Moon roof” on page 147.
KEYS AND DOORS
Locking with inside lock button
11L047a
Closing the door with the lock button pushed in will also lock
the door. Be careful not to lock your keys in the vehicle. Doors
cannot be locked when either front door is open and the key is
in the ignition. For the vehicles equipped with the smart key
system, if you open the driver’s door to get out from the vehicle
without returning the ignition switch to the “LOCK” position,
chimes sound and the door will not lock when closing the door.
If the vehicle is subjected to a severe frontal, rear or side
impact with the ignition switch turned to the “ON” position, all
doors will unlock automatically after a few seconds.
CAUTION
1 Lock
2 Unlock
Push in the lock button to lock and unlock the door.
The front doors can be opened by pulling the inside handles
even if the lock buttons are in the locked position.
CAUTION
Before driving, make sure the doors are closed and
locked, especially when small children are in the
vehicle. Along with the proper use of seat belts, locking
the doors helps prevent the driver and passengers from
being thrown out from the vehicle during an accident.
It also helps prevent the doors from being opened
unintentionally.
Do not pull the inside handle of the front doors while
driving. The doors will open and an accident may occur.
Lexus strongly recommends that all children be placed
in the rear seat of the vehicle.
47
KEYS AND DOORS
Locking with power door lock switch
11L048a
1 Lock
2 Unlock
To lock all the doors simultaneously, push the power door
lock switch down on the front side. Pushing down on the
rear side will unlock them.
When you push the power door lock switch on the rear side to
unlock the doors to allow a passenger to get in, the outer foot
lights come on. To turn off the lights, push the power door lock
switch on the front side. (For details, see “Outer foot lights” on
page 232.)
The same switch is also found on the front passenger’s side.
However, pushing this switch will neither turn on nor off the
outer foot lights.
48
Auto door locking function*: All the doors will lock
automatically when the selector lever is moved out of “P”
position. This auto door locking function is operable if any
doors are unlocked while the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position.
NOTE:
* This setting can be changed as in the following:
All the doors are locked automatically at 20 km/h (12
mph) or higher vehicle speed. However, if any door is
unlocked during driving, this auto locking function does
not operate until the unlocked door is once opened.
When the selector lever is moved out of “P” position and
the brake pedal is held off your foot, this function is
enabled.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
KEYS AND DOORS
Door closer (some models)
Locking with rear door child-protector
If any door is closed but does not latch shut, it
automatically closes completely. This system is equipped
on all the doors and will activate regardless of the ignition
switch position.
Pulling the door handle will cancel the door closer, allowing you
to open the door which is about to close. However, pulling the
door handle of the rear door which is locked with the child
protector will not cancel the door closer.
11L213
CAUTION
Careful attention is needed so as not to get your
fingers trapped as the door automatically closes
when the door has not been fully closed.
Never allow a child to operate the door.
1 Lock
2 Unlock
Whenever small children are in the vehicle, lock the rear
door so that it does not open by the inside door handle.
To do this, move the knob to the “LOCK” position as
shown and then close the door.
49
KEYS AND DOORS
THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM
17L014b
17L013
Security indicator light
To deter theft of the vehicle, this system is designed to
sound an alarm if any of the doors, trunk or hood is
forcibly unlocked or opened or the battery terminal is
disconnected and then reconnected while the vehicle is
locked.
The alarm blows the horn intermittently, flashes the headlights,
tail lights, turn signal lights and other exterior lights. When the
interior light switch is in the “DOOR” position, the interior lights
also turn on.
After the alarm is activated, when you unlock any door or the
trunk using an ignition key or wireless remote control or smart
key system, the tail lights turn on for about 2 seconds to inform
you that the system was activated.
50
Setting the system
In the case of the smart key system:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” position.
The engine immobilizer system causes to the indicator light to
flash.
2. Close and lock all the doors, trunk and hood using an
ignition key or wireless remote control or smart key
system.
If you lock them with wireless remote control or smart key
system, the turn signals flash once.*
NOTE:
* The turn signals can be set not to flash.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
KEYS AND DOORS
The flashing indicator light will stay on when all the doors, trunk
and hood are closed and locked.
3. After 30 seconds, the indicator starts flashing and the
system is set.
3. After 30 seconds, the indicator starts flashing and the
system is set.
After the system is set, when you close the trunk which is
opened with an ignition key or wireless remote control or smart
key system, the system is set again. However, this function
operates only when the door is not unlocked during which the
trunk is opened and closed.
After the system is set, when you close the trunk which is
opened with an ignition key or wireless remote control or smart
key system, the system is set again. However, this function
operates only when the door is not unlocked during which the
trunk is opened and closed.
In case of the ignition switch with the key inserted:
1. Turn the ignition key to the “LOCK” position and
remove it.
The engine immobilizer system causes the indicator light to
flash.
2. Close and lock all the doors, trunk and hood using an
ignition key or wireless remote control or smart key
system.
Cancelling the system
When you unlock any door using an ignition key, wireless
remote control or smart key system, the system is
cancelled.
If you unlock any door with the wireless remote control or smart
key system, the turn signals flash twice.*
NOTE:
* The turn signals can be set not to flash.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
If you lock them with wireless remote control or smart key
system, the turn signals flash once.*
NOTE:
* The turn signals can be set not to flash.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
The flashing indicator light will stay on when all the doors, trunk
and hood are closed and locked.
51
KEYS AND DOORS
Activating the system
Testing the system
The alarm sounds for 60 seconds if any of the following are
operated:
1. Open all the windows.
Unlocking any door or trunk without using an ignition key,
wireless remote control or smart key system.
Opening the hood forcibly.
Reconnecting the battery.
Hot-wiring the ignition.
If any door is unlocked and the ignition key is not in the ignition
switch during the alarm sounding, its door is automatically
locked.
To stop the alarm: Use either of the following methods.
Unlock the door or trunk using an ignition key or wireless
remote control or smart key system.
Turn the ignition switch on.
2. Set the system as described above.
The doors should be locked with an ignition key, wireless
remote control or smart key system. Be sure to wait until the
indicator light starts flashing.
3. Unlock one of the doors from the inside through one of
the opened windows.
The system should activate the alarm.
4. Unlock any of the doors with an ignition key, wireless
remote control or smart key system to cancel the system.
5. Repeat this operation for the other doors, trunk and
hood.
When testing the hood, also check that the system is activated
when the battery terminal is disconnected and then
reconnected.
If the system does not work properly, have it checked by your
Lexus dealer.
NOTICE
When disconnecting the battery, be sure to cancel the
theft deterrent system. Otherwise, the system could
activate an alarm and lock the unlocked door(s)
automatically.
52
SECTION
1–2
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Switches
Headlight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlight dimmer and turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlight cleaner switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear window and outside rear view mirror defogger switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power window switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat heater switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Climate control seat switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Refreshing rear seat switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
54
57
58
58
62
63
64
68
69
71
76
53
SWITCHES
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
Vehicles sold in U.S.A.: When the headlights are on, the
headlight indicator lights up in the instrument cluster.
Vehicles sold in Canada: When the tail lights are on, the tail
light indicator lights up in the instrument cluster.
12L163
1 U.S.A.
2 Canada
To turn the lights on, twist the knob on the end of the lever.
FIRST CLICKSTOP: Only the parking, tail, license plate, side
marker and instrument panel lights turn on.
SECOND CLICKSTOP: Headlights also turn on.
THIRD CLICKSTOP (“AUTO”): The headlights and all other
lights automatically turn on depending on the darkness of the
surroundings.*
NOTE:
* The operating condition or sensitivity can be changed.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
54
With the knob in the “AUTO” position, there may be a case
that the headlights do not turn on immediately, even when
the vehicle enters a dark place such as a tunnel or parking
lot according to lighting conditions. In this case, we
recommend you to twist the knob manually to the second
clickstop to turn on the headlights immediately.
When the headlight switch is turned to the first or second
clickstop, the brightness of the instrument cluster will be
reduced slightly unless the instrument panel light control knob
is turned fully on.
However, the brightness of the instrument cluster will not be
reduced in daytime even when the headlight switch is turned
to first or second clickstop.
SWITCHES
Daytime Running Light System
12L054b
The headlights turn on at reduced intensity when the parking
brake is released with the engine started, even with the light
switch in the “OFF” position. They will not go off until the
ignition switch is turned off.
To turn on the other exterior lights and instrument panel lights,
twist the knob to the first clickstop.
Twist the knob to the second clickstop to turn on the headlights
to full intensity for driving at night.
The automatic light control sensor is on the top center of the
instrument panel.
Do not place anything on the instrument panel, and/or do not
affix anything on the windshield to block this sensor.
When you turn on the headlights, the lights automatically turn
off about 30 seconds after any of the doors is opened and
closed with the ignition switch turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK”
position.* To turn them on again, turn the ignition switch to the
“ON” position, or turn the headlight switch off and then twist the
knob until the first or second clickstop. If you are going to park
for over one week, make sure the headlight switch is off.
When setting the knob to the third clickstop (“AUTO”), the
headlights will automatically adjust to full intensity and/or turn
on the other lights depending on the darkness of the
surroundings. Likewise, as the surroundings become brighter,
the headlights will turn to reduced intensity, ultimately turning
off the other lights.
NOTICE
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not
leave the lights on longer than necessary when the
engine is not running.
When the headlight switch is on with all the doors locked and
the trunk closed, pushing the “LOCK” button on the wireless
remote control key turns off the headlights.
NOTE:
* The time before turning off the lights can be changed.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
55
SWITCHES
Automatic headlight leveling system
The headlight beam level is always maintained automatically
at the proper level in all loading conditions so that your
headlights do not dazzle other road users.
If the system fails, the “AFS OFF” indicator light in the
instrument cluster will flash. If this occurs, have your vehicle
checked by your Lexus dealer.
12L179
Adaptive front-lighting system
Adaptive front-lighting system (AFS) provides the proper
headlight beam level according to the current driving
conditions. This system moves the headlight beam left or right
according to the turning angle of the steering wheel. The
synergy of this system and the automatic headlight leveling
system improves visibility at the intersections and curves.
1 Adaptive front-lighting system cancel switch
2 Inoperative
3 Operative
The system operates when the vehicle speed increases above
10 km/h (6 mph), and stops when the vehicle speed drops
below 10 km/h (6 mph).
When the system is canceled, the “AFS OFF” indicator lights
up in the instrument cluster.
The system can operate within the limited range of the steering
wheel turning angle.
56
If you do not want to activate the system, push in the
switch to cancel the system. To turn it on, push it again.
If the system fails, the indicator light in the instrument cluster
will flash. If this occurs, have your vehicle checked by your
Lexus dealer.
SWITCHES
HEADLIGHT DIMMER AND TURN
SIGNAL SWITCH
12L165
12L164
For signaling turns, move the lever up or down in the
conventional manner.
The ignition switch must be in the “ON” position.
For high beam, push the lever forward. Pull it back for low
beam. For the headlight flasher, pull it further back.
A blue light in the instrument cluster indicates high beam or
headlight flasher is on.
The headlight flasher works even when the headlight switch is
off.
The turn signal is self-cancelling after a turn, but after a lane
change, you may have to cancel it by hand. You can also signal
a lane change by moving the turn signal lever partway and
holding it there.
If the green light in the instrument cluster flashes faster than
normal, it indicates that the front or rear turn signal bulb has
burned out. If this indicator light does not come on, the fuse
or the indicator light itself has probably failed.
57
SWITCHES
FOG LIGHT SWITCH
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER
SWITCH
Intermittent operation type
12L166
12L120a
To turn on the fog lights, twist the band of the headlight
lever to the “ON” position. They will come on only when
the headlights are on low beam.
When the fog lights are on, the indicator lights up in the
instrument cluster.
1 Interval adjuster
2 Washer on
To turn the wipers on, move the lever down until you reach
the desired speed setting.
The ignition switch must be in the “ON” position.
There are 3 settings:
“INT” position: Intermittent operation
“LO” position: Low speed operation
“HI” position: High speed operation
Twist the interval adjuster upward to increase the wiping
time interval between sweeps, and downward to decrease
it.
58
SWITCHES
The wiper lever must be in the “INT” position.
The time interval between sweeps is shortened when the
vehicle speed increases. When the vehicle speed reaches
more than about 20 km/h (12 mph) with the interval adjuster in
“F” position, the time interval becomes the shortest 1.5
seconds.
If you stop the vehicle with the wiper switch in the “LO” position,
the wiper speed automatically changes from low speed to
intermittent operation speed.* This function does not work
when the interval adjuster is in the “F” position.
NOTE:
* This feature can be deactivated.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
For mist wiper operations (a single wipe), pull the lever
toward you and release it.
The warning message “Low Washer Fluid” is displayed in the
multi- information display when the fluid level in the tank
becomes very low. For information on adding washer fluid, see
“Adding washer fluid” on page 514.
In cold weather, warm the windshield with the defroster before
using the washer. This will help prevent icing, which could
block your vision.
The rear window and outside rear view mirror defogger
automatically turns on when you operate the wipers.
NOTICE
Do not operate the wipers if the windshield is dry. It may
scratch the glass.
To make the washer squirt, push the button on the end of
the lever.
If the wiper lever is in the “OFF” position, the wipers will
automatically make 3 wipes and then a single wipe later to
sweep the windshield completely.* The interval between the
3 wipes and the last wipe will depend on the vehicle speed.
The last sweep does not happen if the vehicle speed exceeds
about 170 km/h (106 mph).
NOTE:
* The last single wipe can be deactivated.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
59
SWITCHES
Automatic operation
Raindrop detection type
The wiper speed is determined by the vehicle speed and
the amount of raindrops and sunlight detected by the
automatic wiper control sensor.
Twist the automatic control adjuster in the “–” direction to
lower the sensitivity, and the “+” direction to boost the
sensitivity.
12L167
1 Automatic control adjuster
2 Washer on
12L168
To turn the wipers on, move the lever down until you reach
the desired speed setting.
The ignition switch must be in the “ON” position.
There are 3 settings:
“AUTO” position — Automatic operation
“LO” position — Low speed operation
“HI” position — High speed operation
60
The sensor is on the inside of the windshield as shown above.
SWITCHES
With the ignition switch turned off, if the windshield sensor is
touched by reason of cleaning the windshield or for any other
reason, either of the following operations may cause automatic
wiper activation.
Turning the ignition switch on with the wiper lever in the
“AUTO” position.
Turning the ignition switch on and move the wiper lever
down in the “AUTO” position.
Even with the wiper lever in the “AUTO” position, the system
will switch to intermittent operations if the system malfunctions.
The system will turn off if the windshield gets extremely hot (at
more than 80C or 176F) or cold (at less than –10C or 14F).
When the ignition switch is turned off with the wiper lever in the
“AUTO” position, and then the ignition switch is turned on
again, the automatic operation may not work even if raindrops
are on the windshield.
CAUTION
Be careful not to get your fingers caught between the
wipers and windshield.
When the wiper lever is in the “AUTO” position with the
ignition switch on, the wipers could operate
automatically in the following cases:
If you touch the upper center of the windshield
adjacent to the sensor.
If you wipe the upper center of the windshield
(adjacent to which the sensor is located) with a towel.
If the windshield vibrates.
If you touch the sensor.
In this case, move the lever to another position and return it to
the “AUTO” position again.
61
SWITCHES
For mist wiper operations (a single wipe), pull the lever
toward you and release it.
HEADLIGHT CLEANER SWITCH
To make the washer squirt, push the button on the end of
the lever.
If the wiper lever is in the “OFF” position, the wipers will
automatically make 3 wipes and then a single wipe later to
sweep the windshield completely.* The interval between the
3 wipes and the last wipe will depend on the vehicle speed.
The last sweep does not happen if the vehicle speed exceeds
about 170 km/h (106 mph).
NOTE:
* The last single wipe can be deactivated.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
The warning message “Low Washer Fluid” is displayed in the
multi- information display when the fluid level in the tank
becomes very low. For information on adding washer fluid, see
“Adding washer fluid” on page 514.
To spray fluid on the headlights, push the switch with the
headlights on.
The ignition switch must be in the “ON” position.
In cold weather, warm the windshield with the defroster before
using the washer. This will help prevent icing, which could
block your vision.
The warning message “Low Washer Fluid” is displayed in the
multi- information display when the fluid level in the tank
becomes very low. For information on adding washer fluid, see
“Adding washer fluid” on page 514.
The rear window and outside rear view mirror defogger
automatically turns on when you operate the wipers.
NOTICE
NOTICE
Do not operate the wipers if the windshield is dry. It may
scratch the glass.
62
12L176
Do not turn the headlight cleaner on with the washer
fluid tank empty. It may cause the cleaner motor to
overheat.
SWITCHES
REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE
REAR VIEW MIRROR DEFOGGER
SWITCH
12L170
12L169
Vehicles with rear air conditioning
Vehicles with navigation system
12L171
Vehicles without rear air conditioning
To turn the electric rear window defogger on, push the
switch.
The ignition switch must be in the “ON” position.
63
SWITCHES
The thin heater wires on the inside of the rear window and the
heater panels in the outside rear view mirrors will quickly clear
the surface. Keep your hands off the mirror faces when the
switch is on. An indicator light is on when the defogger is
operating.
POWER WINDOW SWITCHES
The system will automatically shut off when the defogger has
operated about 15 minutes.
12L061a
CAUTION
Since the mirror surfaces can get hot, do not touch them
when the switch is on.
If further defrosting or defogging is desired, simply actuate the
switch again. When the surface has cleared, push the switch
once again to turn the defogger off. Continuous use may cause
the battery to discharge, especially during stop- and- go
driving. The defogger is not designed to dry rain water or to
melt snow.
If the outside rear view mirrors are heavily coated with ice, use
a spray de-icer before operating the switch.
NOTICE
When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be
careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or
connectors.
To prevent the battery from being discharged, turn
the switch off when the engine is not running.
64
1
2
3
4
For driver’s window
For front passenger’s window
For left rear window
For right rear window
To raise or lower the windows, use the switch on each
door. The passengers’ windows can also be controlled by
the switches on the driver’s door.
The power windows work when the ignition switch is in the
“ON” position.
Key off operation: Even if the ignition switch is turned to the
“ACC” or “LOCK” position with all the doors closed, the window
can be operated until any of the doors is opened (or for about
45 seconds).
SWITCHES
Operating the window lock switch
12L159
12L160
Operating the switches
To lower the window, push the switch halfway down. Pull
it up to raise the window. The window glass moves as long
as the switch is operated.
Automatic operation: To fully raise or lower the window
automatically, pull the switch fully up or push it fully down.
To stop the window partway, lightly push or pull the switch in
the opposite direction and then release it.
Indicator light
With the window lock switch pressed in, only the driver’s
window can be raised or lowered.
The indicator lights on the switches tell you which of the
switches can be operated.
Even with the window lock switch pressed in, the windows will
be opened from outside the vehicle using an ignition key or
wireless remote control.
65
SWITCHES
Operating the windows from outside the
vehicle
The windows can be operated using the key.*
NOTE:
* This feature can be deactivated.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
12L177
Type B
12L180
Insert the key into the keyhole on the driver’s door.
To close the windows: Turn the key in the locking direction
and hold it.
After the door is locked, the windows begin to close. To stop
in the middle, return the key.
Type A
To open the windows: Turn the key in the unlocking direction
and hold it.
After the door is unlocked, the windows begin to open. To stop
in the middle, return the key.
This function will work even with the window lock switch
pressed in.
The windows also can be opened using the wireless remote
control. For details, see page 40.
66
SWITCHES
Jam protection function
During automatic raising operation, key off raising operation or
raising operation using the key from the outside, the window
stops and is lowered if something gets caught between the
window and window frame.
If the window receives a strong impact, this function may work
even if nothing is caught.
CAUTION
To avoid serious personal injury, you must do the
following.
Never leave anyone (particularly a small child) alone
in your vehicle, especially with the ignition key still
inserted or with the ignition switch in a position other
than “LOCK”. Otherwise, he/she could use the power
window switches and get trapped in a window.
Unattended person (particularly a small child) can be
involved in a serious accident.
Never try jamming any part of your body to activate
the jam protection function intentionally.
The jam protection function may not work if
something gets caught just before the window is fully
closed.
Before you close the power windows, always make
sure there is nobody around the power windows. You
must also make sure the heads, hands and other
parts of the bodies of all occupants are kept
completely inside the vehicle. If someone’s neck,
head or hands get caught in a closing window, it
could result in a serious injury. When anyone closes
the power windows, make sure he or she operates the
windows safely.
When small children are in the vehicle, never let them
use the power window switches without supervision.
Use the window lock switch to prevent them from
making unexpected use of the switches.
Be sure to remove the ignition key or turn the ignition
switch to the “LOCK” position when you leave your
vehicle.
67
SWITCHES
EMERGENCY FLASHER SWITCH
All the turn signal lights will flash. The emergency flashers will
work with the engine running or off and with or without the
ignition key.
Turn on the emergency flashers to warn other drivers if you
must stop your vehicle where it might be a traffic hazard.
Always pull your vehicle as far off the road as possible.
12L161a
The turn signal light switch will not work when the emergency
flashers are in operation.
NOTICE
Vehicles with navigation system
12L162
Vehicles without navigation system
To turn on the emergency flashers, push the switch. To
turn them off, push the switch again.
68
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not
leave the switch on longer than necessary when the
engine is not running.
SWITCHES
SEAT HEATER SWITCHES
Rear seat heater
Front seat heater
12L174
12L172
Vehicles without rear power seats
1 For left seat 2 For right seat
1 For driver’s seat
2 For front passenger’s seat
The front seat heater has two switches: one marked “L”
(for the left seat) and the other marked “R” (for the right
seat).
The rear seat heater has two switches: one marked “L”
(for the left seat) and the other marked “R” (for the right
seat). Push these switches to turn the respective seat
heaters on, and push the switches again to turn them off.
The ignition switch must be in the “ON” position.
The ignition switch must be in the “ON” position.
To use the seat heater:
The indicator light turns on when the seat heater is operating.
1. Push the knob to pop it out.
2. Turn the knob clockwise. The indicator light turns on.
3. Adjust the knob to the desired temperature.
To turn off the seat heater, turn the knob counterclockwise until
it stops.
Push the knob into the recessed position when not in use.
69
SWITCHES
CAUTION
NOTICE
Occupants must use caution when operating the seat
heater because they may experience minor burns even
at low temperatures. Use extra caution for;
Do not put unevenly weighted objects on the seat and
do not stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into
the seat.
Babies, small children, elderly persons, sick persons
or persons with physical disabilities
When cleaning the seats, do not use organic
substances (paint thinner, benzine, alcohol,
gasoline, etc.). They may damage the heater and seat
surface.
Persons who have delicate skin
Persons who are exhausted
Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs which
induce sleep (sleeping drug, cold remedy, etc.).
To prevent the seat from overheating, do not use the
seat heater with a blanket, cushion, or other insulating
objects which cover the seat.
70
To prevent the battery from being discharged, turn
the switches off when the engine is not running.
SWITCHES
CLIMATE CONTROL SEAT
SWITCHES
To use the front seat climate control, push the knob to pop
it out and then turn the knob. The indicator light comes
on.
The climate control seat feeds air at the temperature you
desire from the seat surface, for the comfort of the
occupants.
To feed air at room temperature, turn the knob to the gray
zone.
Front climate control seats
To feed cool air, turn the knob counterclockwise and set the
knob in the blue zone. Three setting levels are available.
To feed warm air, turn the knob clockwise and set the knob in
the red zone. Three setting levels are available.
After the switch is turned on, it takes several minutes until you
feel warm or cool.
12L175
To disable this function, turn the knob to the center position (the
gray dot). The indicator light goes off.
Push the knob into the recessed position when not in use.
1 For driver’s seat 2 For front passenger’s seat
3 Air at room temperature 4 Cool air 5 Warm air
The front climate control seat has two switches: one
marked “L” (for the front left seat) and the other marked
“R” (for the front right seat).
The ignition switch must be in the “ON” position.
The front climate control seat has three modes: air at room
temperature, cool air and warm air.
71
SWITCHES
To use the rear seat climate control, push the knob and
turn the knob. The indicator light comes on.
Rear climate control seats
To feed air at room temperature, turn the knob to the gray
zone.
To feed cool air, turn the knob counterclockwise and set the
knob in the blue zone. Three setting levels are available.
12L178
1 For left seat 2 For right seat
3 Warm air 4 Air at room temperature
To feed warm air, turn the knob clockwise and set the knob in
the red zone. Three setting levels are available. When you
push and turn the knob to the red zone, the seat heater turns
on first and then the rear climate control operates to feed warm
air.
After the switch is turned on, it takes several minutes until you
feel warm or cool.
5 Cool air
The rear climate control switches are located in the rear
armrest.
The rear climate control seat has two switches: one
marked “L” (for the rear left seat) and the other marked
“R” (for the rear right seat).
The ignition switch must be in the “ON” position.
The rear climate control seat has three modes: air at room
temperature, cool air and warm air.
72
To disable this function, push the knob again. The indicator
light goes off.
If you turn off the ignition switch without turning off the rear
climate control seat, the rear climate control seat does not turn
on with the ignition on.
SWITCHES
CAUTION
NOTICE
Use caution when operating the climate control seat.
The occupants listed below may experience minor
burns even at low temperatures from warm air.
Do not put unevenly weighted objects on the seat .
Do not stick sharp objects (such as needles or nails)
into the seat.
Babies, small children, elderly persons, sick persons
or persons with physical disabilities
When cleaning the seats, do not use harsh cleaning
substances (such as paint thinner, benzine, alcohol
or gasoline). They may damage the climate control
seat and seat surface.
Persons who have delicate skin
Persons who are exhausted
Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs which
induce sleep (such as sleeping drugs or cold
remedies).
To prevent the seat from overheating, do not use the
climate control seat if a blanket, cushion, or other
insulating object covers the seat. Use also caution not
to overuse this feature, which may cool down the
occupants excessively.
Clean the seats using a towel wrung out of water.
Entering water in the seats may cause the
malfunction of the climate control seats.
To prevent the battery from being discharged, turn
the switches off when the engine is not running.
73
SWITCHES
Replacing the air filters
The air filters may clog after the long use of the climate control
seats which will reduce the air flow. However, you can inspect
the filters easily.
When you replace the air filters, be sure to turn off the fans.
Front
NOTICE
The air filters should be installed properly in position.
The use of front climate control seat with the air filter
removed may cause the malfunction of the front climate
control seat.
Rear
The rear climate control seat filters are located in the rear side
garnishes and under the rear outside passenger seats.
12L130
12L182
Under the seat
1
Remove the air filter locks.
2
Remove the air filter.
Under the seat
The front climate control seat filters are located under the
driver and front passenger seats.
1
Push the rear seat position control button to slide the rear
seat to the foremost position.
Replace the air filter when the performance of air flow becomes
low by the deterioration of filter.
2
Remove the air filter lock under the seat.
3
Remove the air filter.
Replace the air filter when the performance of air flow becomes
low by the deterioration of filter.
74
SWITCHES
NOTICE
The air filters should be installed properly in position.
The use of rear climate control seat with the air filter
removed may cause the malfunction of the rear climate
control seat.
12L240
On the side garnish
The side garnish filters should be replaced at your Lexus
dealer. When you replace the filters under the seats, have the
side garnish filters replaced as well.
NOTICE
Do not remove the side garnish filters or clean them by
washing or air blowing. Doing so may cause the
malfunction of the rear climate control seat.
75
SWITCHES
REFRESHING REAR SEAT
SWITCHES
CAUTION
Those who are pregnant, have just given birth, or
suffer from heart disease and other ailments
requiring rest, should consult a doctor before using
the refreshing seat.
Do not allow children to use the refreshing seat.
12L151
Do not use the refreshing seat immediately after
meals or for extended periods.
If you feel sick while using the refreshing seat,
immediately stop using it.
1 For left rear seat
2 For right rear seat
The refreshing rear seat is designed to reduce lumbar
fatigue by means of a lumbar vibrator.
The ignition switch must be in the “ON” position.
To operate the lumbar vibrator, push the switch on the front
side. Keep pushing the switch down to change the vibration
speed.
To stop the vibrator, push the switch on the rear side.
76
SWITCHES
77
SECTION
1–3
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Gauges, meters and service reminder
indicators
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Odometer and trip meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Multi-information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Instrument panel light control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
78
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
FUEL GAUGE
See the inner back cover for fuel capacity and recommended
fuel selection.
ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE GAUGE
13L062d
13L151
Low fuel level warning light
The gauge indicates the approximate quantity of fuel
remaining in the tank when the ignition switch is on.
It is a good idea to keep the tank over 1/4 full.
If the fuel level approaches “E” or the low fuel level warning light
comes on, fill the fuel tank as soon as possible.
On inclines or curves, due to the movement of fuel in the tank,
the fuel gauge needle may fluctuate or the low fuel level
warning light may come on earlier than usual.
If the fuel tank is completely empty, the malfunction indicator
lamp comes on. Fill the fuel tank immediately.
The indicator lamp goes off after driving several times. If the
indicator lamp does not go off, contact your Lexus dealer as
soon as possible.
Normal range
The gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature when
the ignition switch is on. The engine operating
temperature will vary with changes in weather and engine
load.
If the needle points to the red zone or higher, stop your vehicle
and allow the engine to cool.
Your vehicle may overheat during severe operating conditions,
such as:
Driving up a long hill on a hot day.
Reducing speed or stopping after high speed driving.
79
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
Idling for a long period with the air conditioning on in
stop-and-go traffic.
TACHOMETER
Towing a trailer.
NOTICE
Do not remove the thermostat in the engine cooling
system as this may cause the engine to overheat. The
thermostat is designed to control the flow of coolant
to keep the temperature of the engine within the
specified operating range.
Do not continue driving with an overheated engine.
See “If your vehicle overheats” on page 401.
13L144
The tachometer indicates engine speed in thousands of
rpm (revolutions per minute). Use it while driving to
prevent engine over-revving.
Driving with the engine running too fast causes excessive
engine wear and poor fuel economy. Remember, in most
cases the slower the engine speed, the greater the fuel
economy.
NOTICE
Do not let the indicator needle get into the red zone. This
may cause severe engine damage.
80
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
ODOMETER AND TRIP METER
SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
AND WARNING BUZZERS
IF THIS INDICATOR OR
BUZZER COMES ON ...
13L145
(a)
or
(Indicator and buzzer)
(c)
Fasten front
passenger’s seat belt.
(d)
Take vehicle to Lexus
dealer immediately.
(e)
Stop and check.
The odometer records the total distance the vehicle has
been driven. The twin trip meter records two different
distances independently.
For example, you can use one meter to calculate the fuel
economy and the other to measure the distance on each trip.
To change the trip meter indication from one trip to the
other, push the “ODO/TRIP” button. To set the trip meter
A to zero, display the meter A reading, then push the
“RESET” button. The same applies for the trip B meter.
If parking brake is off,
stop immediately and
contact Lexus dealer.
Fasten driver’s seat
belt.
(b)
This meter displays the odometer and two trip meters. To
change the mode indication, push the “ODO/TRIP” button
briefly. Each time you push the button, the mode changes
in order from the odometer to trip meter A to trip meter B,
then to the odometer.
DO THIS.
The data of trip meters will be cancelled if the electrical power
source is disconnected.
81
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
IF THIS INDICATOR OR
BUZZER COMES ON ...
(f)
or
Take vehicle to Lexus
dealer.
(g)
See multi-information
display.
(h)
Take vehicle to Lexus
dealer.
If brake system
warning light is also
on, stop immediately
and contact Lexus
dealer
or
(i)
(j)
82
DO THIS.
Close all doors.
Low fuel level
warning light
Fill up tank.
IF THIS INDICATOR OR
BUZZER COMES ON ...
(k)
Key reminder
buzzer
DO THIS.
Remove key.
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
(a) Brake System Warning Light
This light comes on in the following cases when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position.
When the parking brake is applied ...
This light comes on for a few seconds when the ignition switch
is turned to the “ON” position even after the parking brake is
released.
When the brake fluid level is low ...
CAUTION
It is dangerous to continue driving normally when the
brake fluid level is low.
Have your vehicle checked at your Lexus dealer in the
following case:
CAUTION
If either of the following conditions occurs, immediately
stop your vehicle at a safe place and contact your Lexus
dealer.
The light does not turn off even after the parking
brake is released while the engine is running.
In this case, the brakes may not work properly and
your stopping distance will become longer. Depress
the brake pedal firmly and bring the vehicle to an
immediate stop.
The brake system warning light remains on together
with the “ABS” warning light.
In this case, not only the anti-lock brake system will
fail but also the vehicle will become extremely
unstable during braking.
The light does not come on even if the parking brake is
applied when the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
The light does not come on even if the ignition switch is
turned on with the parking brake released.
A warning light turning on briefly during operation does not
indicate a problem.
83
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
(b) Driver’s Seat Belt Reminder Light and
Buzzer
This light and buzzer remind you to buckle up the driver’s seat
belt.
Once the ignition switch is turned to “ON” or “START”, the
reminder light flashes and buzzer sounds if the driver’s seat
belt is not fastened. Unless the driver fastens the belt, the light
stays flashing and the buzzer stops after about 4 to 8 seconds.
(c) Front Passenger’s Seat Belt Reminder
Light
This light reminds you to buckle up the front passenger’s seat
belt.
Once the ignition switch is turned to “ON” or “START”, the
reminder light flashes if a passenger sits in the front passenger
seat and does not fasten the seat belt. Unless the front
passenger fastens the belt, the light stays flashing. However,
if a front passenger uses an additional seat cushion, the
indicator light may not flash even when the seat is not buckled
up.
If luggage or other load is placed on the front passenger seat,
depending on its weight and how it is placed on the seat, the
built-in sensor in the seat cushion may detect the pressure,
causing the reminder light to flash.
84
(d) SRS Warning Light
The indicators come on when the ignition switch is turned
to the “ON” position. It goes off after about 6 seconds.
This means the SRS airbags and seat belt pretensioners
are operating properly.
This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor
assembly, front airbag sensors, side and curtain shield airbag
sensor assemblies, curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies,
driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt buckle switch,
occupant detection sensor, front passenger’s seat belt buckle
switch, seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, warning
light, interconnecting wiring and power sources.
If any of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a
malfunction somewhere in the parts monitored by the warning
light system. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible
to service the vehicle.
When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position, the
light does not come on or remains on.
The light comes on while driving.
If the light stays on, it indicates that the SRS driver and front
passenger airbags, SRS side and curtain shield airbags and/or
seat belt pretensioners have a problem.
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
(e) Discharge Warning Light
(f) Malfunction Indicator Lamp
This light warns that the battery is being discharged.
This lamp comes on when the ignition switch is turned to
the “ON” position and goes off after the engine starts.
This means that the warning light system is operating
properly.
If it comes on while you are driving, stop the vehicle, turn off the
engine, and check for the cause. Look first at the engine drive
belt.
If it is loose or broken, the generator will not charge the
battery properly.
If the belt is O.K., there is a problem somewhere in the
charging system.
The engine ignition will continue to operate, however, until the
battery is discharged. Turn off the air conditioning, blower,
radio, etc., and drive directly to the nearest Lexus dealer or
repair shop.
NOTICE
Do not continue driving if the engine drive belt is broken
or loose.
If the lamp remains on, or the lamp comes on while
driving, first check the following:
Empty fuel tank
If the fuel tank is empty, refuel immediately.
Loose fuel tank cap
If the fuel tank cap is loose, securely tighten it.
These cases are temporary malfunctions. The malfunction
indicator lamp will go off after taking several driving trips.
If the lamp does not go off even after several trips, contact your
Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
If the fuel tank is not empty or the fuel tank cap is not
loose...
There is a problem somewhere in the engine, emission
control system, electronic throttle control system, automatic
transmission electrical system or warning light system itself.
Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible to service the
vehicle.
If this lamp comes on and the engine speed does not increase
with the accelerator pedal depressed, there may be a problem
somewhere in your electronic throttle control system.
85
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
At this time, vibration may occur. However, if you depress the
accelerator pedal more firmly and slowly, you can drive your
vehicle at low speeds. Have your Lexus checked by your
Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
Even if the abnormality of the electronic throttle control system
is corrected during low speed driving, the system may not be
recovered until the engine is stopped and the ignition switch is
turned to “ACC” or “LOCK” position.
Emissions inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs
Your vehicle may not pass a state emission inspection if the
malfunction indicator lamp remains on. Contact your Lexus
dealer to check your vehicle’s emission control system and
OBD (On- Board Diagnostics) system before taking your
vehicle for the inspection.
For details, see “Emissions inspection and maintenance (I/M)
programs” on page 442.
(g) Master Warning Light
If any system malfunctions, this warning light comes on or
flashes together with a warning tone, and a warning message
appears in the multi-information display. When the cause of
the problem is eliminated, the warning tone and message on
the display will turn off.
(h) “ABS” Warning Light
The light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position. If the anti-lock brake system and the brake
assist system work properly, the light turns off after a few
seconds. Thereafter, if either of the systems malfunctions, the
light comes on again.
When the “ABS” warning light is on (and the brake system
warning light is off), the anti-lock brake system, the brake
assist system, the traction control system and/or the vehicle
stability control system do/does not operate, but the brake
system still operates conventionally.
When the “ABS” warning light is on (and the brake system
warning light is off), the anti- lock brake system does not
operate so that the wheels could lock up during a sudden
braking or braking on slippery road surfaces.
86
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
If any of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a
malfunction somewhere in the components monitored by
the warning light system. Contact your Lexus dealer as
soon as possible to service the vehicle.
(j) Low Fuel Level Warning Light
The light does not come on when the ignition switch is
turned to the “ON” position, or remains on.
On inclines or curves, due to the movement of fuel in the tank,
the low fuel level warning light may come on earlier than usual.
The light comes on while you are driving.
(k) Key Reminder Buzzer
A warning light turning on briefly during operation does not
indicate a problem.
This buzzer reminds you to remove the key when you open the
driver’s door with the ignition key in the “ACC” or “LOCK”
position.
This light comes on when the fuel level in the tank becomes
very low. Fill the tank as soon as possible.
CAUTION
If the “ABS” warning light remains on together with the
brake system warning light, immediately stop your
vehicle at a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer.
In this case, not only the anti-lock brake system will fail
but also the vehicle will become extremely unstable
during braking.
(i) Open Door Warning Light
This light remains on until all the doors are completely closed.
87
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
How to check all the service reminder
indicators
The following service reminder indicator goes off after a few
seconds.
(except the low fuel level warning light):
W287
1. Apply the parking brake.
w243
2. Open the door.
The following service reminder indicator should come on. It
goes off when you close the door completely.
or
The following service reminder indicator goes off after 6
seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to “ON”.
The following service reminder indicators should come on.
If any service reminder indicator or warning buzzer does not
function as described above, have it checked by your Lexus
dealer as soon as possible.
W287
or
or
88
or
w243
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
MULTI-INFORMA TION DISPLAY
(a) Cruise information
13L152
13L146
The multi- information display provides various
information, including your vehicle’s driving condition,
outside temperature, and warning messages if your
vehicle is in trouble.
During ordinary driving, cruise information and graphic
information are displayed. However, if any problem
occurs in your vehicle, a warning message appears above
the cruise information.
1 “DISP1” button 2 “DISP2” button
3 “RESET” button
The following information is shown with the ignition
switch turned on. Each time you push the “DISP1” button,
the displayed information is changed.
Available driving distance
Average fuel consumption
Current fuel consumption
Average fuel consumption after being refueled
Driving distance after being refueled
Elapsed time
Average vehicle speed
Blank
89
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
The displayed cruise information values indicate the general
driving condition and may not always reflect precise and actual
conditions.
Available driving distance
w244
When the fuel gauge is close to “F”
w245
W25
When the fuel gauge is close to middle
w246
When the fuel gauge is close to “E”
The available driving distance is calculated and displayed
depending on the amount of remaining fuel.
Average fuel consumption
W247
W27
The average fuel consumption is calculated and displayed
based on the total driving distance and the total fuel
consumption with the engine running.
90
Current fuel consumption
W248
W28
The current fuel consumption is calculated and displayed
based on the driving distance and the fuel consumption
per 2 second interval with the engine running.
The value is updated every 2 seconds.
If you are driving at low speeds just before stopping, the
accurate figure may not be shown.
Average fuel consumption after refueling
W249
W29
The average fuel consumption after refueling is
calculated and displayed based on the total driving
distance and the total fuel consumption after refueling.
The value is updated every 10 seconds.
When refueling, be sure to stop your vehicle and turn the
ignition switch off.
The average fuel consumption could not be calculated in either
of the following cases:
Refueled by opening the fuel filler door using the manual
lever in the trunk
The value is updated every 10 seconds.
Refueled with a small quantity of gasoline
To begin recalculating, push the “RESET” button for about 1 to
2 seconds.
To begin recalculating, push the “RESET” button for about 1 to
2 seconds.
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
The multi-information display shows “Tank Avg –.– MPG” for
a while after refueling or pushing the “RESET” switch, and then
shows the previous average fuel consumption until you start
the vehicle.
Elapsed time
Driving distance after refueling
The total time that the engine has been running is
displayed.
w250
The driving distance after refueling is displayed.
When refueling, be sure to stop your vehicle and turn the
ignition switch off.
The driving distance after refueling could not be calculated in
either of the following cases:
Refueled by opening the fuel filler door using the manual
lever in the trunk
Refueled with a small quantity of gasoline
To begin recalculating, push the “RESET” button for about 1 to
2 seconds.
W251
W31
When the engine is started again after the ignition is off, the
driving time is added to the previous value. Up to 99 hours 59
minutes can be displayed. When the driving time exceeds 99
hours 59 minutes, the display returns to 0 and recounting
starts.
To begin recalculating, push the “RESET” button for about 1 to
2 seconds.
Average vehicle speed
w252
The average vehicle speed is calculated and displayed
based on the total driving distance and the total driving
time with the engine running.
The displayed value is updated every 10 seconds.
To begin recalculating, push the “RESET” button for about 1 to
2 seconds.
91
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
(b) Graphic information
13L147
The following graphic information is shown on the
display.
Any door open
Compass display (if equipped)
Outside temperature display
Lexus park assist system display (if equipped)
Dynamic radar/laser cruise control display (if equipped)
Blank
If any door is opened, the warning message also reminds you
to close the door.
92
When the ignition is turned on, the previously selected display
appears. Each time you push the “DISP2” button for about 1
to 2 seconds, the display changes from compass (if the
compass is initially displayed) to outside temperature to blank
screen, then back to compass.
For the compass, see “Compass” on page 104. For the outside
temperature display, see “Outside temperature display” on
page 116.
If you push the main switch of the Lexus park assist system or
turn the ignition on with the main switch of the Lexus park assist
system on, the Lexus park assist system screen appears for
2 seconds and then the multi-information display returns to the
previous screen.
When you push the main switch of the dynamic radar/laser
cruise control, the dynamic radar/laser cruise control screen
appears. Each time you push the “DISP2” switch for 1 to 2
seconds, the screen changes to compass, outside
temperature display, blank screen, and then back to the
dynamic radar/laser cruise control screen. When the display
shows a screen other than dynamic radar/laser cruise control,
the multi- information display returns to the dynamic
radar/laser cruise control screen after 6 seconds. For details,
see “Dynamic radar/laser cruise control” on page 327.
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
(c) Warning messages
NOTICE
Do not drive the vehicle while this warning message is
displayed - even for one block. It may ruin the engine.
13L148
W254
W41
When your brake pads have worn down enough to require
replacement, the master warning light flashes and a
warning tone sounds and the above message appears.
If this message appears while you are driving, have the brake
pads checked and replaced by your Lexus dealer as soon as
possible.
W253
W40
When the engine oil pressure becomes too low, the
master warning light comes on, a warning tone sounds
and the above message appears.
If this message appears while you are driving, pull off the road
to a safe place and stop the engine immediately. Call a Lexus
dealer or qualified repair shop for assistance.
The message may appear when the oil level is extremely low.
It is not designed to indicate low oil level, and the oil level must
be checked using the oil level dipstick.
W255
W50
When the engine oil level is too low, the master warning
light flashes, a warning tone sounds, and the above
message appears.
Add oil as soon as possible. (For instructions, see “Checking
the engine oil level” on page 463.)
While driving on steep inclines or rough roads which causes
the vehicle to substantially sway or on curves, this message
may appear due to the movement of engine oil in the engine.
93
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
In normal conditions, due to engine oil consumption, this
message may appear earlier than the specified service interval
of the scheduled maintenance. This is because the engine oil
is consumed to the low level within the scheduled maintenance
interval and does not indicate a problem. (For detailed
information, see “Facts about engine oil consumption” on page
461.)
NOTICE
Continued engine operation with low engine oil will
damage the engine.
w282
This message indicates that the engine oil maintenance
data has been reset. After replacing the engine oil, be sure
to reset the maintenance data.
To reset the data, perform the following operations:
1. Push the “ODO/TRIP” button to change the display to
blank.
2. Turn the ignition switch off.
3. Turn the ignition switch to “ON” with the trip meter
“RESET” button held down.
4. Keep pushing the “RESET” button for longer than 5
seconds after the ignition is turned on.
After the above operation, the master warning light comes
on, a warning tone sounds and the above message
appears to inform you that the engine oil maintenance
data has been reset. (U.S.A. only)
94
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
w283
w284
If the driving range exceeds 4,500 miles after the engine
oil maintenance data is reset, the master warning light
comes on, a warning tone sounds and the above message
appears for about 15 seconds when you turn the ignition
switch to “ON”. (U.S.A. only)
If the driving range exceeds 5,000 miles after the engine
oil maintenance data is reset, the master warning light
comes on, a warning tone sounds and the above message
appears. (U.S.A. only)
This message indicates that the engine oil should be replaced
soon. If the message appears, it is recommended to inspect
the engine oil with the ignition off. For details about inspection,
see “Checking the engine oil level” on page 463.
This message indicates that the engine oil should be replaced
as soon as possible. If the message appears, it is
recommended to inspect the engine oil with the ignition off. For
details about inspection, see “Checking the engine oil level” on
page 463.
If the engine oil level is low, engine oil should be replaced.
Have it replaced at your Lexus dealer.
If the engine oil level is low, engine oil should be replaced.
Have it replaced at your Lexus dealer.
After the engine oil replacement, reset the engine oil
maintenance data and make sure the “Mileage Reset” appears
in the display.
After the engine oil replacement, reset the engine oil
maintenance data and make sure the “Mileage Reset” appears
in the display.
NOTICE
NOTICE
The warning message in the display is based on the
driving range after the engine oil maintenance data
reset. This is not based on the monitoring of dirty
condition of the engine oil.
The warning message in the display is based on the
driving range after the engine oil maintenance data
reset. This is not based on the monitoring of dirty
condition of the engine oil.
95
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
W256
W43
W257
W42
W258
W261
W52
If the driver’s door is opened with the ignition switch
turned off and the moon roof opened, the master warning
light flashes, a warning tone sounds and the above
message appears.
When you leave your vehicle, be sure to close the moon roof.
W259
W44
w262
W260
W46
If you start driving with the parking brake applied, the
master warning light flashes, a warning tone sounds and
the above message appears when the vehicle speed
exceeds 5 km/h (3 mph).
When any door or trunk is open with the ignition switch
turned on, a message appears to let you know which door
or trunk is open. If you continue driving in this condition,
the master warning light flashes and a warning tone
sounds when the vehicle speed exceeds 5 km/h (3 mph).
If any of the above warning messages appears, stop your
vehicle and close the door or trunk securely.
If the above warning message appears, stop your vehicle and
release the parking brake.
W263
W48
If the vehicle stability control system or the traction
control system malfunctions, the master warning light
and “TRAC OFF” indicator light come on. At this time a
warning tone sounds and the above message appears.
If the message appears, the vehicle stability control system
and traction control system do not work. Although it is no
problem to continue driving, have your vehicle checked by
Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
96
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
w264
When the low tire inflation pressure is detected while
driving, the master warning light comes on, the above
message appears and a warning tone sounds.
If the above message appears and adjust the tire inflation
pressure to the specified level as soon as possible. Push the
tire pressure warning system reset switch for a few seconds
and make sure the warning message goes off. If the message
still remains on, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus
dealer as soon as possible.
w265
If there is a problem electrically in the tire pressure
warning system, the master warning light comes on, the
above message appears and a warning tone sounds. At
this time the multi-information display indicates which
part causes an error.
W266
This message indicates the tire pressure warning system
is initialized. After replacing the tires or wheels, adjust all
4 tires to specified tire inflation pressure and initialize the
tire pressure warning system. To initialize the system,
turn the ignition switch to “ON” and push the tire pressure
warning system reset switch for longer than 3 seconds
with the vehicle stopped. The above message appears.
W269
When the fluid level in the tank becomes very low, the
master warning light comes on, a warning tone sounds
and the above message appears.
Fill the tank as soon as possible.
Although it is no problem to continue driving with the above
message on the display, have your vehicle checked by your
Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
97
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
w267
w271
When the air conditioning filter should be replaced, the
master warning light comes on, a warning tone sounds
and the above message appears.
If the interlock cable for steering lock is faulty, the master
warning light flashes, a warning tone sounds and the
above message appears.
If the “Change A/C Filter” appears on the multi-information
display, change the air conditioning filter as soon as possible
because the air filter might have clogged. See “Replacing the
air conditioning filter” on page 248 for details.
If the above message appears, contact your Lexus dealer as
soon as possible.
w268
In the following cases, the master warning light flashes, a
warning tone sounds and the above message appears.
If you push the “OFF” button for the front air conditioning
for about more than 4 seconds after the replacement of the
air conditioning filters, the above message appears and
the attention tone sounds to inform you that the data has
been reset.
A smart key is not detected in the vehicle when you push the
ignition switch. In this case, the above message appears for
5 seconds.
When you push the “OFF” button for the front air conditioning
for more than 4 seconds before “Change A/C Filter” appears,
the data will be cleared. Do not reset the data before this
message appears.
w500
If you push and hold the ignition switch in the “LOCK”
position for more than 3 seconds, the master warning light
comes on, a warning tone sounds and the above message
appears.
If you release the switch or turn to “ACC”, all the warning will
turn off.
98
w272
A smart key is not detected in the vehicle because someone
has taken a smart key outside of the vehicle without turning
off the ignition. At this time, the smart key sounds an alarm.
The above message turns off if you turn the ignition off or the
smart key system detects a smart key in the vehicle.
In addition to either of the above conditions, if you get out from
the vehicle, having a smart key when the ignition switch is in
the “ACC” or “ON” position and the selector lever is in a position
other than “P,” “Shift to P Range” and “Key is not Detected”
appear alternately.
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
w273
If you get out from the vehicle, having a smart key when
the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position and
the selector lever is in a position other than “P”, the
master warning light flashes, a beep sounds inside the
vehicle and the above message appears. When you shift
the selector lever to the “P” position or start driving, the
beeping stops sounding, the above message turns off.
In addition to the above condition, if the smart key system does
not detect a smart key in the vehicle, “Shift to P Range” and
“Key is not Detected” appear alternately.
w274
If the smart key system determines that the electronic
code of the detected key does not correspond to the
registered ID when you push the ignition switch or lock
button on the outside door handle, the master warning
light flashes, a warning tone sounds and the above
message appears for 5 seconds.
w275
If the smart key system determines that the battery
voltage is low (2V to 3V) when the ignition is turned off
more than 20 minutes after turned on, the master warning
light flashes, a warning tone sounds and the above
message appears for 5 seconds.
If the above message appears, the battery needs to be
replaced. Although you can replace the battery referring to
“Replacing the battery (Type A)” on page 42, we recommend
you have it replaced by your Lexus dealer as it is easy to be
scratched.
w276
The above message appears when the high mode in the
electronically modulated air suspension is selected.
However, if the system fails, the master warning light
comes on, a warning tone also sounds and the above
message appears.
Although it is no problem to continue driving, have your vehicle
checked by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
99
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
w285
If the sensor of the Lexus park assist system is
malfunctioning or a cable is broken when the Lexus park
assist system is on, the master warning light comes on, a
warning tone sounds, the malfunctioning sensor flashes
and the above message appears.
The flashing sensor does not operate properly. Although it is
no problem to continue driving, have your vehicle checked by
your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
w286
If icicles, snowflakes or mud gets on the sensor of the
Lexus park assist system or it is frozen when the Lexus
park assist system is on, the sensor not be able to detect
an obstacle flashes and the above message appears.
Remove the foreign matter or deice the sensor. If the message
does not appear after cleaning, the system is operating
properly.
100
w279
Dynamic radar cruise control—
If the system cannot easily measure the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance because of a dirty millimeter
wave radar sensor or grille cover while the dynamic radar
cruise control is on, the master warning light comes on
and the “CRUISE” indicator light flashes. At this time a
warning tone sounds and the above message appears.
If this message appears, clean the sensor and grille cover with
a soft cloth and try setting the preset speed again. If the dirt
is removed without cleaning, the system will automatically
enter the “RADAR READY” mode. If the system does not enter
the “RADAR READY” mode even after cleaning or the
message remains on the display, the system might be
malfunctioning. Although it is no problem to continue driving,
contact your Lexus dealer.
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
Dynamic laser cruise control—
If the system cannot easily measure the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance because of a dirty laser radar
sensor glass while the dynamic laser cruise control is on,
the master warning light comes on and the “CRUISE”
indicator light flashes. At this time a warning tone sounds
and the above message appears.
If this message appears, clean the sensor glass with a soft
cloth and try setting the preset speed again. If the dirt is
removed without cleaning, the system will automatically enter
the “RADAR READY” mode. If the system does not enter the
“RADAR READY” mode even after cleaning or the message
remains on the display, the system might be malfunctioning.
Although it is no problem to continue driving, contact your
Lexus dealer.
w280
If the system cannot easily measure the
vehicle- to- vehicle distance because of the following
conditions while the dynamic radar/laser cruise control is
on, the master warning light comes on, the “CRUISE”
indicator light flashes, and a warning tone sounds. At this
time the above message appears.
Dynamic radar cruise control—
The driving pattern selector switch is set to the “SNOW”
mode.
It is determined that it is difficult to make a measurement
because of bad weather (such as extremely hot weather)
The wipers are operated at high speed with the wiper lever
in the “AUTO” position
Dynamic laser cruise control—
The driving pattern selector switch is set to the “SNOW”
mode.
It is determined that it is difficult to make a measurement
because of bad weather (such as rainy, foggy, or snowy
weather)
The wipers are operated at high or low speeds with the
wiper lever in the “AUTO” position.
Direct sunlight from the front
101
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
In the following cases, the dynamic radar/laser cruise
control switches to the “RADAR READY” mode:
Dynamic radar cruise control—
The driving pattern selector switch is changed to the
“normal” or “power” position.
The wipers are stopped or are switched to low speed or
intermittent operation. (Including intermittent and stopped
wipers in the “AUTO” position)
In the above conditions, press the control lever upward in the
“RES/ACC” direction and release it. The dynamic radar cruise
control will be restored, however, even after the weather
clears, if the setting operation cannot be performed or if the
warning message still appears, the system might have
malfunctioned. Although it is no problem to continue driving,
contact your Lexus dealer.
102
Dynamic laser cruise control—
The driving pattern selector switch is changed to the
“normal” or “power” position.
The wipers are stopped or are switched to intermittent
operation. (Including intermittent and stopped wipers in the
“AUTO” position)
No direct sunlight from the front
In the above conditions, press the control lever upward in the
“RES/ACC” direction and release it. The dynamic laser cruise
control will be restored, however, even after the weather
clears, if the setting operation cannot be performed or if the
warning message still appears, the system might have
malfunctioned. Although it is no problem to continue driving,
contact your Lexus dealer.
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
w281
If a system malfunction is detected when dynamic
radar/laser cruise control is in the “RADAR READY” mode
or operating, the master warning light comes on, the
“CRUISE” indicator light flashes and a warning tone
sounds. At this time the above message appears.
If this message appears, stop your vehicle in a safe place, turn
the ignition off, and then restart it to reset the system. If the
setting still cannot be made or the same message appears
again, the system might have malfunctioned. Although it is no
problem to continue driving, contact your Lexus dealer.
NOTICE
While you are cruising with the dynamic radar/laser
cruise control on, if the master warning light comes on,
the cruise indicator light flashes, “Check Cruise
System” appears on the multi-information display and
the warning tone sounds, turn the ignition switch off
and then on again. If the function is cancelled again
after setting or if settings cannot be made, the dynamic
radar/laser
cruise
control
system
may
be
malfunctioning. Although it is no problem to continue
driving, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus
dealer.
w278
The master warning light comes on, a warning tone
sounds and the above message appears in the following
conditions:
The millimeter wave radar sensor or the grille cover is
dirty.
Clean the grille or sensor with a soft cloth to remove the dirt.
The pre-collision seat belts are activated repeatedly for
a short time.
The system turns off temporarily for overheating protection,
but turns back on after a while.
w277
If there is a problem somewhere in the pre-collision safety
system, the master warning light comes on, a warning
tone sounds, and the above message appears.
If the above message appears, the pre-collision safety system
may not operate. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as
possible to service the vehicle.
103
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
COMPASS
Displays
Directions
(Vehicles without Navigation System)
N
North
NE
Northeast
E
East
SE
Southeast
13L149
S
South
SW
Southwest
W
West
NW
Northwest
The compass may not show the correct direction in the
following conditions:
When the ignition is turned on, the previously selected display
appears. If the compass is not displayed, push the “DISP2”
button several times for 1 to 2 seconds to display the compass.
However if you push the main switch of dynamic radar/laser
cruise control to use dynamic radar/laser cruise control, the
dynamic radar/laser cruise control display appears. To change
to the compass display, push the “DISP2” button for longer
than about 1 second.
The compass indicates the direction in which the vehicle
is heading. The illustration shown above indicates that the
vehicle is heading north.
104
The vehicle is stopped immediately after turning.
The compass does not adjust while the vehicle is stopped.
The ignition switch is turned off immediately after turning.
The vehicle is on an inclined surface.
The vehicle is in a place where the earth’s magnetic field is
subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields
(underground parking, under a steel tower, between
buildings, roof parking, near a crossing, near a large
vehicle, etc.).
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
The vehicle is magnetized. (There is a magnet or a metal
object near the audio system.)
The battery has been disconnected.
If the deviation is small, the compass works to calibrate the
direction automatically while the vehicle is in motion.
For obtaining additional precision or for complete calibrating,
see “CALIBRATING THE COMPASS” on page 105.
COMPASS SENSOR
13L072
NOTICE
Do not put magnets or a metal object near the audio
system. Doing this may cause malfunction of the
compass sensor.
CALIBRATING THE COMPASS
The direction display on the compass deviates from the true
direction determined by the earth’s magnetic field. The
amount of deviation varies according to the geographic
position of the vehicle.
If you cross over the area divided as shown in the illustration,
the compass will deviate. If it is necessary to calibrate the
compass (deviation calibration), take your vehicle to your
Lexus dealer. Even if you do not cross over, the compass may
sometimes deviate. If this happens, perform “DRIVE IN
CIRCLES” calibration as shown on the next page.
Compass sensor
The compass sensor is located behind the audio system.
105
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
13L150
13L196
To rectify the deviation, stop the vehicle, and push and hold the
“RESET” button on the steering pad for more than 6 seconds.
“DRIVE IN CIRCLES” appears on the display. Perform the
following calibration.
CAUTION
Do not adjust the display while the vehicle is moving.
Be sure to adjust the display only when the vehicle is
stopped.
106
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
13L155
Do not perform circling calibration of the compass in a place
where the earth’s magnetic field is subject to interference by
artificial magnetic fields (underground parking, under a
steel tower, between buildings, roof parking, near a
crossing, near a large vehicle, etc.).
During calibration, do not operate electric systems (moon
roof, power windows, etc.) as they may interfere with the
calibration.
CAUTION
Drive the vehicle slowly (at 8 km/h (5 mph) or lower) in a circle
until the direction is displayed. If there is not enough space to
drive in a circle, drive around the block until the direction is
displayed.
When doing the circling calibration, be sure to secure
a wide space, and watch out for people and vehicles
in the neighborhood. Do not violate any local traffic
rules while performing circling calibration.
After driving in 1 to 3 circles in the above method, calibration
is complete with the direction shown on the display.
Do not adjust the display while the vehicle is moving.
Be sure to adjust the display only when the vehicle is
stopped.
If calibration cannot be performed because the vehicle is
magnetized, take your vehicle to a Lexus dealer.
If you want to cancel the calibration before it is complete, push
and hold the “RESET” button on the steering pad more than 6
seconds. To calibrate the compass again, push and hold the
same button more than 6 seconds. After “DRIVE IN CIRCLES”
appears on the display, follow the calibration procedure above.
Perform circling calibration just after you have purchased
your Lexus. And then always perform circling calibration
after the battery has been removed, replaced or
disconnected.
107
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
INSTRUMENT PANEL LIGHT
CONTROL
13L143a
To adjust the brightness of the instrument panel lights,
turn the knob.
With the knob turned fully right, the intensity of the instrument
panel lights will not be reduced when the headlight switch is on.
108
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
109
SECTION
1–4
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Interior equipment
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ignition switch light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Foot lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outside temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cigarette lighter and ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Garage door opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coin box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Overhead console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auxiliary boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trunk storage extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Card holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Penlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cool box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Floor mat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coat hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sunshades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Luggage net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
First-aid kit net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
110
111
111
113
114
115
115
116
118
119
120
121
121
125
126
127
128
130
132
132
133
134
135
136
138
139
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
SUN VISORS
INTERIOR LIGHTS
Front
14L207
14L058
To block out glare, move the sun visor as shown.
1
To block out glare from the front , swing the sun visor
down.
2
To block out glare from the side, remove the sun visor
from the hook and swing it to the side.
Vehicles with moon roof
At this position, the vanity light may not come on.
3
To block out glare coming obliquely from behind you,
slide the visor backwards.
At this position, the vanity light does not come on.
14L208
Vehicles without moon roof
111
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
To turn on the interior light, slide the switch.
Rear
With the switch in the “DOOR” position, the light comes on
when any doors are opened or when the ignition switch is
turned to “LOCK”. After all the doors are closed, the light
remains on for about 15 seconds and then goes out.*
However, in the following cases, the light goes out
immediately:
1. All the doors are closed when the ignition switch is in “ACC”
or “ON” position.
14L209
2. The ignition switch is turned to “ACC” or “ON” when the light
is still on.
3. All the doors are locked when the light is still on.
Vehicles with rear air conditioning controls
4. One door is closed with the lock button pushed in while the
other doors are locked.
NOTE:
* The interior lights can be set not to come on or the duration
of lighting can be changed.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
14L210
Vehicles without rear air conditioning controls
When you open the rear door, the light turns on. Closing
it turns off the light.
112
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
PERSONAL LIGHTS
Rear
Front
14L211
14L080
Vehicles with rear air conditioning controls
Vehicles with moon roof
14L229
14L224
You can change the personal light angle manually as you like.
Vehicles without moon roof
113
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
IGNITION SWITCH LIGHT
14L212
14L236
Vehicles without rear air conditioning controls
To turn on the personal light, push the switch. To turn it
off, push the switch again.
1 Type A
2 Type B
For easy access to the ignition switch, the ignition switch
light comes on when any of the doors are opened.
The light remains on for about 15 seconds and goes out after
all the doors are closed. However, the light goes out
immediately when all the doors are locked or the ignition switch
is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
114
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
FOOT LIGHTS
14L327
1 Front foot light
2 Rear foot light
The foot lights come on and go out in the following conditions.*
The lights come on for about 15 seconds when any of the
doors are opened. However, when all the doors are closed
and locked, the lights go out immediately.
CLOCK
14L225
Vehicles with navigation system
For clock setting, see the separate “Navigation System
Owner’s Manual”.
The lights come on when the ignition switch is turned to
“ON” from “ACC” with the selector lever in the “P” position.
When you move the lever out of “P” position, the intensity
of the lights are reduced.
When the instrument panel light control knob is turned fully
counterclockwise, the foot lights will turn off.
115
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
14L060
14L226
Vehicles without navigation system
The digital clock indicates the time with the ignition switch
at the “ACC” or “ON” position. To reset the hour, press the
“H” button. To reset the minutes, press the “M” button.
To adjust the time to the nearest hour, press the “:00”
button.
For example, if the “:00” button is pressed when the time is
between 9:30 - 9:59 or between 10:01 - 10:29, the time will
change to 10:00.
If the electrical power source has been disconnected from the
clock, the time display will automatically be set to 1:00.
116
On the instrument panel (Vehicles with navigation
system)
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
14L061b
On the instrument panel (Vehicles without navigation
system)
This display shows the outside temperature when the
ignition switch is on.
The displayed temperature ranges from –30C (–22F) up to
50C (122F). If the temperature does not appear on the
display or it shows “- - -”, take your vehicle to your Lexus
dealer.
14L237
Multi-information display
When you push the “DISP2” switch with the ignition switch on,
another outside temperature display appears on the
multi-information display. (For details, see “Multi-information
display” on page 89.)
The displayed temperature ranges from –30C (–22F) up to
50C (122F). If the temperature does not appear on the
display or it shows “- -”, take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer.
117
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
CIGARETTE LIGHTER AND
ASHTRAY
Open the ashtray cover. To use the cigarette lighter, press
in the cigarette lighter. After it finishes heating up, it
automatically pops out ready for use.
Do not hold the cigarette lighter pressed in.
If the engine is not running, the ignition switch must be in the
“ACC” position to use the lighter.
14L239
When finished with your cigarette, thoroughly extinguish it in
the ashtray to prevent other cigarette butts from catching fire.
After using the ashtray, push it back in or close the lid
completely.
To remove the ashtray, raise the lid and pull it out.
Use a Lexus genuine cigarette lighter or equivalent for
replacement.
Front cigarette lighter and ashtray (for some models)
CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or
sudden stop while driving, always close the ashtray
completely after use.
14L213
Rear cigarette lighter and ashtray
118
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
POWER OUTLETS
The power outlets are designed for power supply for car
accessories.
The ignition switch must be in the “ACC” or “ON” position for
the power outlets to be used.
14L062
NOTICE
To prevent the fuse from being blown, do not use the
electricity over the total vehicle capacity of 10A/12V.
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not
use the power outlets longer than necessary when
the engine is not running.
In the rear console box
Close the power outlet lids when the power outlets
are not in use. Inserting anything other than an
appropriate plug that fits the outlet, or allowing any
liquid to get into the outlet may cause electrical
failure or short circuits.
14L233
On the right side of the selector lever (for some models)
119
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
REAR CONSOLE BOX
14L215
14L064b
To return the tray to its original position, slide it while pushing
either lever as shown.
1 For the lower box
2 For the upper tray
To use the rear console box, open as shown in the
illustration.
The rear console box light for the lower box will come on with
the headlights on.
CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or
a sudden stop, always keep the console box lid closed
while driving.
14L214
Sliding a tray will make an accommodating space larger.
120
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
GLOVE BOX
GARAGE DOOR OPENER
The garage door opener (
Universal
Transceiver) is manufactured under license from
HomeLink and can be programmed to operate garage
doors, gates, entry doors, door locks, home lighting
systems, and security systems, etc.
14L240
1 Type A
2 Type B
3 Unlock
(a) Programming the HomeLink
4 Lock
5 Open
To open the glove box door, pull the lever. To lock the
glove box door, insert the master key and turn it
clockwise.
14L070
With the tail lights on, the glove box light will come on when the
glove box door is open.
1 Buttons 2 Indicator light
CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or
a sudden stop, always keep the glove box door closed
while driving.
The HomeLink in your vehicle has 3 buttons and you can
store one program for each button.
To ensure correct programming into the HomeLink, install a
new battery in the hand-held transmitter prior to programming.
121
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
The battery side of the hand-held transmitter must be pointed
away from the HomeLink during the programming process.
6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for each remaining HomeLink
button to program another device.
For Canadian users, follow the procedure in “Programming an
entrance gate/Programming all devices in the Canadian
market”.
Programming a rolling code system
1. Decide
which of 3 HomeLink
buttons you want to program.
2. Place your hand-held garage transmitter 25 to 75 mm (1 to
3 in.) away from the surface of the HomeLink.
Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink in view while
programming.
3. Simultaneously press and hold the hand- held garage
transmitter button along with the selected HomeLink button.
4. When the indicator light on the HomeLink changes from a
slow to a rapid flash after 20 seconds, you can release both
buttons.
HomeLink
by pressing the newly
5. Test the operation of the
programmed button. If programming a garage door opener,
check to see if the garage door opens and closes.
If the garage door does not operate, identify if your garage
transmitter is of the “Rolling Code” type. Press and hold the
programmed HomeLink button. The garage door has the
rolling code feature if the indicator light (on the HomeLink)
flashes rapidly and then remains lit after 2 seconds. If your
garage transmitter is the “Rolling Code” type, proceed to the
heading “Programming a rolling code system”.
122
If your device is “Rolling Code” equipped, it is necessary
to follow steps 1 through 4 under the heading
“Programming the HomeLink” before proceeding with
the steps listed below.
1. Locate the “training” button on the ceiling mounted garage
door opener motor. The exact location and color of the button
may vary by brand of garage door opener. Refer to the owner’s
guide supplied by the garage door opener manufacturer for the
location of this “training” button.
2. Press the “training” button on the ceiling mounted garage
door opener motor.
Following this step, you have 30 seconds in which to initiate
step 3 below.
3. Press and release the vehicle’s programmed HomeLink
button twice. The garage door may open. If the door does
open, the programming process is complete. If the door does
not open, press and release the button a third time. This third
press and release will complete the programming process by
opening the garage door.
The ceiling mounted garage door opener motor should now
recognize the HomeLink unit and be able to activate the
garage door up/down.
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each remaining HomeLink
button to program another rolling code system.
Programming an entrance gate /
Programming all devices in the Canadian
market
1. Decide which of the 3 HomeLink buttons you want to
program.
2. Place your hand-held gate/device transmitter 25 to 75 mm
(1 to 3 in.) away from the surface of the HomeLink.
Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink in view while
programming.
3. Press and hold the selected HomeLink button.
4. Continuously press and release (cycle) the hand- held
gate/device transmitter button every two seconds until step 5
is complete.
Programming other devices
To program other devices such as home security systems,
home door locks or lighting, contact your authorized Lexus
dealer for assistance.
Reprogramming a button
Individual HomeLink buttons cannot be erased, however, to
reprogram a single button, follow the procedure “Programming
the HomeLink”.
(b) Operating the HomeLink
To operate the HomeLink, press the appropriate HomeLink
button to activate the programmed device. The HomeLink
indicator light should come on. The HomeLink continues to
send the signal for up to 20 seconds as long as the button is
pressed.
5. When the indicator light on the HomeLink changes from a
slow to a rapid flash after 20 seconds, you can release both
buttons.
6. Test the operation of the HomeLink by pressing the newly
programmed button. Check to see if the gate/device operates
correctly.
7. Repeat steps 1 through 6 for each remaining HomeLink
button to program another device.
123
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
(c) Erasing the entire HomeLink memory
(all three programs)
To erase all previously programmed codes at one time, press
and hold down the 2 outside buttons for 20 seconds until the
indicator light flashes.
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the programs stored
in the HomeLink memory.
CAUTION
When programming the HomeLink Universal
Transceiver, you may be operating a garage door or
other device. Make sure people and objects are out
of the way of the garage door or other device to
prevent potential harm or damage.
Do not use this HomeLink Universal Transceiver
with any garage door opener that lacks the safety
stop and reverse feature as required by federal safety
standards. (This includes any garage door opener
model manufactured before April 1, 1982.) A garage
door opener which cannot detect an object
(signaling the door to stop and reverse), does not
meet current federal safety standards. Using a
garage door opener without these features increases
risk of serious injury or death.
124
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
and with RSS-210 of the Industry Canada. Operation
is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
WARNING: This transmitter has been tested and
complies with FCC and Industry Canada
DOC/MPAC rules. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the device.
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
CUP HOLDERS
CAUTION
Do not place anything else other than cups or
drink-cans in the cup holder, as such items may be
thrown about in the compartment and possibly injure
people in the vehicle during sudden braking or in an
accident.
Front
14L242
To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident
or sudden stop while driving, keep the cup holder
closed when not in use.
Rear
To use the cup holder, push the top of the cup holder
portion of the rear console box.
The cup holder is designed for holding cups or drink-cans
securely. When the cup holder is in use, keep the rear console
box closed.
14L321
Vehicles with rear power seats
125
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
COIN BOX
14L217
14L238
Vehicles without rear power seats
To use the cup holder, open the cup holder portion of the
center armrest in the rear seat.
The cup holder is designed for holding cups or drink-cans
securely.
To use the coin box, push the coin box button.
CAUTION
Keep the coin box closed when not in use.
CAUTION
Do not place anything else other than cups or
drink-cans in the cup holder, as such items may be
thrown about in the compartment and possibly injure
people in the vehicle during sudden braking or in an
accident.
To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident
or sudden stop while driving, keep the cup holder
closed when not in use.
126
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
OVERHEAD CONSOLE BOX
NOTICE
During hot weather, the interior of the vehicle becomes
very hot.
Do not leave anything flammable or
deformable such as a lighter, glasses, etc. inside.
14L065b
To use the overhead console box, push the button.
CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident
or a sudden stop, always keep the overhead console
box closed while driving.
Do not place any object heavier than 100 g (0.22 lb.)
in it. Heavier objects may cause the box to open and
the contents to fly out resulting in injuries.
127
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
AUXILIARY BOXES
Your vehicle has several types of auxiliary box. To use
them, open as shown in the following illustrations.
14L234
14L235
On the right side of the selector lever (for some models)
On the instrument panel
CAUTION
14L090b
As this box is designed for holding eyeglasses or
cellular phones, do not place any objects heavier than
300 g (0.44 lb.) in it.
Under the driver’s seat
128
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
14L087
Under the front passenger’s seat
14L218
On the inner side of the front doors
14L322
Rear seat armrest
(Vehicles with rear power seats)
14L220
Rear seat armrest
(Vehicles without rear power seats)
129
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
CAUTION
TRUNK STORAGE EXTENSION
To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or
a sudden stop, always keep the auxiliary boxes closed
while driving.
14L241
1 Type A
3 Unlock
2 Type B
4 Lock 5 Open
Pull down the center armrest in the rear seat. Pull the lever
and open the door.
Be sure to use “LEXUS Genuine Sports Gear, Bag” or carry
long objects (ski boards, poles, etc.) properly.
For installation and handling of the “LEXUS Genuine Sports
Gear”, follow the instructions provided with goods.
You can use a container as an accessory box. To lock the box,
insert the master key and turn it clockwise.
130
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or
a sudden stop, always keep the container closed while
driving.
14L223
1 From passenger compartment side
2 From trunk side
To extend a storage space, push the button on the door to
unlock and then push the door from the passenger side or pull
it from the trunk side.
See “Cargo and luggage” on page 391 for precautions to
observe in loading luggage.
CAUTION
Be sure to close the door when the trunk storage
extension is not in use. Luggage or cargo in the trunk
may be thrown into the passenger compartment in a
sudden stop or crash resulting in injury.
131
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
CARD HOLDER
14L221
You can store a card in the slot as shown in the illustration.
PENLIGHT
14L076
The penlight is in the tool box on the left side of the trunk.
Battery insertion: Insert the batteries into the penlight. (The
penlight terminals have no + or - end, but be sure to insert
both batteries facing the same direction.)
To turn the penlight on, turn the penlight head.
To turn it off, turn the penlight head further in the same
direction or turn it in the reverse direction.
132
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
COOL BOX
14L109
14L108a
2. Pull the lever on top of the lid and push down.
The cool box is designed for holding canned drinks. Do
not use this box to store drinks in plastic or disposable
containers, or bottles—they might spill or break. Do not
store any food that might go bad or smell in this box. Do
not place any food on the box.
The cool box system will activate whenever the rear air
conditioning is on.
14L110a
To use the cool box:
1. Pull the band of the center armrest forward and down.
The cool box system can be turned off by closing the cool air
intake lid shown in the illustration. At this time, although you
can use the box as an auxiliary box, note that cool air might flow
inside.
Open the cool air intake lid when using it as a cool box.
133
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
CAUTION
FLOOR MAT
To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or
sudden stop while driving, always keep the cool box
closed when it is not in use.
14L227
Use a floor mat of the correct size.
If the floor carpet and floor mat have 2 holes, then they are
designed for use with locking clips. Fix the floor mat with
locking clips into the holes in the floor carpet.
134
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
COAT HOOKS
14L036
14L230
CAUTION
Make sure the floor mat is properly placed on the floor
carpet. If the floor mat slips and interferes with the
movement of the pedals during driving, it may cause an
accident.
Vehicles with rear air conditioning controls
14L231
Vehicles without rear air conditioning controls
To use the coat hook, push the hook.
135
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
CAUTION
Do not hook a hanger, heavy or sharp pointed object on
the coat hook. If the curtain shield airbag inflates, those
items will be hurled away with great force or the curtain
shield airbag may not activate correctly. When you
hang clothes, hang them on the coat hook directly.
SUNSHADES
14L243a
Type A (Rear electric sunshade and manual sunshades)
14L244a
Type B (Rear electric sunshade only)
136
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
Rear electric sunshade
Key off operation: Even after the ignition switch is turned to
the “ACC” or “LOCK” position, the sunshade can be operated
for about 60 seconds.
CAUTION
14L283b
Do not touch the brackets fastening the shade to
avoid injuring your fingers or hands.
Do not put your fingers in the shade groove while the
shade is operating to avoid getting them caught or
injured by the runner.
To raise the rear electric sunshade, push the switch. To
lower the shade, push the same switch again.
The sunshade works when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position.
When the selector lever is shifted into the “R” position
while the sunshade is raised, the sunshade will be
automatically lowered.
To raise the sunshade again, perform any of the following
operations:
Shift the selector lever into the “P” position.
NOTICE
To prevent the vehicle battery from being discharged,
always operate the shade while the engine is running.
Observe the following to avoid damage and/or
malfunction:
Do not overload the shade motor and other parts (for
instance by pushing down on the sunshade bracket
while it is opening).
Do not place anything where it may hinder the
opening/closing of the shade.
Push the switch again.
Do not affix anything to the shade.
Move the selector lever out of “R” position and drive your
vehicle over 15 km/h (9 mph).
Clean the shade groove if there is any foreign matter
or dust on it.
Do not operate the rear electric sunshade repeatedly
for a long time as its motor may overheat.
137
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
Manual sunshades
LUGGAGE NET
The luggage net is located in the trunk to secure the
luggage.
The net is installed as follows:
15L047
To use the sunshade, pull the tab of the sunshade upward
or sideways and hook it as shown.
Securing the luggage on the floor
14L245
NOTICE
Do not place anything in the sunshade groove so it will
not be damaged.
1. Raise the front hooks on the vehicle front side.
2. Raise the rear hooks on the vehicle rear side. If the hooks
are under the mat, slide the mat a little and raise the hooks.
3. Hook the net on the front hooks and then on the rear hooks.
138
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
Securing the luggage in the trunk
14L246
FIRST-AID KIT NET
14L089
1. Raise the lower hooks on the vehicle front side.
This net is designed to accommodate the first-aid kit.
2. Hook the luggage net on the lower hooks and then on the
upper hooks.
Make sure the first-aid kit rests securely in the net.
NOTICE
Do not use the net to secure sharp or heavy objects.
The net will tear off.
Be sure not to twist the strap or net when hooking.
139
SECTION
1–5
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Exterior equipment
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trunk lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel tank cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Moon roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
140
141
142
145
147
EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT
HOOD
15L097
15L089
2. Insert your fingers under the hood, push up the
auxiliary catch lever and lift the hood.
1. To open the hood, pull the hood lock release lever
under the instrument panel. The hood will spring up
slightly.
Before closing the hood, check to see that you have not
forgotten any tools, rags, etc. Then lower the hood and make
sure it locks.
CAUTION
Before driving, be sure that the hood is closed and
locked securely. Otherwise, the hood may open
unexpectedly while driving and an accident may occur.
141
EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT
TRUNK LID
CAUTION
Keep the trunk lid closed while driving. This not only
prevents luggage from being thrown out, but also
prevents exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
15L096a
1 Type A
2 Type B
To unlock the trunk lid, insert the master key and turn it
clockwise.
To close the trunk lid, lower it and press down on it. After
closing the trunk lid, try pulling it up to make sure it is securely
closed.
The trunk lid can be unlocked by pushing the trunk button or
using the wireless remote control function. For details, see
“Smart key system” on page 20 and “Wireless remote control”
on page 36.
When you open the trunk, the lights illuminate the inside of the
trunk and around your feet.
142
Always lock the trunk lid and all doors, and keep the
vehicle keys out of children’s reach .
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.
Unsupervised children may lock themselves in the
vehicle or trunk and suffer serious injuries or death.
EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT
Trunk lid opener
15L091
15L090
1 Type A
1 Main switch
2 Operative
3 Inoperative
To open the trunk lid while sitting in the driver’s seat, pull
the lever with the main switch not pushed in.
2 Type B
3 If you do not want to activate the trunk lid opener
system, push in the main switch.
4 To activate the system, insert the master key and
turn it counterclockwise.
To protect things put in the trunk, when you have your vehicle
parked, push in the main switch.
143
EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT
Trunk lid closer
Internal trunk release handle
If the trunk lid is closed but does not latch shut, it
automatically closes completely.
CAUTION
Pay careful attention not to get your fingers trapped
as the trunk lid automatically closes when the trunk
has not been fully closed.
15L098a
Never allow a child to operate the trunk lid.
NOTICE
Do not apply excessive force when the trunk lid closer
is operating. Doing so may damage the trunk lid closer.
Also, be careful not to leave the key inside the trunk.
144
If a person is locked in the trunk, he/she can pull down the
phosphorescent handle on the inside of trunk lid to open
the trunk lid.
The phosphorescent (glow-in-the-dark) handle will continue
to glow for a time after the trunk lid is closed. Exposing the
handle to stronger light will cause it to glow longer.
EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT
FUEL TANK CAP
15L092
15L046a
1. To open the fuel filler door, pull the lever under the
instrument panel.
The arrow head next to FUEL DOOR as shown indicates
on which side of your vehicle the fuel filler door is located.
When refueling, turn off the engine.
CAUTION
Do not smoke, cause sparks or allow open flames
when refuelling. The fumes are flammable.
When opening the cap, do not remove the cap
quickly. In hot weather, fuel under pressure could
cause injury by spraying out of the filler neck if the
cap is suddenly removed.
145
EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT
CAUTION
Make sure the cap is tightened securely to prevent
fuel spillage in case of an accident.
15L037b
Use only a genuine Lexus fuel tank cap for
replacement. It is designed to regulate fuel tank
pressure.
NOTICE
2. To remove the fuel tank cap, turn the cap slowly
counterclockwise, then pause slightly before removing it.
The removed cap can be stored on the back side of the fuel
filler door.
To prevent damage to the cap, observe the following
precautions.
It is not unusual to hear a slight swoosh when the cap is
opened. When installing the cap, turn the cap clockwise until
you hear a click.
Do not tighten the cap further after you hear one click
when installing.
If the cap is not tightened securely, the malfunction indicator
lamp comes on. Make sure the cap is tightened securely.
The indicator lamp goes off after driving several times. If the
indicator lamp does not go off, contact your Lexus dealer as
soon as possible.
146
Apply force only in the turning direction to the cap.
Do not pull or pry it.
EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT
In case the opener is not actuated
MOON ROOF
15L040c
15L086
Pull the manual lever located in the trunk toward the back.
1 Open
This is used in case the fuel filler door cannot be opened due
to a discharged battery or other trouble.
To slide open the moon roof, push the slide control switch
toward the back for about 1 second. The moon roof will
open and stop partway 30 mm (1.2 in.) from the fully
opened position. When you push the switch once again,
the moon roof will fully open. To stop partway, push the
same side or the “TILT” switch.
Refueling the vehicle
As soon as the correctly operated nozzle switches off
automatically for the first time, the tank is full. Do not try
to add more fuel, because fuel may spill out.
2 Close
As driving with the moon roof opened fully will cause wind
throbs, we recommend you to drive with the moon roof partway
30 mm (1.2 in.) from the fully opened position.
To operate the moon roof, the ignition switch must be in the
“ON” position.
The sunshade can be opened or closed manually. However,
if you open the moon roof, the sunshade will be opened with
the moon roof.
147
EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT
To close the moon roof, push the slide control switch
toward the front for about 1 second. The moon roof will
fully close. To stop partway, push the same switch or push
the “TILT” switch.
Operating the moon roof from outside the
vehicle
The moon roof can be closed or opened using a key.*
NOTE:
* This feature can be deactivated, or sliding open or tilting
up can be selected.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
15L087
15L093
1 Tilt up
2 Lower
To tilt up the moon roof, push the “TILT” switch on the rear
side. The moon roof will fully tilt up. To stop partway, push
either side of the “TILT” switch.
To lower the moon roof, push the “TILT” switch on the
front side. The moon roof will be fully lowered. To stop
partway, push either side of the “TILT” switch.
To operate the moon roof, the ignition switch must be in the
“ON” position.
Key off operation: Even if the ignition switch is turned to the
“ACC” or “LOCK” position, the moon roof can be operated until
any of the doors is opened (or for about 45 seconds).
148
Type A
EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT
Jam protection function
During closing operation, the moon roof stops and is open if
something gets caught into the roof opening.
15L094
If the moon roof receives a strong impact, this function may
work even if nothing is caught.
CAUTION
To avoid serious personal injury, you must do the
following.
Type B
Insert the key into the key hole on the driver’s door.
To close the moon roof: Turn the key in the locking direction
and hold it.
After the door is locked, the moon roof begins to close. To stop
in the middle, return the key.
To slide open the moon roof: Turn the key in the unlocking
direction and hold it.
After the door is unlocked, the moon roof begins to open. To
stop in the middle, return the key.
While the vehicle is moving, always keep the heads,
hands and other parts of the bodies of all occupants
away from the roof opening. Otherwise, they could
be seriously injured if the vehicle stops suddenly or
if the vehicle is involved in an accident.
Before you close the moon roof, always make sure
there is nobody around the moon roof. You must also
make sure nobody places his or her head, hands and
other parts of the body in the roof opening. If
someone’s neck, head or hands get caught in the
closing roof, it could result in a serious injury. When
anyone closes the moon roof, first make sure it is safe
to do so.
Be sure to remove the ignition key or turn the ignition
switch to the “LOCK” position when you leave your
vehicle.
149
EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT
Never leave anyone (particularly a small child) alone
in your vehicle, especially with the ignition key still
inserted or with the ignition switch in a position other
than “LOCK”. Otherwise, he/she could use the moon
roof switches and get trapped in the roof opening.
Unattended person (particularly a small child) can be
involved in a serious accident.
Never sit on top of the vehicle around the roof
opening.
Never try jamming any part of your body to activate
the jam protection function intentionally.
The jam protection function may not work if
something gets caught just before the moon roof is
fully closed.
150
EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT
151
SECTION
1–6
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Occupant restraint systems
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SRS driver airbags and front passenger airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving position memory system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear seat position memory system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
152
153
153
161
163
164
167
178
189
198
219
223
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
SEATS
While the vehicle is being driven, all vehicle occupants should
have the seatback upright, sit well back in the seat and properly
wear the seat belts provided.
FRONT SEATS
Front seat precautions
Driver seat
CAUTION
CAUTION
Do not drive the vehicle unless the occupants are
properly seated. Do not allow any passengers to sit
in the luggage compartment or cargo area. Persons
not properly seated and/or not properly restrained by
seat belts can be severely injured in the event of
emergency braking or a collision.
The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force,
and can cause death or serious injury especially if the
driver is very close to the airbag. The National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (“NHTSA”) advises:
During driving, do not allow any passengers to stand
up or move around between seats. Otherwise, severe
injuries can occur in the event of emergency braking
or a collision.
Since the risk zone for driver airbag is the first 50-75
mm (2-3 in.) of inflation, placing yourself 250 mm (10 in.)
from your driver airbag provides you with a clear margin
of safety. This distance is measured from the center of
the steering wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less
than 250 mm (10 in.) away now, you can change your
driving position in several ways:
Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still
reaching the pedals comfortably.
Slightly recline the back of the seat. Although vehicle
designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 250 mm
(10 in.) distance, even with the driver seat all the way
forward, simply by reclining the back of the seat
somewhat. If reclining the back of your seat makes
it hard to see the road, raise yourself by using a firm,
non-slippery cushion, or raise the seat if your vehicle
has that feature.
153
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward.
This points the airbag toward your chest instead of
your head and neck.
The seat should be adjusted as recommended by
NHTSA above, while still maintaining control of the foot
pedals, steering wheel, and your view of the instrument
panel controls.
Front passenger seat
CAUTION
The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with
considerable force, and can cause death or serious
injury especially if the front passenger is very close to
the airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far
from the airbag as possible with the seatback adjusted,
so the front passenger sits upright.
154
Front seats
CAUTION
The SRS side airbags are installed in the driver and front
passenger seats. Observe the following precautions.
Do not lean against the front door when the vehicle
is in use, since the side airbag inflates with
considerable speed and force. Otherwise, you may
be killed or severely injured.
Do not use seat accessories which cover the area
where the side airbags inflate. Such accessories may
prevent the side airbags from activating correctly,
causing death or serious injury.
Do not modify or replace the seats or the upholstery
of the seats equipped with side airbags. Such
change may prevent the side airbag system from
activating correctly, disable the system, or cause the
side airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in death
or serious injury.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Seat adjustment precautions
Adjusting front seats
CAUTION
Do not adjust the seat while the vehicle is moving as
the seat may unexpectedly move and cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle.
16L257a
Be careful that the seat does not hit a passenger,
luggage or the rear seat.
NOTICE
Do not operate the control switch in more than one
dimension at a time. It may cause electrical overload.
1 Seat cushion length control switch
2 Seat position control switch, seat cushion angle
and height control switch
3 Seatback angle and head restraint control switch
4 Upper lumbar support control switch
5 Lower lumbar support control switch
155
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Adjusting seat cushion length
16L264
Adjusting seat position
16L258a
For driver’s seat only
For driver’s seat
Move the control switch in the desired direction.
Move the control switch in the desired direction.
Releasing the switch will stop the seat cushion in that position.
Do not place anything under the seat, as this might interfere
with the seat movement.
Releasing the switch will stop the seat and head restraint in
that position. Do not place anything under the seat, as this
might interfere with the seat movement.
You can adjust the head restraint in the desired position by
using the head restraint control switch. However, if you move
the seat more than 15 mm (0.6 in.) by using the seat position
control switch after adjusting the head restraint, the head
restraint will return to the designated position as determined by
the seat position switch. To adjust the head restraint, see
“Head restraints” on page 164.
156
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Adjusting seatback angle
16L259
16L260a
For passenger’s seat
Move the control switch in the desired direction.
Move the control switch in the desired direction.
Releasing the switch will stop the seat in that position. Do not
place anything under the seat as this might interfere with the
seat movement.
Releasing the switch will stop the seatback in that position.
CAUTION
To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a
collision, avoid reclining the seatback any more than
needed. The seat belts provide maximum protection in
a frontal or rear collision when the driver and the front
passenger are sitting up straight and well back in the
seats. If you are reclined, the lap belt may slide past
your hips and apply restraint forces directly to the
abdomen. In the event of a frontal collision, the more the
seat is reclined, the greater the risk of personal injury.
157
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Adjusting seat cushion angle and height
Adjusting lumbar support
Driver’s seat (Upper and lower lumbar supports)
To use both lumbar supports effectively, adjust the lower
lumbar support first and then the upper lumbar support.
16L557
16L263a
Move the control switch in the desired direction.
Releasing the switch will stop the seat cushion in that position.
Lower lumbar support
Push the lower lumbar support control switch on either
side.
The amount of lower lumbar support will change while the
switch is pushed.
158
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Front passenger’s seat
16L262a
16L354a
Upper lumbar support
Push the upper lumbar support control switch on either
side.
The amount of upper lumbar support will change while the
switch is pushed.
Push the control switch on either side.
The amount of lumbar support will change while the switch is
pushed.
159
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Adjusting front passenger’s seat from the
driver’s seat
16L265a
16L266a
Seatback angle
Move the control switch in the desired direction.
Seat position
Releasing the switch will stop the seatback in that position.
Move the control switch in the desired direction.
Releasing the switch will stop the seat in that position. Do not
place anything under the seat as this might interfere with the
seat movement.
CAUTION
If you operate the switch when a front passenger is
seated or he/she is getting on or off the front passenger
seat, take full safety precautions beforehand by telling
the occupant that the seat is about to move.
160
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
CAUTION
If you operate the switch when an occupant is seated
or when he/she is getting on or off the front
passenger seat, take full safety precautions
beforehand by telling the occupant that the seat is
about to move.
To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during
a collision, avoid reclining the seatback any more
than needed. The seat belts provide maximum
protection in a frontal or rear collision when the front
passenger is sitting up straight and well back in the
seats. If he/she is reclined, the lap belt may slide past
his/her hips and apply restraint forces directly to the
abdomen. In the event of a frontal collision, the more
the seat is reclined, the greater the risk of personal
injury.
REAR SEATS
Adjusting rear power seats
16L630
1 Seat position control switches
2 Head restraint height control switches
3 Refreshing rear seat switches
The rear power seat control switches are located in the rear
armrest.
For the operation of head restraints and refreshing rear seat
switches, see “Head restraints” on page 164 and “Refreshing
rear seat switches” on page 76.
161
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Adjusting seat position
16L271c
1 For left seat
Returning the rear seats and rear head
restraints from the front seats
16L636
2 For right seat
Push the seat position control switch on the front side to
move the seat forward and on the rear side to move the
seat backward.
Releasing the switch will stop the seat in that position. Do not
place anything under the seat as this might interfere with the
seat movement.
To return the rear seats and rear head restraints, push the
switch on the instrument panel. The rear seats move
backward and the rear head restraints move downward
while the switch is being pushed.
CAUTION
Do not operate the switch when the rear seats and
head restraints are in the rearmost and lowest
positions. The system may malfunction.
If you operate the switch when an occupant is seated
or when he/she is getting on or off the rear seat, take
full safety precautions beforehand by telling the
occupant that the seat is about to move.
162
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
ARMREST
To use the armrest, pull it down as shown above.
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the armrest, avoid putting heavy
loads on it.
16L631
Vehicles with rear power seats
16L632
Vehicles without rear power seats
163
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
HEAD RESTRAINTS
For your safety and comfort, adjust the head restraint
before driving.
16L274
Front seats
16L273a
To move the head restraint forward or rearward, pull or
push on the top.
The head restraint is most effective when it is close to your
head. Therefore, using a cushion on the seatback is not
recommended.
Move the control switch in the desired direction.
Releasing the switch will stop the head restraint in that
position.
164
CAUTION
Adjust the center of the head restraint so that it is
closest to the top of your ears.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Outside rear seats (power type)
Outside rear seats (manual type)
Adjusting head restraint height
16L275c
1 For left seat
2 For right seat
Push the head restraint height control switch on the front
side to move the head restraint upward and on the rear
side to move it downward.
Releasing the switch will stop the head restraint in that
position.
16L277
To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower it, press the
lock release button and push the head restraint down. To
move the head restraint forward or rearward, pull or push
on the top.
The head restraint is most effective when it is close to your
head. Therefore, using a cushion on the seatback is not
recommended.
CAUTION
CAUTION
Adjust the center of the head restraint so that it is
closest to the top of your ears.
Adjust the center of the head restraint so that it is
closest to the top of your ears.
After adjusting the head restraint, make sure it is
locked in position.
Do not drive with the head restraints removed.
165
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Center rear seat
16L278b
16L279
Push the button to return the head restraint to its original
position.
To move the head restraint forward, pull on the top. To
move the head restraint forward or rearward, pull or push
on the top.
The head restraint is most effective when it is close to your
head. Therefore, using a cushion on the seatback is not
recommended.
CAUTION
After adjusting the head restraint, make sure it is locked
in position.
166
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
SEAT BELTS
Seat belt precautions
Pregnant woman. Lexus recommends the use of a seat belt.
Ask your doctor for specific recommendations. The lap belt
should be worn securely and as low as possible over the hips
and not on the waist.
Lexus strongly urges that the driver and passengers in the
vehicle be properly restrained at all times with the seat belts
provided. Failure to do so could increase the chance of injury
and/or the severity of injury in accidents.
Injured person. Lexus recommends the use of a seat belt.
Depending on the injury, first check with your doctor for specific
recommendations.
The seat belts provided for your vehicle are designed for
people of adult size, large enough to properly wear them.
CAUTION
Child. Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child
until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the
vehicle’s seat belts. See “Child restraint” on page 198 for
details.
Persons should ride in their seats properly wearing
their seat belts whenever the vehicle is moving.
Otherwise, they are much more likely to suffer serious
bodily injury or death in the event of sudden braking or
a collision.
If a child is too large for a child restraint system, the child should
sit in the rear seat and must be restrained using the vehicle’s
seat belt. According to accident statistics, the child is safer
when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.
If a child must sit in the front seat, the seat belts should be worn
properly. If an accident occurs and the seat belts are not worn
properly, the force of the rapid inflation of the airbag may cause
death or serious injury to the child.
Do not allow any children to stand up or kneel on either rear or
front seats. An unrestrained child could suffer serious injury or
death during emergency braking or a collision. Also, do not let
the child sit on your lap. Holding a child in your arms does not
provide sufficient restraint.
When using the seat belts, observe the following:
Use the belt for only one person at a time. Do not use
a single belt for two or more people - even children.
To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during
a collision, avoid reclining the seatback any more
than needed. The seat belts provide maximum
protection in a frontal or rear collision when the
driver and the front passenger are sitting up straight
and well back in the seats. If you are reclined, the lap
belt may slide past your hips and apply restraint
forces directly to the abdomen. In the event of a
frontal collision, the more the seat is reclined, the
greater the risk of personal injury.
167
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Be careful not to damage the belt webbing or
hardware. Take care that they do not get caught or
pinched in the seat or doors.
Front seat belt buckle illumination
Inspect the belt system periodically. Check for cuts,
fraying, and loose parts. Damaged parts should be
replaced. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Keep the belts clean and dry. If they need cleaning,
use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water. Never
use bleach, dye, or abrasive cleaners, or allow them
to come into contact with the belt - they may severely
weaken the belts. (See “Cleaning the interior” on
page 526 for instructions.)
Replace the belt assembly (including bolts) if it has
been used in a severe impact. The entire assembly
should be replaced even if damage is not obvious.
16L371
Opening the driver’s door lights up the driver’s seat belt
buckle for easy use. The same applies for the front
passenger’s door and seat belt buckle.
The light remains on for 15 seconds after the door is closed,
but goes off immediately when all the doors are locked.
168
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Fastening front and rear seat belts
16L287
When a passenger’s shoulder belt is completely extended and
is then retracted even slightly, the belt is locked in that position
and cannot be extended. This feature is used to hold the child
restraint system securely. (For details, see “Child restraint” on
page 198.) To free the belt again, fully retract the belt and then
pull the belt out once more.
If the seat belt cannot be pulled out of the retractor, firmly pull
the belt and release it. You will then be able to smoothly pull
the belt out of the retractor.
CAUTION
Adjust the seat as needed and sit up straight and well back
in the seat. To fasten your belt, pull it out of the retractor
and insert the tab into the buckle.
You will hear a click when the tab locks into the buckle.
The seat belt length automatically adjusts to your size and the
seat position.
The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on
impact. It also may lock if you lean forward too quickly. A slow,
easy motion will allow the belt to extend, and you can move
around freely.
After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle
are locked and that the belt is not twisted.
Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this
may prevent you from properly latching the tab and
buckle.
If the seat belt does not function normally,
immediately contact your Lexus dealer. Do not use
the seat until the seat belt is fixed, because it cannot
protect an adult occupant or your child from injury.
169
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
16L288
Adjust the position of the lap and shoulder belts.
1
Position the lap belt as low as possible on your hips - not
on your waist.
2
Adjust it to a snug fit by pulling the shoulder portion
upward through the latch plate.
16L289a
Front seat belts only
Adjust the shoulder anchor position to your size.
To adjust the shoulder anchor position, press the upper or
lower part of the control switch located on the door. When the
switch is released, the shoulder anchor will stop at that
position.
CAUTION
Both high-positioned lap belts and loose-fitting
belts could cause serious injuries due to sliding
under the lap belt during a collision or other
unintended event. Keep the lap belt positioned as
low on hips as possible.
Do not place the shoulder belt under your arm.
170
CAUTION
Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned
across the center of your shoulder. The belt should be
kept away from your neck, but not falling off your
shoulder. Failure to do so could reduce the amount of
protection in an accident and cause serious injuries in
a collision.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Seat belt comfort guides
16L290
16L291B
To release the belt, press the buckle release button and
allow the belt to retract.
If the belt does not retract smoothly, pull it out and check for
kinks or twists. Then make sure it remains untwisted as it
retracts.
The seat belt comfort guides are installed on the outside
rear seats to relieve uncomfortableness from the
shoulder belt when it is applied closer to a child’s neck (at
the age of 10 or so), by pulling the shoulder belt a little
forward.
Slide the seat belt comfort guide forward to adjust the
shoulder belt.
The seat belt comfort guide should not be in the forward
position for other purposes.
171
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
CAUTION
Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned
across the center of the child’s shoulder. The belt
should be kept away from the child’s neck, and should
not fall off the child’s shoulder. Failure to observe these
precautions could reduce the effectiveness of the seat
belt in an accident, causing death or serious injury.
Seat belt extender
If your seat belts cannot be fastened securely because they
are not long enough, a personalized seat belt extender is
available from your Lexus dealer free of charge.
Please contact your local Lexus dealer so that the dealer can
order the proper required length for the extender. Bring the
heaviest coat you expect to wear for proper measurement and
selection of length. Additional ordering information is available
at your Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
When using the seat belt extender, observe the
following precautions.
Failure to follow these
instructions could reduce the effectiveness of the seat
belt restraint system in case of an accident, increasing
the chance of personal injury.
Remember that the extender provided for you may
not be safe when used on a different vehicle, for
another person, or at a different seating position than
the one originally intended.
172
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Be sure to wear the seat belt without the seat belt
extender if you can fasten the seat belt without the
extender.
16L625
Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a
child restraint system on the front or rear passenger
seat. If installing a child restraint system with the
seat belt extender connected to the seat belt, the seat
belt will not securely hold the child restraint system,
which could cause death or serious injury to the child
or other passengers in the event of collision.
If the seat belt extender has been connected to the
driver’s seat belt buckle without wearing the seat belt
when using the extender in the driver’s seat, the SRS
driver’s airbag system will judge that the driver wears
the seat belt even if not wearing it. In this case, the
driver’s airbag may not activate correctly, causing
death or serious injury in the event of collision. Be
sure to wear the seat belt with the seat belt extender.
173
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
CAUTION
16L292
To connect the extender to the seat belt, insert the tab into
the seat belt buckle so that the “PRESS” signs on the
buckle release buttons of the extender and the seat belt
are both facing outward as shown.
You will hear a click when the tab locks into the buckle.
When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release
button on the extender, not on the seat belt. This helps prevent
damage to the vehicle interior and extender itself.
When not in use, remove the extender and store in the vehicle
for future use.
174
After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle
are locked and that the lap and shoulder portions of
the belt and the seat belt extender are not twisted.
Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this
may prevent you from properly latching the tab and
buckle.
If the seat belt does not function normally,
immediately contact your Lexus dealer. Do not use
the seat until the seat belt is fixed, because it cannot
protect an adult occupant or your child from injury.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Seat belt pretensioners
16L649a
16L645
Both front seats and the two outside rear seats are
equipped with seat belt pretensioners and are designed to
be activated in response to a severe frontal impact.
When the sensor detects a severe frontal impact, the seat belts
are quickly drawn back by the retractor so that the belts snugly
restrain the seat occupants.
The front passenger seat belt pretensioner will not activate if
there is no passenger sitting in the front passenger seat.
However, the front passenger seat belt pretensioner may
activate if luggage is put in the seat, or the seat belt is buckled
up regardless of the presence of the occupant in the seat.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Front airbag sensors
Occupant detection sensor
Front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch
Front seat belt pretensioner assembly
SRS warning light
Rear seat belt pretensioner assembly
Airbag sensor assembly
The seat belt pretensioner system consists mainly of the
above components, and their locations are shown in the
illustration.
The seat belt pretensioners are controlled by the airbag sensor
assembly. The airbag sensor assembly consists of a safing
sensor and airbag sensor.
The outside rear seat belt pretensioners are activated even
with no passengers in the outside rear seats.
The seat belt pretensioners and SRS airbags may not operate
together in all collisions.
175
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
When the seat belt pretensioners are activated, an operating
noise may be heard and a small amount of non-toxic gas may
be released. This does not indicate that a fire is occurring. This
gas is normally harmless.
Once the seat belt pretensioners have been activated, the seat
belt retractors remain locked.
CAUTION
Do not modify, remove, strike or open the seat belt
pretensioner assemblies, airbag sensor or surrounding
area or wiring. Failure to follow these instructions may
prevent the seat belt pretensioners from activating
correctly, cause sudden operation of the system or
disable the system, which could result in death or
serious injury. Consult your Lexus dealer about any
repair and modification.
176
NOTICE
Do not perform any of the following changes without
consulting your Lexus dealer. Such changes can
interfere with proper operation of the seat belt
pretensioners in some cases.
Installation of electronic devices such as a mobile
two-way radio, cassette tape player or compact disc
player.
Repairs on or near the seat belt retractor assemblies.
Modification of the suspension system.
Modification of the front end structure.
Attachment of a grille guard (bull bar, kangaroo bar,
etc.), snowplow, winches or any other equipment to
the front end.
Repairs made on or near the front fenders, front end
structure or console.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
If any of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a
malfunction of the airbags or seat belt pretensioners. Contact
your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
16L330b
When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position, the
light does not come on or remains on.
The light comes on while driving.
If any seat belt does not retract or cannot be pulled out due
to a malfunction or activation of the relevant seat belt
pretensioner.
This indicator comes on when the ignition switch is turned
to the “ON” position. It goes off after about 6 seconds.
This means the seat belt pretensioners are operating
properly.
The seat belt pretensioner assembly or surrounding area
has been damaged.
This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor
assembly, front airbag sensors, side and curtain shield airbag
sensor assemblies, curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies,
driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt buckle switch,
occupant detection sensor, front passenger’s seat belt buckle
switch, seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, warning
light, interconnecting wiring and power sources. (For details,
see “Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers” on
page 81.)
177
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
SRS DRIVER AIRBAGS AND FRONT
PASSENGER AIRBAGS
16L650
16L336a
In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as
possible.
The front of the vehicle (shaded in the illustration) was
involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause
the seat belt pretensioners to operate.
The seat belt pretensioner assembly or surrounding area is
scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.
1 Driver airbag 2 Front passenger airbag
3 Front passenger knee airbag 4 Driver knee airbag
The SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) front airbags
are designed to provide further protection for the driver
and front passenger in addition to the primary safety
protection provided by the seat belts.
In response to a severe frontal impact, the SRS front airbags
work together with the seat belts to help reduce injury by
inflating. The SRS front airbags help reduce injuries mainly to
the driver’s or front passenger’s head, chest or knees caused
by hitting the vehicle interior.
178
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
The SRS front passenger airbag will not activate if there is no
passenger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the
front passenger airbag may deploy if luggage is put in the seat,
or the seat belt is buckled up, regardless of the presence of an
occupant in the seat.
Always wear your seat belt properly.
Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and diagnostic
module, which will record the use of the seat belt restraint
system by the driver and front passenger when the SRS front
airbags are inflated.
CAUTION
The SRS front airbag system is designed only as a
supplement to the primary protection of the driver
and front passenger seat belt systems. The driver
and front passenger can be killed or seriously injured
by the inflating airbags if they do not wear the
available seat belts properly. During sudden braking
just before a collision, an unrestrained driver or front
passenger can move forward into direct contact with
or close proximity to the airbag which may then
deploy during the collision. To ensure maximum
protection in an accident, the driver and all
passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts
properly. Wearing a seat belt properly during an
accident reduces the chances of death or serious
injury or being thrown out of the vehicle. For
instructions and precautions concerning the seat
belt system, see “Seat belts” on page 167.
179
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and
children can be killed or seriously injured by the
deploying airbags. An infant or child who is too small
to use a seat belt should be properly secured using
a child restraint system.
Lexus strongly
recommends that all infants and children be placed
in the rear seat of the vehicle and properly restrained.
The rear seat is the safest for infants and children.
For instructions concerning the installation of a child
restraint system, see “Child restraint” on page 198 .
The SRS front airbags are designed to deploy in severe
(usually frontal) collisions where the magnitude and
duration of the forward deceleration of the vehicle
exceeds the designed threshold level.
The SRS front airbags will deploy if the severity of the impact
is above the designed threshold level, comparable to an
approximate 25 km/h (15 mph) collision when the vehicle has
the impact straight into a fixed barrier that does not move or
deform.
However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher if
the vehicle strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign
pole, which can move or deform on impact, or if the vehicle is
involved in an underride collision (e.g. a collision in which the
front of the vehicle “underrides”, or goes under, the bed of a
truck, etc.).
It is possible that in some collisions where the forward
deceleration of the vehicle is very close to the designed
threshold level, the SRS front airbags and the seat belt
pretensioners may not activate together.
Always wear your seat belts properly.
180
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
16L651
1 Collision from the side
3 Vehicle rollover
2 Collision from the rear
The SRS front airbags are generally not designed to inflate
if the vehicle is involved in a side or rear collision, if it rolls
over, or if it is involved in a low-speed frontal collision.
But, whenever a collision of any type causes sufficient
forward deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the
SRS front airbags may occur.
16L652
1 Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard surface
2 Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
3 Landing hard or vehicle falling
The SRS front airbags may also deploy if a serious impact
occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples
are shown in the illustration.
181
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
16L653a
1 Occupant detection sensor
2 Airbag module for front passenger
(airbag and inflator)
3 Knee airbag module for front passenger
(airbag and inflator)
4 Front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch
5 SRS warning light
6 Airbag module for driver (airbag and inflator)
7 Knee airbag module for driver (airbag and inflator)
8 Driver’s seat belt buckle switch
9 Driver’s seat position sensor
10 Airbag sensor assembly
11 Front airbag sensors
The SRS front airbag system consists mainly of the above
components, and their locations are shown in the illustration.
The airbag sensor assembly consists of a safing sensor and
airbag sensors.
182
The front airbag sensors constantly monitor the forward
deceleration of the vehicle. If an impact results in a forward
deceleration beyond the designed threshold level, the system
triggers the airbag inflators. At this time a chemical reaction in
the inflators very quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to
help restrain the forward motion of the occupants. The front
airbags then quickly deflate, so that there is no obstruction of
the driver’s vision should it be necessary to continue driving.
When the airbags inflate, they produce a loud noise and
release some smoke and residue along with non-toxic gas.
This does not indicate a fire. This smoke may remain inside
the vehicle for some time, and may cause some minor irritation
to the eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure to wash off any residue
as soon as possible to prevent any potential skin irritation with
soap and water. If you can safely exit from the vehicle, you
should do so immediately.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Deployment of the airbags happens in a fraction of a second,
so the airbags must inflate with considerable force. While the
system is designed to reduce serious injuries, primarily to the
head and chest, it may also cause other, less severe injuries
to the face, chest, arms and hands. These are usually in the
nature of minor burns or abrasions and swelling, but the force
of a deploying airbag can cause more serious injuries,
especially if an occupant’s hands, arms, chest or head is in
close proximity to the airbag module at the time of deployment.
This is why it is important for the occupant to; avoid placing any
object or part of the body between the occupant and the airbag
module; sit straight and well back into the seat; wear the
available seat belt properly; and sit as far as possible from the
airbag module, while still maintaining control of the vehicle.
Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, lower portion
of instrument panel, airbag cover and inflator) may be hot for
several minutes after deployment, so do not touch! The
airbags inflate only once. The windshield may be damaged by
absorbing some of the force of the inflating airbag.
CAUTION
The driver or front passenger who is too close to the
steering wheel, lower portion of instrument panel or
dashboard during airbag deployment can be killed or
seriously injured. Lexus strongly recommends that:
The driver sit as far back as possible from the
steering wheel while still maintaining control of the
vehicle.
The front passenger sit as far back as possible from
the dashboard.
All vehicle occupants be properly restrained using
the available seat belts.
If the seat belt extender has been connected to the
driver’s seat belt buckle without wearing the seat belt
when using the extender in the driver’s seat, the SRS
driver’s airbag system will judge that the driver wears
the seat belt even if not wearing it. In this case, the
driver’s airbag may not activate correctly, causing
death or serious injury in the event of collision. Be
sure to wear the seat belt with the seat belt extender.
For instructions and precautions concerning the
seating position, see “Front seat precautions” on page
153.
183
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
16L637
Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean against the
dashboard when the vehicle is in use, since the front
passenger airbag could inflate with considerable
speed and force. Anyone who is up against, or very
close to, an airbag when it inflates, can be killed or
seriously injured. Sit up straight and well back in the
seat, and always use your seat belt properly.
16L638
Lexus strongly recommends that all infants and
children be placed in the rear seat of the vehicle and
be properly restrained.
Do not allow a child to stand up or kneel on the front
passenger seat, since the front passenger airbag
could inflate with considerable speed and force.
Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously
injured.
Do not hold a child on your lap or in your arms. Use
a child restraint system in the rear seat. For
instructions concerning the installation of a child
restraint system, see “Child restraint” on page 198.
184
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
16L750
Do not put anything or any part of your body on or in
front of the dashboard, lower portion of instrument
panel, steering wheel pad that houses the front
airbag system or in the areas where the SRS knee
airbags will inflate. They might restrict inflation or
cause death or serious injury as they are projected
rearward by the force of the deploying airbags.
Likewise, the driver and front passenger should not
hold objects in their arms or on their knees.
If the vinyl cover is put on the area where the SRS
knee airbag will deploy, be sure to remove it.
Do not attach any objects except Lexus genuine
parts in the area where the SRS knee airbag for the
front passenger will inflate. When using an ashtray
or auxiliary box on the front passenger’s console
box, be sure to keep it closed. The attached object, or
opened ashtray or auxiliary box might restrict
inflation of the airbag or be thrown away by the force
of the deploying airbag, causing a danger.
Do not modify or remove any wiring. Do not modify,
remove, strike or open any components, such as the
steering wheel pad, steering wheel, column cover,
dashboard near the front passenger airbag, front
passenger airbag cover, front passenger airbag,
knee airbags or airbag sensor assembly. Doing so
may prevent the front airbag system from activating
correctly, cause sudden activation of the system or
disable the system, which could result in death or
serious injury.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death
or serious injury. Consult your Lexus dealer about any
repair and modification.
185
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
NOTICE
16L648
Do not perform any of the following changes without
consulting your Lexus dealer. Such changes can
interfere with proper operation of the SRS front airbag
system in some cases.
Installation of electronic devices such as a mobile
two-way radio, cassette tape player or compact disc
player.
Modification of the suspension system.
Do not attach any heavy, sharp or hard objects such
as keys or accessories to the ignition key. The
objects may restrict the SRS knee airbag inflation or
be thrust into the driver’s seat area by the force of the
deploying airbag, causing a danger.
186
Modification of the front end structure.
Attachment of a grille guard (bull bar, kangaroo bar,
etc.), snowplow, winches or any other equipment to
the front end.
Repairs made on or near the front fenders, front end
structure, console, steering column, steering wheel,
lower portion of instrument panel or dashboard near
the front passenger airbag.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
If any of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a
malfunction of the airbags or seat belt pretensioners. Contact
your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
16L330b
When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position, the
light does not come on or remains on.
The light comes on while driving.
The indicator comes on when the ignition switch is turned
to the “ON” position. It goes off after about 6 seconds.
This means the SRS front airbags are operating properly.
This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor
assembly, front airbag sensors, side and curtain shield airbag
sensor assemblies, curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies,
driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt buckle switch,
occupant detection sensor, front passenger’s seat belt buckle
switch, seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, warning
light, interconnecting wiring and power sources. (For details,
see “Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers” on
page 81.)
187
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
The pad section of the steering wheel, front passenger
airbag cover or lower portion of instrument panel (shaded
in the illustration) is scratched, cracked, or otherwise
damaged.
NOTICE
Do not disconnect the battery cables before contacting
your Lexus dealer.
16L654
In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as
possible:
The SRS front airbags have been inflated.
The front of the vehicle (shaded in the illustration) was
involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause
the SRS front airbags to inflate.
188
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
SRS SIDE AIRBAGS AND CURTAIN
SHIELD AIRBAGS
The SRS side airbag on the passenger seat will not activate if
there is no passenger sitting in the front passenger seat.
However, the side airbag on the passenger seat may deploy
if luggage is put in the seat, or the seat belt is buckled up,
regardless of the presence of an occupant in the seat.
The SRS curtain shield airbags may activate even when the
side airbags are not activated.
16L620
1 Curtain shield airbag
2 Side airbag
The SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) side airbags
and curtain shield airbags are designed to provide further
protection for the driver, front passenger and rear outside
passengers in addition to the primary safety protection
provided by the seat belts.
In response to a severe side impact, the SRS side airbags and
curtain shield airbags work with the seat belts to help reduce
injury by inflating. The SRS side airbags help reduce injuries
mainly to the driver’s or front passenger’s chest, and the SRS
curtain shield airbags help reduce injuries mainly to the
driver’s, front passenger’s or rear outside passenger’s head.
Always wear your seat belt properly.
Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and diagnostic
module, which will record the use of the seat belt restraint
system by the driver and front passenger when the SRS side
airbags and curtain shield airbags are inflated.
CAUTION
The SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system
is designed only as a supplement to the primary
protection of the driver, front passenger and rear
outside passenger seat belt systems. To ensure
maximum protection in an accident, the driver and all
passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts
properly. Wearing a seat belt properly during an
accident reduces the chances of death or serious
injury or being thrown out of the vehicle. For
instructions and precautions concerning the seat
belt system, see “Seat belts” on page 167.
189
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Do not allow anyone to lean his/her head or any part
of his/her body against the door or the area of the
seat, front pillar, rear pillar or roof side rail from which
the SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag deploy
even if he/she is a child seated in the child restraint
system. It is dangerous if the SRS side airbag and
curtain shield airbag inflate, and the impact of the
deploying airbags could cause death or serious
injury to the occupant.
Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and
children can be killed or seriously injured by the
deploying airbags. An infant or child who is too small
to use a seat belt should be properly secured using
a child restraint system.
Lexus strongly
recommends that all infants and children be placed
in the rear seats of the vehicle and properly
restrained. The rear seats are the safest for infants
and children. For instructions concerning the
installation of a child restraint system, see “Child
restraint” on page 198 .
16L655
1 Collision from the side to the vehicle body other
than the passenger compartment
2 Collision from the side at an angle
The SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system may
not activate if the vehicle is subjected to a collision from
the side at certain angles, or a collision to the side of the
vehicle body other than the passenger compartment as
shown in the illustration.
The SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags are designed
to inflate when the passenger compartment area suffers a
severe impact from the side.
Always wear your seat belts properly.
190
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
16L656
1 Collision from the front
2 Collision from the rear
3 Vehicle rollover
The SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags are not
generally designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a
front or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in
a low-speed side collision.
16L657
1
2
3
4
5
6
Curtain shield airbag module (airbag and inflator)
Side airbag module (airbag and inflator)
Curtain shield airbag sensor assembly
Side and curtain shield airbag sensor assembly
SRS warning light
Airbag sensor assembly
The SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system consists
mainly of the above components, and their locations are
shown in the illustration.
The SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system is
controlled by the airbag sensor assembly. The airbag sensor
assembly consists of a safing sensor and airbag sensor.
191
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
In a severe side impact, the side and curtain shield airbag
sensor and/or the curtain shield airbag sensor trigger(s) the
side airbag inflators and/or the curtain shield airbag inflators.
At this time a chemical reaction in the inflators quickly fills the
airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain the lateral motion
of the occupants.
When the airbags inflate, they produce a fairly loud noise and
release some smoke and residue along with non-toxic gas.
This does not indicate a fire. This smoke may remain inside
the vehicle for some time, and may cause some minor irritation
to the eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure to wash off any residue
as soon as possible to prevent any potential skin irritation with
soap and water. If you can safely exit from the vehicle, you
should do so immediately.
Deployment of the airbags happens in a fraction of a second,
so the airbags must inflate with considerable force. While the
system is designed to reduce serious injuries, it may also
cause minor burns or abrasions and swelling.
Front seats as well as parts of the front and rear pillars, and roof
side rail may be hot for several minutes, but the airbags
themselves will not be hot. The airbags are designed to inflate
only once.
192
CAUTION
SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags inflate with
considerable force. To reduce the possibility of death
or serious injury when they inflate, the driver, front
passenger and rear outside passengers must:
Wear their seat belts properly.
Remain properly seated with their backs upright and
against the seats at all times.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
16L344
Do not allow anyone to lean against the door when
the vehicle is in use, since the side airbag and curtain
shield airbag could inflate with considerable speed
and force. Otherwise, he/she may be killed or
seriously injured. Special care should be taken
especially when you have a small child in the vehicle.
Sit up straight and well back in the seat, distributing
your weight evenly in the seat. Do not apply
excessive weight to the outer side of the seats with a
side airbag and to the front pillar, rear pillar and roof
side rail with a curtain shield airbag.
16L583
Do not allow anyone to get his/her head close to the
area where the side airbag and curtain shield airbag
inflate, since these airbags could inflate with
considerable speed and force. Otherwise, he/she
may be killed or seriously injured. Special care
should be taken especially when you have a small
child in the vehicle.
Do not allow anyone to kneel on the passenger seat,
facing the passenger’s side door, since the side
airbag and curtain shield airbag could inflate with
considerable speed and force. Otherwise, he/she
may be killed or seriously injured. Special care
should be taken especially when you have a small
child in the vehicle.
193
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
16L623
Do not allow anyone to get his/her head or hands out
of windows, since the curtain shield airbags could
inflate with considerable speed and force.
Otherwise, he/she may be killed or seriously injured.
Special care should be taken especially when you
have a small child in the vehicle.
194
16L640
Do not attach a cup holder or any other device or
object on or around the door. When the side airbag
inflates, the cup holder or any other device or object
will be thrown with great force, or the side airbag may
not activate correctly, resulting in death or serious
injury. Likewise, the driver and front passenger
should not hold objects in their arms or on their
knees.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts
where the side airbags inflate. Such accessories may
prevent the side airbags from activating correctly,
causing death or serious injury.
16L348
Do not attach a microphone or any other device or
object around the area where the curtain shield
airbag activates such as on the windshield glass,
side door glass, front and rear pillars, roof side rail
and assist grips. When the curtain shield airbag
inflates, the microphone or other device or object will
be thrown away with great force or the curtain shield
airbag may not activate correctly, resulting in death
or serious injury.
Do not modify or replace the seats or upholstery of
the seats with side airbags. Such changes may
prevent the side airbag system from activating
correctly, disable the system or cause the side
airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or
serious injury.
Do not disassemble or repair the front and rear pillars
and roof side rails containing the curtain shield
airbags. Such changes may disable the system or
cause the curtain shield airbags to inflate
accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death
or serious injury. Consult your Lexus dealer about any
repair and modification.
Do not hook a hanger, heavy or sharp pointed objects
on the coat hook. If the curtain shield airbag inflates,
those items will be thrown away with great force or
the curtain shield airbag may not activate correctly,
resulting in death or serious injury. When you hang
clothes, hang them on the coat hook directly.
195
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
NOTICE
Do not perform any of the following changes without
consulting your Lexus dealer. Such changes can
interfere with proper operation of the SRS side airbag
and curtain shield airbag system in some cases.
16L330b
Installation of electronic devices such as a mobile
two-way radio, cassette tape player or compact disc
player.
Modification of the suspension system.
Modification of the structure of the passenger
compartment.
Repairs made on or near the console or front seat.
The indicator comes on when the ignition switch is turned
to the “ON” position. It goes off after about 6 seconds.
This means the SRS side airbags and curtain shield
airbags are operating properly.
This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor
assembly, front airbag sensors, side and curtain shield airbag
sensor assemblies, curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies,
driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt buckle switch,
occupant detection sensor, front passenger’s seat belt buckle
switch, seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, warning
light, interconnecting wiring and power sources. (For details,
see “Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers” on
page 81.)
196
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
If any of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a
malfunction of the airbags or seat belt pretensioners. Contact
your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position, the
light does not come on or remains on.
The light comes on while driving.
16L658a
197
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as
possible:
Any of the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags have
been inflated.
The portion of the doors (shaded in the illustration) was
involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause
the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags to inflate.
The surface of the seats with the side airbag (shaded in the
illustration) is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.
The portion of the front pillars, rear pillars or roof side rail
garnishes (padding) containing the curtain shield airbags
inside (shaded in the illustration) is scratched, cracked, or
otherwise damaged.
CHILD RESTRAINT
Child restraint precautions
Lexus strongly urges the use of appropriate child
restraint systems for children.
The laws of all 50 states in the U.S.A. and Canada now require
the use of a child restraint system.
Your vehicle conforms to SAE J1819.
If a child is too large for a child restraint system, the child should
sit in the rear seat and must be restrained using the vehicle’s
seat belt. See “Seat belts” on page 167 for details.
CAUTION
NOTICE
Do not disconnect the battery cables before contacting
your Lexus dealer.
For effective protection in automobile accidents and
sudden stops, a child must be properly restrained,
using a seat belt or child restraint system depending
on age and size of the child. Holding a child in your
arms is not a substitute for a child restraint system.
In an accident, the child can be crushed against the
windshield, or between you and the vehicle’s interior.
Lexus strongly urges use of a proper child restraint
system which conforms to the size of the child,
installed on the rear seat. According to accident
statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained
in the rear seat than in the front seat.
198
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on
the front passenger seat. In the event of an accident,
the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger
airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child
if the rear-facing child restraint system is installed
on the front passenger seat.
Make sure you have complied with all installation
instructions provided by the child restraint
manufacturer and that the system is properly
secured. If it is not secured properly, it may cause
death or serious injury to the child in the event of a
sudden stop or accident.
A forward-facing child restraint system should be
allowed to be installed on the front passenger seat
only when it is unavoidable. Always move the seat as
far back as possible, because the front passenger
airbag could inflate with considerable speed and
force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously
injured.
Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part
of his/her body against the door or the area of the
seat, front or rear pillar or roof side rail from which the
side airbags or curtain shield airbags deploy even if
the child is seated in the child restraint system. It is
dangerous if the side airbags and curtain shield
airbags inflate, and the impact could cause death or
serious injury to the child.
Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a
child restraint system on the front or rear passenger
seat. If installing a child restraint system with the
seat belt extender connected to the seat belt, the seat
belt will not securely hold the child restraint system,
which could cause death or serious injury to the child
or other passengers in the event of collision.
199
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Child restraint system
Types of child restraint system
A child restraint system for a small child or baby must
itself be properly restrained on the seat with the lap
portion of the lap/shoulder belt. You must carefully
consult the manufacturer ’s instructions which
accompany the child restraint system.
Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types
depending on the child’s age and size.
To provide proper restraint, use a child restraint system
following the manufacturer ’s instructions about the
appropriate age and size of the child for the child restraint
system.
Install the child restraint system correctly following the
instructions provided by its manufacturer. General directions
are also provided under the following illustrations.
The child restraint system should be installed on the rear seat.
According to accident statistics, the child is safer when
properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.
When not using the child restraint system, keep it secured with
the seat belt or place it in the trunk or somewhere other than
the passenger compartment. This will prevent it from injuring
passengers in the event of a sudden stop or accident.
200
(A) Infant seat
(B) Convertible seat
(C) Booster seat
Install the child restraint system following the instructions
provided by its manufacturer.
Your vehicle has anchor brackets for securing the top strap of
a child restraint system.
For instructions about how to use the anchor bracket, see
“Using a top strap” on page 214.
The child restraint lower anchorages approved for your vehicle
may also be used. See “Installation with child restraint lower
anchorages” on page 216.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
(A) Infant seat
(C) Booster seat
16L306
16L308
(B) Convertible seat
16L307
201
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
INSTALLATION WITH 3-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT
(A) Infant seat installation
16L310
16L306
CAUTION
An infant seat must be used in rear-facing position only.
202
Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on
the front passenger seat. In the event of an accident,
the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger
airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child
if the rear-facing child restraint system is installed
on the front passenger seat.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
16L326
If the driver’s seat position does not allow sufficient
space for safe installation, install the child restraint
system on the rear right seat.
16L427
1
Fix both seats at the same position.
2
Fix both seatbacks at the same angle.
CAUTION
When installing a child restraint system in the rear
center position, adjust both seat cushions to the same
position and align both seatbacks at the same angle.
Otherwise, the child restraint system cannot be
securely restrained and this may cause death or serious
injuries in a collision.
203
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
16L311
1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around the infant
seat following the instructions provided by its manufacturer
and insert the tab into the buckle taking care not to twist the
belt. Keep the lap portion of the belt tight.
CAUTION
After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle
are locked and that the lap and shoulder portions of
the belt are not twisted.
Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this
may prevent your child from properly latching the tab
and buckle.
If the seat belt does not function normally, it cannot
protect your child from death or serious injury.
Contact your Lexus dealer immediately. Do not
install the child restraint system on the seat until the
seat belt is fixed.
204
16L312
2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it in the lock mode.
When the belt is then retracted even slightly, it cannot be
extended.
To hold the infant seat securely, make sure the belt is in the lock
mode before letting the belt retract.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
16L313
3. While pressing the infant seat firmly against the seat
cushion and seatback, let the shoulder belt retract as far as it
will go to hold the infant seat securely.
16L314
CAUTION
Push and pull the child restraint system in different
directions to be sure it is secure. Follow all the
installation instructions provided by its manufacturer.
205
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
(B) Convertible seat installation
16L315
4. To remove the infant seat, press the buckle release button
and allow the belt to retract completely. The belt will move
freely again and be ready to work for an adult or older child
passenger.
206
16L307
A convertible seat must be used in forward- facing or
rear-facing position depending on the age and size of the
child. When installing, follow the manufacturer ’s
instructions about the appropriate age and size of the
child as well as directions for installing the child restraint
system.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
16L317
16L554
Move seat fully back
CAUTION
Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on
the front passenger seat. In the event of an accident,
the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger
airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child
if the rear-facing child restraint system is installed
on the front passenger seat.
A forward-facing child restraint system should be
allowed to be installed on the front passenger seat
only when it is unavoidable. Always move the seat as
far back as possible, because the front passenger
airbag could inflate with considerable speed and
force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously
injured.
Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part
of his/her body against the door or the area of the
seat, front or rear pillar, or roof side rail from which
the side airbags or curtain shield airbags deploy even
if the child is seated in the child restraint system. It
is dangerous if the side airbag and curtain shield
airbag inflate, and the impact could cause death or
serious injury to the child.
207
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
16L327
If the driver’s seat position does not allow sufficient
space for safe installation, install the child restraint
system on the rear right seat.
16L428
1
Fix both seats at the same position.
2
Fix both seatbacks at the same angle.
CAUTION
When installing a child restraint system in the rear
center position, adjust both seat cushions to the same
position and align both seatbacks at the same angle.
Otherwise, the child restraint system cannot be
securely restrained and this may cause death or serious
injuries in a collision.
208
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
16L318
1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around the
convertible seat following the instructions provided by its
manufacturer and insert the tab into the buckle taking care not
to twist the belt. Keep the lap portion of the belt tight.
16L319
2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it in the lock mode.
When the belt is then retracted even slightly, it cannot be
extended.
To hold the convertible seat securely, make sure the belt is in
the lock mode before letting the belt retract.
CAUTION
After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle
are locked and that the lap and shoulder portions of
the belt are not twisted.
Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this
may prevent your child from properly latching the tab
and buckle.
If the seat belt does not function normally, it cannot
protect your child from death or serious injury.
Contact your Lexus dealer immediately. Do not
install the child restraint system on the seat until the
seat belt is fixed.
209
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
16L320
3. While pressing the convertible seat firmly against the seat
cushion and seatback, let the shoulder belt retract as far as it
will go to hold the convertible seat securely.
16L321
CAUTION
Push and pull the child restraint system in different
directions to be sure it is secure. Follow all the
installation instructions provided by its manufacturer.
210
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
(C) Booster seat installation
16L169a
4. To remove the convertible seat, press the buckle release
button and allow the belt to retract completely. The belt will
move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or older
child passenger.
16L308
A booster seat must be used in forward-facing position
only.
211
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
16L555
Move seat fully back
CAUTION
A forward-facing child restraint system should be
allowed to be installed on the front passenger seat
only when it is unavoidable. Always move the seat as
far back as possible, because the front passenger
airbag could inflate with considerable speed and
force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously
injured.
Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part
of his/her body against the door or the area of the
seat, front or rear pillar or roof side rail from which the
side airbags or curtain shield airbags deploy even if
the child is seated in a child restraint system. It is
dangerous if the side airbag and curtain shield airbag
inflate, and the impact could cause death or serious
injury to the child.
212
16L324
1. Sit the child on a booster seat. Run the lap and shoulder belt
through or around the booster seat and across the child
following the instructions provided by its manufacturer and
insert the tab into the buckle taking care not to twist the belt.
Make sure the shoulder belt is correctly across the child’s
shoulder and that the lap belt is positioned as low as possible
on the child’s hips. See “Seat belts” on page 167 for details.
CAUTION
Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned
across the center of child’s shoulder. The belt should
be kept away from child’s neck, but not falling off
child’s shoulder. Otherwise, the child may be killed
or seriously injured in case of sudden braking or a
collision.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Both high-positioned lap belts and loose-fitting
belts could cause death or serious injuries due to
sliding under the lap belt during a collision or other
unintended event. Keep the lap belt positioned as
low on a child’s hips as possible.
For child’s safety, do not place the shoulder belt
under child’s arm.
16L325
After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle
are locked and that the lap and shoulder portions of
the belt are not twisted.
Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this
may prevent your child from properly latching the tab
and buckle.
2. To remove the child restraint system, press the buckle
release button and allow the belt to retract.
If the seat belt does not function normally, it cannot
protect your child from death or serious injury.
Contact your Lexus dealer immediately. Do not
install the child restraint system on the seat until the
seat belt is fixed.
213
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Using a top strap
16L626
16L303
1 Anchor bracket
Follow the procedure below for a child restraint system
that requires the use of a top strap.
2 Symbol
Use the anchor bracket on the package tray behind the rear
seat to attach the top strap.
Anchor brackets are installed for each rear seating position.
This symbol indicates the locations of the anchor bracket.
214
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
16L305a
16L563a
TO USE THE ANCHOR BRACKET
2. Fix the child restraint system with the seat belt.
1. Push the lid of the anchor bracket to open it.
3. Latch the hook onto the anchor bracket and tighten the
top strap.
When using a top strap in the outside rear seat, the head
restraint should be lowered down fully and moved rearward.
For the center rear seat, the head restraint should be in the
original position. Then make sure to pass the top strap over the
head restraint.
For instructions to install the child restraint system, see “Types
of child restraint system” on page 200.
When the child restraint is not in use, make sure the head
restraint is mounted.
215
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
CAUTION
Installation with child restraint lower
anchorages
Do not slide the seat or adjust the head restraint after
securing the child restraint system.
Make sure the top strap is securely latched, and
check that the child restraint system is secure by
pushing and pulling it in different directions.
Follow all the installation instructions provided by its
manufacturer.
16L627a
The lower anchorages for the child restraint system
interfaced with the FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2
specification are installed in the rear seat.
The anchorages are installed in the clearance between the
seat cushion and seatback of both outside rear seats.
Child restraint system interfaced with the FMVSS225 or
CMVSS210.2 specification can be fixed with these
anchorages. In this case, it is not necessary to fix the child
restraint system with a seat belt on the vehicle.
216
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM INSTALLATION
16L628a
16L629a
Canada only
Canada only
Type B
Type A
217
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
For owners in Canada
The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence
of a lower connector system.
Type A:
1. Widen the gap between the seat cushion and seatback
slightly and confirm the position of the lower anchorages
below the symbol in the seatback.
2. Latch the hooks of lower straps onto the anchorages
and tighten the lower straps.
Type B:
1. Widen the gap between the seat cushion and seatback
slightly and confirm the position of the lower anchorages
below the symbol in the seatback.
2. Latch the buckles onto the anchorages.
If your child restraint system has a top strap, it should be
anchored. (For the installation of the top strap, see “Using a top
strap” on page 214.)
For installation details, refer to the instruction manual
equipped with each product.
218
CAUTION
When using the lower anchorages for the child
restraint system, be sure that there are no irregular
objects around the anchorages or that the seat belt is
not caught.
Push and pull the child restraint system in different
directions to be sure it is secure. Follow all the
installation
instructions
provided
by
its
manufacturer.
When using the lower anchorages for a child restraint
system, ensure that the seat is moved to the
rear-most position, with the seatback close to the
child restraint system.
After securing the child restraint system, never slide
the seat.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
DRIVING POSITION MEMORY
SYSTEM
A microcomputer will memorize the position of the driver’s
seat, the height of the head restraint of the driver’s seat, the
seat cushion length of the driver’s seat, the height of the
shoulder belt anchor of the driver’s seat belt, and the positions
of the tilt and telescopic steering, and outside rear view mirrors.
Three different driving position profiles can be entered into the
computer’s memory.
Recording a driving position in the computer’s memory can
only be done when the ignition switch is in the “ON” position
and the selector lever is in the “N” or “P” position.
2. While pushing the “SET” button, push button “1”, “2”
or “3” until the signal beeps.
The beep sound means that the positions are recorded in the
computer’s memory.
By repeating these two steps and pressing the remaining
button, the driving position for another driver can be recorded.
To set a new memorized position, select the desired position
and perform step 2. The previous memory will be erased and
the new position will be set.
To make only slight changes to an already memorized position,
the easiest way is to first activate the memorized position, then
make the desired changes and perform step 2 above.
Setting the driving position
16L299
1. Adjust the driver’s seat, driver’s head restraint height
and seat cushion length, driver’s shoulder belt anchor, tilt
and telescopic steering and outside rear view mirrors to
the desired position.
219
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Recalling the memorized position
Conditions for memorized position activation
Ignition switch “ON” and selector lever in “N” or “P” position
with the vehicle stopped.
All parts of the memorized positions can be activated.
16L300
Ignition switch off and within 30 seconds of opening driver’s
door.
The memorized position can be activated, except for the tilt
and telescopic steering.
If any driving position memory switch is pushed while one of
the memorized driving position profiles is being activated, the
operation will stop.
When you push button “1”, “2” or “3”, the driving position
will be automatically adjusted to the position recorded for
that button.
To activate the system, push the desired button (“1”, “2” or “3”)
again.
The driving position memory control system cannot be
operated while the vehicle is moving.
CAUTION
Do not start the vehicle while the adjustments are
being made.
Take care not to select the wrong button, or the seat
could strike the rear passenger or hit your body
against the steering wheel. If this happens, you can
stop the movement by pressing another driving
position memory switch.
220
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
MEMORY CALL SYSTEM USING A SMART KEY
This system allows you to adjust the driver’s seat, the
driver’s head restraint height, driver’s seat cushion
length, the height of the shoulder belt anchor of the
driver’s seat belt and outside rear view mirrors to the
memorized position when you open the driver’s door after
unlocking it with a smart key. And when you push the
ignition switch, the tilt and telescopic steering is adjusted.
To activate this system, the ID of the smart key needs to
be registered in the memory button.
Registering the smart key ID code
Before the registration of the ID of the smart key, the driving
position must be memorized in the memory button.
When registering, the driver’s door must be closed with the
ignition switch in the “OFF” position.
1. Keep the smart key in possession, select a button in
which you want to record the ID of the key from buttons
“1”, “2” and “3” and push it.
CAUTION
Do not push the “LOCK” button any longer than 2 or 3
seconds. Pushing the button longer activates an alarm.
For details, see page 40.
Erasing the previous registration memory
The driver’s door must be closed with the ignition switch in the
“OFF” position.
1. Keep the smart key in which you want to cancel the
registration in possession and push the “SET” button.
2. Push the “LOCK” or “UNLOCK” button on the smart
key for about one second with the “SET” button held
down.
When the previous key ID memory is erased, two beeps
sound.
2. Push the “LOCK” or “UNLOCK” button on the smart
key for about one second with button “1”, “2” or “3” held
down.
When the registration is completed, one beep sounds. If the
key has already been registered, the previous memory will be
erased. If the same driving position profile for the same key is
registered in another button, that memory will also be erased.
221
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
MEMORY CALL SYSTEM USING A WIRELESS REMOTE
CONTROL KEY
This system allows you to adjust the driver’s seat, the
driver’s head restraint height, driver’s seat cushion
length, the height of the shoulder belt anchor of the
driver’s seat belt and outside rear view mirrors to the
memorized position when you open the driver’s door after
unlocking it with a wireless remote control key. And when
you insert the key into the ignition switch, the tilt and
telescopic steering is adjusted.
To activate this system, the ID of the wireless remote
control key needs to be registered in the memory button.
Registering the wireless remote control key
ID code
Before the registration of the ID of the wireless remote control
key, the driving position must be memorized in the memory
button.
CAUTION
Do not push the “LOCK” button any longer than 2 or 3
seconds. Pushing the button longer activates an alarm.
For details, see page 40.
Erasing the previous registration memory
The driver’s door must be closed with the ignition switch in the
“OFF” position.
1. Keep the wireless remote control key in which you want
to cancel the registration in possession and push the
“SET” button.
When registering, the driver’s door must be closed with the
ignition switch in the “OFF” position.
2. Push the “LOCK” or “UNLOCK” button on the wireless
remote control key for about one second with the “SET”
button held down.
1. Keep the wireless remote control key in possession,
select a button in which you want to record the ID of the
key from buttons “1”, “2” and “3” and push it.
When the previous key ID memory is erased, two beeps
sound.
2. Push the “LOCK” or “UNLOCK” button on the wireless
remote control key for about one second with button “1”,
“2” or “3” held down.
222
When the registration is completed, one beep sounds. If the
key has already been registered, the previous memory will be
erased. If the same driving position profile for the same key is
registered in another button, that memory will also be erased.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
REAR SEAT POSITION MEMORY
SYSTEM
Recalling the memorized position
A microcomputer will memorize the position of the rear seats
and the height of the rear head restraints.
Recording the rear seat position in the computer’s memory can
only be done when the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
16L302a
Setting the rear seat position
16L301a
Keep pressing the “M” button until a beep sounds; the
rear seat and rear head restraint positions will be
automatically adjusted to the memorized position.
If the “M” switch is pushed while the memorized position profile
is being activated, the operation will stop.
Do not place anything under the rear seat as this might
interfere with seat movement.
1. Adjust the rear seat position and the height of the head
restraint of the rear seat to the desired position.
2. Keep pushing the “SET” button until a beep sounds.
The beep sound means that the position has been memorized.
The memory will be erased when the battery is removed for
inspection or service.
223
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Door opening linked seat sliding function
The rear seat automatically moves backward when the
rear door is opened if the seat is adjusted to a forward
position.
The ignition switch must be in the “ON” position.
This function is actuated when the selector lever is set in the
“P” position or if the vehicle is stopped with the brake pedal
depressed.
While the seat is being moved by this function, the operation
will not stop even if the door is closed midway.
16L328a
To cancel this function, push the “C” button.
The indicator light comes on.
224
To reactivate the function once again, push the “C”
button.
The indicator light goes off.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
225
SECTION
1–7
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Steering wheel and mirrors
Tilt and telescopic steering wheell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outside rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inside rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
226
227
229
233
234
STEERING WHEEL AND MIRRORS
TILT AND TELESCOPIC STEERING
WHEEL
Adjustment of telescopic steering column
Adjustment of steering wheel tilt
16L647
16L646
To adjust the steering column length, push the control
switch forward or backward to set the steering wheel to
the desired position.
To adjust the tilt of the steering wheel, push the control
switch upward or downward to set it to the desired
position.
CAUTION
CAUTION
Do not adjust the steering column while the vehicle is
moving. Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle
the vehicle and an accident may occur resulting in death
or serious injuries.
Do not adjust the steering wheel while the vehicle is
moving. Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle
the vehicle and an accident may occur resulting in death
or serious injuries.
227
STEERING WHEEL AND MIRRORS
Auto tilt away*
When the key is inserted into the ignition:
In case of the smart key system:
16L644
When the smart key system is used, turning the ignition
switch 1 to the “LOCK” position moves the steering
column forward away from the driver and also tilts it up for
easy exit and entry.
When you push in the ignition switch, the steering column
returns to the previously set position.
NOTE:
* This feature can be deactivated.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
228
16L715
When you remove the smart key 2 or ignition key 3 ,
the steering column moves forward away from the driver
and also tilts up for easy exit and entry.
When you insert the key in the ignition switch, the steering
column returns to the previously set position.
NOTE:
* This feature can be deactivated.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
STEERING WHEEL AND MIRRORS
OUTSIDE REAR VIEW MIRRORS
16L282
When you push the rear window and outside rear view mirror
defogger switch or operate the wipers, the heater panels in the
outside rear view mirrors will quickly clear the mirror surface.
(See “Windshield wiper and washer switch” on page 58 and
“Rear window and outside rear view mirror defogger switch” on
page 63.)
CAUTION
Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is moving.
Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the
vehicle and an accident may occur resulting in death
or serious injuries.
Adjust the mirror so that you can just see the side of your
vehicle in the mirror.
Be careful when judging the size or distance of any object seen
in the outside rear view mirror on the passenger’s side
because it is a convex mirror. Any object seen in a convex
mirror will look smaller and farther away than if seen in a normal
flat mirror.
Since the mirror surfaces can get hot, do not touch
them when the rear window and outside rear view
mirror defogger switch is on.
When the inside rear view mirror darkens in “AUTO” mode, the
outside rear view mirrors also darken to reduce the reflection
of the headlights of the following vehicle. For details, see
“Inside rear view mirror” on page 233.
229
STEERING WHEEL AND MIRRORS
Power rear view mirror control
When you are backing up, you can adjust the mirrors
down quickly by the following operations with the ignition
ON.
Put the selector lever in the “R” position.
Place the master switch at “L” (left) or “R” (right).
16L641
The mirrors return to the previous position by any of the
following operations.
Put the selector lever in a position other than “R”.
Place the master switch in the neutral position.
Turn the ignition switch to the “ACC” position.
1 Master switch
2 Control switch
To adjust the power rear view mirror, first place the master
switch at “L” (left) or “R” (right), and push the control
switch on the desired side.
The power rear view mirrors can be adjusted when the ignition
switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
230
NOTICE
If ice should jam the mirror, do not operate the control
or scrape the mirror face. Use a spray de-icer to free the
mirror.
STEERING WHEEL AND MIRRORS
Folding and extending automatic rear view
mirrors
16L642
Folding rear view mirrors
16L643
With the rear view mirror folding switch in the “AUTO”
position:
To fold the mirrors, push the switch on the right side. To
extend the rear view mirrors, push the switch on the left
side.
When you turn the ignition switch to “ACC” or “ON” position,
the folded rear view mirrors are automatically extended.
The rear view mirrors can be folded backward for parking in
compact areas.
When you turn the ignition switch to “LOCK” position, the
rear view mirrors are automatically folded.
CAUTION
The rear view mirrors can be folded or extended manually.
CAUTION
To avoid personal injury and mirror malfunction, do
not touch the mirror while it is moving.
To avoid personal injury and any mirror malfunction,
do not touch the mirror while it is moving.
Do not drive with the mirrors folded backward. Both
the driver and passenger side rear view mirrors must
be extended and properly adjusted before driving.
Do not drive with the mirrors folded backward. Both
the driver and passenger side rear view mirrors must
be extended and properly adjusted before driving.
231
STEERING WHEEL AND MIRRORS
Outer foot lights
The outer foot lights go off 15 seconds after the lights come on
or when:
the lock switch on the outside door handle is pushed,
the doors are locked with the wireless remote control
function key,
16L659
the doors are locked by inserting a key into the door
keyhole,
the doors are locked with the power door lock switch on the
driver’s side, or
the selector lever is moved out of “P” position with the
ignition on.
The outer foot lights illuminate the ground near the doors
for about 15 seconds to ensure safe footing for the driver
and passengers who are about to get in the vehicle.*
The outer foot lights come on when:
you are getting closer to the vehicle carrying a smart key
and you enter the effective range of the smart key system
(about 1 m (3 ft) from each outside door handle),
the doors are unlocked with the wireless remote control
function key, or
the doors are unlocked with the power door lock switch on
the driver’s side.
232
NOTE:
* The outer foot lights illuminating time can be changed.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
STEERING WHEEL AND MIRRORS
INSIDE REAR VIEW MIRROR
When the outside air temperature is low, it may take a little
longer for the mirror to darken in response to the detection of
headlights.
CAUTION
16L286
Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is moving.
Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle
and an accident may occur resulting in death or serious
injuries.
Adjust the mirror so that you can just see the rear of your
vehicle in the mirror.
Pushing the switch changes the mode between “AUTO”
and “DAY”.
The indicator comes on when the “AUTO” mode is selected.
“DAY” mode: The mirror surface is normal.
“AUTO” mode: If the mirror detects light from the
headlights of the vehicle behind you, the mirror surface
darkens slightly to reduce the reflected light.
When the inside rear view mirror surface changes, the outside
rear view mirror surfaces will also become darker.
When the ignition switch is turned on, the inside rear view
mirror always turns on in the “AUTO” mode.
233
STEERING WHEEL AND MIRRORS
VANITY MIRRORS
Front
16L784
14L206
To ensure correct functioning of anti-glare mirror sensors
located on both sides of the mirror, do not touch or cover
the sensors with your finger or a piece of cloth, etc.
To use the front vanity mirrors, swing the sun visor down
and open the cover.
The vanity light comes on when you open the cover. However
if the sun visor is not hooked securely, the light may not come
on.
234
STEERING WHEEL AND MIRRORS
Rear
14L228a
To use the rear vanity mirrors, open the cover.
The vanity light comes on when you open the cover.
NOTICE
Keep the rear vanity mirrors closed when not in use.
Otherwise you may hit your head on the mirror when
you get in or out of the vehicle.
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not
leave the cover open for a long time while the engine
is stopped.
235
SECTION
2–1
AIR CONDITIONING AND AUDIO
Air conditioning
Automatic air conditioning controls
(Vehicles with rear air conditioning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Automatic air conditioning controls
(Vehicles without rear air conditioning) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Rear air conditioning controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
For
vehicles
please
refer
236
equipped
with
to
the
separate
Owner’s Manual”.
Navigation
“Navigation
System,
System
AIR CONDITIONING
AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONING CONTROLS
(Vehicles with Rear Air Conditioning)
21L188
For rear air conditioning operation, see “Rear air conditioning controls” on page 253
237
AIR CONDITIONING
The automatic air conditioning automatically maintains
the set temperature.
1
Temperature selector
(with the “DUAL” button on; for driver and rear
passengers)
(with the “DUAL” button off; for driver and all
passengers)
2
Passenger side temperature control button
3
Front windshield button
4
Driver side temperature display
(in degrees Fahrenheit or Centigrade)
5
Air intake control button
6
Fan speed display
7
Air flow display
8
Passenger side temperature display
(in degrees Fahrenheit or Centigrade)
9
Center vent vane swing button
10
Air conditioning on-off button
11
Air flow control button
12
Fan speed control button
13
OFF button
14
Automatic control button
15
Separate/dual control button
This air conditioning features automatic fan speed and air flow
control which automatically selects the most suitable fan
speed and air flow to control the temperature.
The ignition switch must be in the “ON” position.
NOTICE
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not
leave the air conditioning on longer than necessary
when the engine is not running.
238
AIR CONDITIONING
AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONING CONTROLS
(Vehicles without Rear Air Conditioning)
21L189
239
AIR CONDITIONING
The automatic air conditioning automatically maintains
the set temperature.
1
Temperature selector
(with the “DUAL” button on; for driver and rear
passengers)
(with the “DUAL” button off; for driver and all
passengers)
2
Passenger side temperature control button
3
Front windshield button
4
Driver side temperature display
(in degrees Fahrenheit or Centigrade)
5
Fan speed display
6
Air flow display
7
Air intake control button
8
Passenger side temperature display
(in degrees Fahrenheit or Centigrade)
9
Center vent vane swing button
10
Air conditioning on-off button
11
Air flow control button
12
Fan speed control button
13
OFF button
14
Automatic control button
15
Separate/dual control button
This air conditioning features automatic fan speed and air flow
control which automatically selects the most suitable fan
speed and air flow to control the temperature.
The ignition switch must be in the “ON” position.
NOTICE
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not
leave the air conditioning on longer than necessary
when the engine is not running.
240
AIR CONDITIONING
21L190a
Air flow selection
Automatic air flow mode only
241
AIR CONDITIONING
(a) Climate control
SETTING OPERATION - automatic control
21L055b
21L054a
2. Use the “TEMP” or “PASSENGER TEMP” button to set
the desired temperature.
1. Push the “AUTO” button.
Air flow quantity, switching of the diffusers, on-off of the air
conditioning, and switching of the air intake between
RECIRCULATED AIR and OUTSIDE AIR are automatically
adjusted. If you use the air purifier automatic mode at the same
time, air purifying effect will be enhanced (If equipped). The
operation status is shown by each indicator.
When one of the manual control buttons is depressed while
operating in automatic mode, the mode relevant to the
depressed button is set. Other conditions continue to be
adjusted automatically.
Push the “OFF” button briefly to turn the air conditioning off.
If you keep the “OFF” button pushed, the data for the air filter
is reset.
242
The “TEMP” or “PASSENGER TEMP” button is used to set the
desired temperature. The temperature will be controlled on the
driver and front and rear passenger sides (if rear air
conditioning is equipped) simultaneously or individually. The
figures on the panel indicate degrees Fahrenheit or
Centigrade.
“TEMP” button - Changes the temperature on the driver and
front and rear passenger sides (if rear air conditioning is
equipped) simultaneously or individually.
“PASSENGER TEMP” button - Changes the temperature
settings separate from the driver side.
“DUAL” button - Changes the mode of the temperature
setting.
AIR CONDITIONING
The indicator on the “DUAL” button has two modes:
With the indicator on - For individual temperature setting
With the indicator off - For simultaneous temperature
setting
21L191
Driver side setting
Passenger side setting
Mixed setting
243
AIR CONDITIONING
SETTING OPERATION - manual control
When one of the manual control buttons is depressed
while operating in automatic mode, the mode relevant to
the depressed button is set. Other conditions continue to
be adjusted automatically.
If manual air flow selection is desired -
Take in the fresh air by selecting the OUTSIDE AIR mode with
the air intake control button.
If quick heating or cooling is desired Push the “TEMP” or “PASSENGER TEMP” button on either
side and hold it until “MAX. HOT” or “MAX. COLD” appears on
the display.
If manual fan speed control is desired -
21L066
The outlets from which air is delivered can be selected
manually by pushing the button. The function of each mode is
as follows:
244
1
Panel - Air flows mainly from the instrument panel vents
and rear vents.
2
Bi- level - Air flows from both the floor vents, the
instrument panel vents and rear vents.
3
Floor - Air flows mainly from the floor vents and rear
vents.
4
Floor/Windshield - Air flows mainly from the floor vents
and windshield vents.
21L059
1 Fan speed at low
2 Fan speed at high
The fan speed can be set to your desired speed by pushing the
appropriate side of fan speed control button. The higher the
fan speed is, the more air is delivered. Pushing the “OFF”
button briefly turns off the fan.
To remove exterior windshield frost, use the high speed
setting.
AIR CONDITIONING
If manual switching of air intake is desired -
21L060a
Each time you push the air intake control button, the mode
changes in order from the RECIRCULATED AIR mode to
AUTOMATIC mode to OUTSIDE AIR mode, then back to the
RECIRCULATED AIR mode. Each indicator light shows which
mode is now selected.
1
RECIRCULATED mode - If quick circulation of cooled air
is desired, select this mode.
2
EXHAUST GAS AUTOMATIC mode - If the outside air
contains harmful substances like exhaust gas (i.e., when
the vehicle running just in front of your vehicle accelerates
rapidly), the system changes automatically from the
OUTSIDE AIR mode (with indicators 2 and 3 on) to
the RECIRCULATED mode (with indicators 1 and 2
on). If you use the EXHAUST GAS AUTOMATIC mode
and the air purifier automatic mode at the same time, air
purifying effect will be enhanced (If equipped).
3
OUTSIDE AIR mode - The system will take fresh outside
air into the vehicle.
Vehicles with rear air conditioning
21L156
Vehicles without rear air conditioning
Turning off the air conditioning manually will cancel the
EXHAUST GAS AUTOMATIC mode. If you select the “AUTO”
mode during fan operating, the air conditioning turns on and
the EXHAUST GAS AUTOMATIC mode will operate.
For normal use, it is best to keep the air intake control button
set to OUTSIDE AIR mode. If recirculated air is used during
heating, the windows will fog up more easily.
To change the sensitivity of the sensor switching between
the RECIRCULATED and OUTSIDE AIR in the AUTOMATIC
mode, push the air intake control button until you hear a
beep. The display changes as illustrated below.
245
AIR CONDITIONING
The sensitivity of the sensor can be adjusted only while the
vehicle has stopped.
21L108
When you push either side of the “TEMP” button several times,
the sensitivity changes from “+3” down to “–3”. If you do not
operate any button for a few seconds, the previous display
returns.
If manual on-off of the air conditioning is desired Push the “A/C” button to turn the air conditioning on and push
it again to turn the air conditioning off. If you turn off the air
conditioning manually, the EXHAUST GAS AUTOMATIC
mode will be cancelled.
If the outside temperature is lowered down to around 0C
(32F), the air conditioning will turn off automatically. At this
time, the indicator on the A/C button is off and the EXHAUST
GAS AUTOMATIC indicator light remains on. However, the
EXHAUST GAS AUTOMATIC mode does not operate. When
the air conditioning turns on as with the raised temperature, the
EXHAUST GAS AUTOMATIC mode resumes.
246
If the system is used for ventilation, heating in dry weather or
removing frost or exterior fog on the windshield, turn the air
conditioning off once it is no longer required. This will improve
fuel economy. The air conditioning can be used for year-round
automatic temperature control including cooling and
dehumidifying operation.
If the air conditioning compressor does not operate, the
indicator of the “A/C” button will blink. If the indicator of the
“A/C” button blinks even when the “A/C” button is pushed
again, have the compressor checked by your nearest Lexus
dealer.
AIR CONDITIONING
(b) Windshield defogging and defrosting
If you push the “FRONT WINDSHIELD” button once again
while in the FRONT WINDSHIELD mode, the mode then
returns to the last mode used.
CAUTION
21L068a
To remove interior fog on the windshield Push the “FRONT WINDSHIELD” button.
To remove frost or exterior fog on the windshield 1. Place the temperature control button at the maximum
temperature.
Do not use the “FRONT WINDSHIELD” button during
cooled air operation in extremely humid weather. The
difference between the temperature of the outside air
and that of the windshield could cause the outer surface
of the windshield to fog up blocking your vision.
When you turn the ignition switch on after the removal and
installation of the battery terminal, the indicator light may flash
and the operating sound of the motor may be heard. This does
not indicate a malfunction.
You may hear the operating sound of the motor about 70
seconds after the ignition switch is turned off. This does not
indicate a malfunction.
2. Push the “FRONT WINDSHIELD” button.
3. Push the fan speed control button on the right side to obtain
a maximum air flow.
4. Leave the “A/C” button off.
When the “FRONT WINDSHIELD” button is pushed while
operating in automatic mode, the air conditioning is set to
operate and the OUTSIDE AIR mode is set.
247
AIR CONDITIONING
(c) Replacing the air conditioning filter
21L204
21L203
1 Partition
The air conditioning filter is behind the glove box.
2. Open the glove box and remove the partition.
The air conditioning filter prevents dust from entering the
vehicle through the air conditioning vent.
If the “Change A/C Filter” appears on the multi-information
display, change the air conditioning filter as soon as possible
because the air filter might have clogged.
21L205
The filter may clog after long use which will reduce the air flow.
1. When you replace the filter, be sure to turn off the fan.
1 Cover
2 Levers
3. Push the levers and remove the cover.
248
AIR CONDITIONING
21L206
1 Filter cover
2 Levers
4. Push up the levers and remove the filter cover.
21L208
1 Filter
2 Filter case
6. Take the filter out of the filter case and replace it with a
new one.
NOTICE
21L207
When installing, the UP marks shown on the filter and
filter case should be noted and fitted as shown.
7. Install it in the reverse order of removal.
1 Filter case
5. Pull the filter case toward you.
249
AIR CONDITIONING
21L209
1 Tabs
2 Filter cover
3 Levers
8. When installing the filter cover, insert the 3 upper tabs
and then 2 lower levers.
21L201
9. After the replacement, push and hold the “OFF” button
for the front air conditioning for more than 4 seconds to
reset the air filter clogging data. The “A/C Filter Reset”
appears on the multi- information display and a tone
sounds to inform you that the data has been reset.
NOTICE
The filter should be installed properly in position. The
use of air conditioning with the filter removed may
cause the malfunction of the air conditioning system.
250
AIR CONDITIONING
(d) Operating tips
Center vents
Make sure the air inlet grilles in front of the windshield are
not blocked by leaves or other obstructions.
If air flow control is not satisfactory, check the dashboard
vents. (See “Center vents”, “Side vents” and “Rear vents”.)
To help cool down the interior after parking in the hot sun,
drive for the first few minutes with the windows open. After
the excess heat has blown away, close the windows.
When driving on dusty roads, close all windows. If dust
thrown up by the vehicle is still drawn into the vehicle after
closing the windows, it is recommended that the air intake
control button be left to the OUTSIDE AIR mode and the fan
speed control button be pressed to anywhere except the
“OFF” button.
If following another vehicle on a dusty road, or driving in
windy and dusty conditions, it is recommended that the air
intake control button be temporarily pressed in to the
RECIRCULATED AIR mode, which will close off the outside
passage and prevent outside air and dust from entering the
vehicle interior.
21L064a
The center vents may be opened or closed as shown.
21L057b
Push the swing button to swing the vanes.
The vanes directly aimed at the driver and front passenger will
swing wider as the room temperature nears the desired
temperature. The swinging angle will also change from narrow
to wide depending on the room temperature.
251
AIR CONDITIONING
Side vents
21L058a
21L065
When you push the swing button with no passenger in the
front seat and the “DUAL” button ON (with the indicator
on):
The vanes directly aimed at the driver and rear passenger will
swing wider as the room temperature nears the desired
temperature. The swinging angle will also change from narrow
to wide depending on the room temperature.
When you push the swing button with no passenger on
the front seat and “DUAL” button OFF (with the indicator
off):
The vanes directly aimed at the driver will swing wider as the
room temperature nears the desired temperature. The
swinging angle will also change from narrow to wide
depending on the room temperature.
252
The side vents may be opened or closed as shown.
AIR CONDITIONING
Rear vents
REAR AIR CONDITIONING
CONTROLS
21L015a
21L194
The rear vents may be opened or closed as shown.
1 Rear air vent 2 Auto button
4 LO HI A/C button
3 Off button
253
AIR CONDITIONING
These are the controls added to the front air conditioning when
your vehicle is equipped with a rear air conditioning. The
controls for the rear passengers and for the front passengers
both work the same, so operation can be made with the
controls on either panel.
(a) Controls and Functions
This rear air conditioning is equipped with dustproof and
deodorant filter with photocatalyst. When light in the
xenon tube (ultraviolet rays) hits the filter, odious
ingredients adsorbed in the filter are oxidized and
decomposed to deliver clean air in the interior.
REAR AIR CONDITIONING ON-OFF Push the “AUTO” button to turn the air conditioning on,
and push the “OFF” button to turn it off.
AIR FLOW CONTROL The mode changes every time the “LO HI A/C” button is
pushed.
AUTO mode - Turns the fan operation to automatic.
LO speed mode - Turns the fan at low speed.
HI speed mode - Turns the fan at high speed.
254
(b) Rear Cooling
1. Turn the front air conditioning on. The rear cooler will not
turn on if the front air conditioning is off.
2. Turn the rear air conditioning on. The fan speed and rear
cooler are adjusted automatically.
3. Use either of the “LO HI A/C” buttons to adjust the desired
fan speed and the rear cooler. Each indicator light shows
which mode is now selected.
(c) Air Purification
The air purifier operates whenever the rear air conditioning or
the rear fan operation is on, regardless of front air conditioning
activation.
AIR CONDITIONING
(d) Replacing the photocatalyst filter for the
rear seats
This rear air conditioning is equipped with dustproof and
deodorant filter with photocatalyst.
21L211
Replace the air filter when the use of rear air conditioning or air
purification function reduces air flow or deodorant
performance.
This filter is an interchangeable type. Do not clean the filter by
washing or air blowing. The use of filter after washing or
cleaning may cause a malfunction of the system. Be sure to
replace it with a new one.
1 Filter case
The filter is located in the trunk.
3. Pull out the filter case toward you.
Replace the filter using the following procedures.
4. Replace the filter.
1. Be sure to turn the ignition switch to “LOCK”.
When you install the filter, face the filter surface (gray)
downward and fit the filter folds properly in the case as shown.
2 Filter
5. Install the filter in the reverse order of removal.
21L210
1 Air purifier
The gray surface in the filter may turn to yellow (yellow spots)
because of ultraviolet rays included in the light, however it is
no problem for use.
2 Filter cover
2. Open the trunk and remove the filter cover in the trunk.
255
AIR CONDITIONING
When the ignition switch is turned on, the xenon tube comes
on even if the rear air conditioning or rear fan is not operating.
This does not indicate a malfunction but is required for the long
use of the photocatalyst.
NOTICE
Do not look into the xenon tube in the air purifier
through the filter slot and do not expose your skin
directly to the light in the xenon tube also. Although
the xenon tube scarcely issues less than 300nm
ultraviolet rays which are thought harmful for the
human body, some people may have symptoms such
as eye sore, vision trouble, skin inflammation, etc.
Do not disassemble the air purifier, or it may cause a
malfunction. As some part in the purifier is under
high voltage, you may get an electric shock when you
touch it.
The filters should be installed properly in position.
The use of rear air conditioning controls with the filter
removed may cause the malfunction of the rear air
conditioning controls.
Turn on the air conditioning with a filter in position.
The activation without an filter may not only cause a
malfunction of the system but also dirty the interior
by spouting dust.
256
AIR CONDITIONING
257
SECTION
2–2
AIR CONDITIONING AND AUDIO
Audio
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
For
vehicles
please
refer
258
equipped
with
to
the
separate
Owner’s Manual”.
Navigation
“Navigation
System,
System
AUDIO
AUDIO SYSTEM
Quick reference for your audio system
20L354a
If a Mark Levinson brand audio system is installed, the “Mark Levinson” logo is shown on the panel.
259
AUDIO
1
Turning the system on and adjusting the volume
(See page 261 for details.)
2 Stopping and ejecting a cassette tape
(See page 278 for details.)
3 Function buttons
1 - 6: Station selector buttons
(See page 267 for details.)
SCAN: Scan tuning
(See page 268 for details.)
4 Display of functions in TAPE or CD mode
: Side change
(See page 279 for details.)
: DOLBY NR
(See page 278 for details.)
: Rewinding or reversing
(See page 279 or 284 for details.)
: Fast forwarding
(See page 279 or 284 for details.)
RPT: Automatic repeat
(See page 279 or 284 for details.)
SKIP: Automatic skip of blank portions of tape
(See page 279 for details.)
: Disc selection
(See page 283 for details.)
RAND:Random access
(See page 285 for details.)
260
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Radio text
(See page 270 for details.)
Radio mode:
Frequency tuning
(See page 266 or 268 for details.)
TAPE mode:
Direct access to a desired program
(See page 280 for details.)
DISC mode:
Direct access to a desired program
(See page 284 for details.)
Cassette tape slot
(See page 278 for details.)
Tone and balance knobs
(See page 262 for details.)
Program type/Traffic program
(See page 269 for details.)
Mode selectors
(See page 261 for details.)
Compact disc load button
(See page 281 for details.)
Compact disc slot
(See page 281 for details.)
Ejecting a compact disc
(See page 282 for details.)
Automatic sound levelizer/Positioning selector
(See page 263 for details.)
AUDIO
Using your audio system: some basics
This section describes some of the basic features of the Lexus
audio system. Some information may not pertain to your
system.
Your audio system works when the ignition switch is in the
“ACC” or “ON” position.
20L356
NOTICE
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not
leave the car audio on longer than necessary when the
engine is not running.
(a) Turning the system on and off
Push the “AM·SAT”, “FM”, “TAPE” or “DISC” to turn on
that mode. The selected mode turns on directly.
Push these buttons if you want to switch from one mode to
another.
If the tape or disc is not set, the cassette player or compact disc
player does not turn on.
20L355
You can turn off the cassette player by ejecting the cassette
tape. If the audio system was previously off, then the entire
audio system will be turned off when you eject the cassette
tape. If another function was previously playing, it will come on
again.
Push this knob to turn the audio system on and off. Turn
this knob to adjust the volume.
The system turns on in the last mode used.
261
AUDIO
20L344
In the “TAPE” or “CD” mode, the applicable functions are
shown in the lowest part of the display. Push the switch
just below to turn on each function.
(b) Tone and balance
How good an audio program sounds to you is largely
determined by the mix of the treble, mid-range, and bass
levels. In fact, different kinds of music and vocal programs
usually sound better with different mixes of treble, mid-range,
and bass.
A good balance of the left and right stereo channels and of the
front and rear sound levels is also important.
Keep in mind that if you are listening to a stereo recording or
broadcast, changing the right/left balance will increase the
volume of one group of sounds while decreasing the volume
of another.
262
20L357
“BALANCE” knob: Use this knob to adjust the sound
balance between the right and left speakers.
“FADER” knob: Use this knob to adjust the sound balance
between the front and rear speakers.
“BASS” knob: Use this knob to adjust low-pitched tones.
“MID” knob: Use this knob to adjust mid-pitched tones.
“TREBLE” knob: Use this knob to adjust high-pitched tones.
AUDIO
Positioning selector
(c) DSP Control
Automatic sound levelizer
20L358
When the audio sound becomes difficult to be heard due to
road noise, wind noise, etc. during driving, push the “ASL”
button. The system adjusts to the optimum volume and tone
quality according to the noise level. While the automatic sound
levelizer is on, “ASL” appears on the display.
20L359a
By selecting the listening position, the system controls the
output timing of the speakers to allow sound to be heard
evenly, creating the ideal music environment.
Each time you push the “POS” button, the position changes as
in the following and the letter displays for 6 seconds on the
screen.
ALL
DRIVER
FRONT
REAR
263
AUDIO
(d) Your radio antenna
(f) Your automatic changer
The wire antenna is mounted inside the rear window.
NOTICE
When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be
careful not to scratch or damage the wire antenna.
Putting a window tint (especially, conductive or
metallic type) on the rear window may affect the
reception of radio or mobile telephone. For the
installation of the window tint, consult with your
Lexus dealer.
(e) Your cassette player
When you insert a cassette, the exposed tape should be to the
right.
NOTICE
Do not oil any part of the cassette player, and do not
insert anything except a cassette tape into the slot.
264
20L360a
To use the automatic changer, push the panel.
AUDIO
20L361a
NOTICE
Do not put any object on the panel or push it hard. Doing
this may damage the panel.
20L362a
Your automatic changer can store up to 6 discs and play
selected discs or continuously play all the discs set in the
player.
When you set discs into the player, make sure their labels face
up. If not, the player will display “ERROR1” and the disc
number.
NOTICE
Never try to disassemble or oil any part of the
compact disc player. Do not insert anything except
a compact disc into the slot.
Do not insert a disc upon another one, or it will
damage the automatic changer. Insert only one disc
into the slot at a time.
265
AUDIO
The following products may not be playable on your
compact disc player.
Copy-protected CD
CD-R (CD-Recordable)
CD-R W (CD-Re-writable)
CD-ROM
Your compact disc player is intended for use with 12 cm (4.7
in.) discs only.
Radio operation
(a) Listening to the radio
20L363
Push these buttons to choose either an AM or FM station.
“AM”, “FM1”, “FM2” or “FM TYPE” appears on the display.
If your vehicle is equipped with satellite radio broadcast
system, when you push the “AM·SAT” button, “AM”,
“SAT1”, “SAT2” or “SAT3” station appears on the display. For
details about satellite radio broadcast, see “Radio operation
(XM satellite radio broadcast)” on page 271
266
AUDIO
(b) Presetting a station
20L128
Push this button on the upper side to step up the station
band or on the lower side to step down.
Your radio automatically changes to stereo reception when a
stereo broadcast is received. “ST” appears on the display. If
the signal becomes weak, the radio reduces the amount of
channel separation to prevent the weak signal from creating
noise. If the signal becomes extremely weak, the radio
switches from stereo to mono reception. In this case, “ST”
disappears from the display.
20L129
1. Tune in the desired station.
2. Push one of the station selector buttons ( 1-6 ) and hold
it until a beep is heard. This sets the station to the button
and the button number ( 1-6 ) appears on the display.
Each button can store one AM station and two FM stations. To
change the preset station to a different one, follow the same
procedure.
The preset station memory is cancelled when the power
source is interrupted by battery disconnection or a blown fuse.
267
AUDIO
(c) Selecting a station
Tune in the desired station using one of the following methods.
20L139a
20L130a
Preset tuning: Push the button ( 1-6 ) for the station you want.
The button number ( 1-6 ) and station frequency appear on the
display.
Manual tuning: Push the “TUNE SEEK” button briefly. Each
time you push the button, the radio will step up or down to
another frequency.
Seek tuning: Push the “TUNE SEEK” button and hold it until
you hear a beep. The radio will begin seeking up or down for
a station of the nearest frequency and will stop on reception.
Each time you push the button, the stations will be searched
automatically one after another.
268
To scan all the frequencies: Push the “SCAN” button briefly.
“SCAN” appears on the display. The radio will find the next
station up the band, stay there for a few seconds, and then
scan again. To select a station, push the “SCAN” button a
second time.
To scan the preset stations: Push the “SCAN” button and
hold it until you hear a beep. “P.SCAN” appears on the display.
The radio will tune in the next preset station up the band, stay
there for a few seconds, and then move to the next preset
station. To select a station, push the “SCAN” button a second
time.
AUDIO
(d) RDS (Radio Data System)
MISC
ALERT (Emergency message)
While you are listening to a program type, you can operate the
“TUNE SEEK” or “SCAN” function.
20L364
20L406
Program type:
When you push the TYPE “ ” or “ ” button, the current
program type receiving from the RDS station appears on the
display.
If the radio receives no RDS stations, “NO PTY” appears on the
display.
Push the “TUNE SEEK” or “SCAN” button. The radio seeks or
scans the station in the relevant program type. (See page 268
for details.)
Each time you push the TYPE “ ” or “ ” button, the program
type changes as in the following:
ROCK
EASY LIS (Easy listening)
CLS/JAZZ (Classical music and jazz)
R&B (Rhythm and Blues)
INFORM (Information)
RELIGION
269
AUDIO
Traffic program: A station that regularly broadcasts
traffic information is automatically located.
Radio text:
When you push the “TRAF” button, “TRAF SEEK” appears on
the display and the radio will start seeking any traffic program
station.
If no traffic program station is found, “NO TRAF INFO” appears
on the display for a few seconds and the display returns to the
previous mode.
20L177a
If the radio receives radio text, “MSG” appears on the display.
When you push the “MSG” button, a message is displayed.
In case a message is more than a line, hold the “MSG” button.
The rest of the message is displayed.
When the system can show the station name, “RDS” appears
on the display. Each time you push the “MSG” button, the
indication changes from the band to the station name to radio
text in this order. After six seconds, the indication returns to the
band.
270
AUDIO
Radio operation (XM satellite radio broadcast)
Satellite tuner technology notice:
To listen to a satellite radio broadcast in your vehicle, an
additional genuine Toyota satellite receiver and antenna (or
equivalents) must be purchased and installed. A subscription
to the XM satellite radio service is also necessary.
Toyota’s satellite radio tuners are awarded Type Approval
Certificates from XM Satellite Radio Inc. on “March 10, 2003”
and “April 15, 2003” as proof of compatibility with the services
offered by the XM satellite radio.
(a) How to subscribe to an XM satellite radio
(b) Displaying the radio ID
An XM satellite radio is a tuner designed exclusively to receive
broadcasts provided under a separate subscription.
Availability is limited to the 48 contiguous states.
Each XM tuner is identified with a unique radio ID. You will
need the radio ID when activating XM service or when
reporting a problem.
How to subscribe:
If you select the “CH 000” using the “TUNE” button, the ID code
of 8 alphanumeric characters appears. If you select another
channel, display of the ID code is canceled. The channel (000)
alternates the display between the radio ID and the specific
radio ID code.
You must enter into a separate service agreement with the XM
radio in order to receive satellite broadcast programming in the
vehicle. Additional activation and service subscription fees
apply that are not included in the purchase price of the vehicle
and optional digital satellite tuner. For complete information on
subscription rates and terms, or to subscribe to the XM radio,
visit XM on the web at www.xmradio.com or call an XM’s
Listener Care at (800) 852-9696. The XM radio is solely
responsible for the quality, availability and content of the
satellite radio services provided, which are subject to the terms
and conditions of the XM radio customer service agreement.
Customers should have their radio ID ready; the radio ID can
be found by tuning to “channel 000” on the radio. For details,
see “Displaying the radio ID” below.
All fees and programming are the responsibility of the XM
satellite radio and are subject to change.
271
AUDIO
(c) Listening to the satellite radio
20L469
20L471a
Push this button to select the next or previous channel.
Push the “AM·SAT” button to choose a SAT station.
Besides “AM”, “SAT1”, “SAT2” or “SAT3” appears on the
display.
272
If you push and hold the button, you can rapidly scroll forward
or down through the channels. When displaying the channel
category by the “TYPE” button, pushing the “TUNE SEEK”
button lets you select the next or previous channel within the
currently selected type.
AUDIO
(d) Presetting a channel
(e) Selecting a channel
Tune in the desired channel using one of the following
methods.
20L472
20L473
1. Tune in the desired channel.
2. Push one of the channel selector buttons ( 1-6 ) and
hold it until a beep is heard. This sets the channel to the
button and the button number ( 1- 6 ) appears on the
display.
Preset tuning: Push the button ( 1-6 ) for the channel you
want. The button number ( 1-6 ) and channel number appear
on the display.
Each button can store three SAT channels. To change the
preset channel to a different one, follow the same procedure.
The preset channel memory is cancelled when the power
source is interrupted by battery disconnection or a blown fuse.
273
AUDIO
(f) Channel category
20L139a
To scan the currently selected channel category : Push the
“SCAN” button briefly. “SCAN” appears on the display. The
radio will find the next channel in the same channel category
up the band, stay there for a few seconds, and then scan again.
To select a channel, push the “SCAN” button a second time.
To scan the preset channels: Push the “SCAN” button and
hold it until you hear a beep. “P.SCAN” appears on the display.
The radio will tune in the next preset channel , stay there for a
few seconds, and then move to the next preset channel. To
select a channel, push the “SCAN” button a second time.
274
20L364
When you push the TYPE “ ” or “ ” button, the current
channel category appears on the display.
When the channel category appears, push either “ ” or “ ”
button to switch to the next or previous category.
AUDIO
(g) Displaying the title and name
20L474
When you push the “MSG” button, the display changes as
follows:
CH NAME ⇒ TITLE (SONG/PROGRAM TITLE) ⇒ NAME
(ARTIST NAME/FEATURE) ⇒ CH NUMBER ⇒ CH NAME
Up to 10 alphanumeric characters can be displayed. (Some
information will not be fully displayed.)
275
AUDIO
(h) If the satellite radio tuner malfunctions
When problems occur with the XM tuner, a message will appear on the display. Referring to the table below to identify the problem,
take the suggested corrective action.
The XM antenna is not connected. Check whether the XM antenna cable is attached securely.
ANTENNA
UPDATING
NO SIGNAL
A short-circuit occurs in the antenna or the surrounding antenna cable. See a Lexus certified
dealer.
You have not subscribed to the XM satellite radio. The radio is being updated with the latest
encryption code. Contact the XM satellite radio for subscription information. When a contact is
canceled, you can choose the “CH000” and all free-to-air channels.
The premium channel you selected is not authorized. Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio
returns to the previous channel or “CH001”. If it does not change automatically, select another
channel. If you want to listen to the premium channel, contact the XM satellite radio.
The XM signal is too weak at the current location. Wait until your vehicle reaches a location
with a stronger signal.
LOADING
The unit is acquiring audio or program information. Wait until the unit has received the information.
OFF AIR
The channel you selected is not broadcasting any programming. Select another channel.
-----
There is no song/program title or artist name/feature associated with the channel at that time.
No action needed.
---
The channel you selected is no longer available. Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “CH001”. If it does not change automatically, select another
channel.
The XM Listener Care Center is also available on the phone, please call (800) 852-9696 during the following hours:
Monday – Saturday: 7 a.m. – 1 a.m. Sunday: 12 p.m – 12 a.m.
276
AUDIO
NOTICE
This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation.
This
equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. However, there
is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to
radio or television reception, which can be determined
by turning the equipment off and on, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or
more of the following measures:
Information to user
Alternation or modifications carried out without
appropriate authorization may invalidate the user’s
right to operate the equipment.
NOTICE
This XM tuner supports “Audio Services” (Music and
Talk) of only XM satellite radio and “Text Information”*
linked to the respective audio services.
*Text Information includes, Channel Name, (Artist)
Name, (Song) Title and Category Name.
– Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
– Increase the separation between the equipment and
receiver.
– Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit
different from that to which the receiver is connected.
– Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV
technician for help.
277
AUDIO
Cassette tape player operation
(a) Playing a cassette tape
20L141
20L365
If a cassette is already in the slot, push the “TAPE” button.
When you insert a cassette tape, the exposed tape should
face to the right.
The player will automatically start when you insert a cassette
tape. At this time, “TAPE” appears on the display.
If a metal or chrome equivalent cassette tape is put in the
cassette player, the player will automatically recognize it, and
“METAL” appears on the display.
To stop or eject the cassette tape, push the “
” (eject) button.
Auto-reverse feature: After the cassette player reaches the
end of a tape, it automatically reverses and begins to play the
other side, regardless of whether the cassette was playing or
fast forwarding.
278
Dolby Noise Reduction* feature: If you are listening to a
tape that was recorded with Dolby Noise Reduction*, push
” button. The display will indicate that the Dolby noise
the “
reduction system is on.
The Dolby NR mode reduces tape noise by about 10 dB. For
best sound reproduction, play your tapes with the Dolby NR on
or off according to the mode used for recording the tape.
To play a tape recorded without Dolby NR, push the button
again to turn off the Dolby NR.
* Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation. “DOLBY” and the double- D
symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing
Corporation.
AUDIO
(b) Manual program selection
20L142c
“Program” button: Push the “ ” button to select the
other side of a cassette tape. The display indicates which side
is currently selected ( indicates top side, indicates bottom
side).
“Rewind” button: Push the “” button to rewind a tape.
”REW” appears on the display.
To stop rewinding, push the same button or ”TAPE” button.
“Fast forward” button: Push the “” button to fast forward
a cassette tape. “FF” appears on the display.
To stop fast forwarding, push the same button or “TAPE”
button.
(c) Automatic program selection
20L143c
“RPT” button: The repeat feature automatically replays the
current program.
Push the “RPT” button while the program is playing. When the
program ends, it will automatically be rewound and replayed.
Push the button again to turn off the repeat feature.
There must be at least 4 seconds of blank space between
programs for the repeat feature to work correctly.
“SKIP” button: The skip feature allows you to fast forward
past long stretches of blank tape. This is especially useful at
the end of cassettes.
Push the “SKIP” button. The player will automatically skip any
blank portions of 15 seconds or more and play the next
program. To cancel it, push the button once again.
279
AUDIO
Push this button on the lower side to skip backward. Push the
button until “REW” and the number you want to skip appear on
the display.
20L345
When counting the number of programs you want to rewind,
remember to count the current program as well. For
example, if you want to rewind to a song that is two before
the song you are listening to, push this button until “REW
3” appears on the display.
“Automatic program selection” button: The automatic
program selection feature allows you to program your cassette
player to skip forward or backward to locate the song you want
to hear. You can skip up to nine programs at a time.
When the beginning of the tape is reached, the player
automatically resumes normal play.
Push this button on the upper side to skip forward. “FF” and
the number will appear on the display. Push the button until the
number you want to skip appears on the display. After that, the
player will automatically skip forward.
“RPT”, “SKIP” or “Automatic program selection”
features: These features may not work well with some spoken
word, live or classical recordings.
When the end of the tape is reached, the player automatically
reverses sides and resumes normal play.
280
If you set “REW 1”, the player will rewind to the beginning
of the current program.
There must be at least 3 seconds of blank space between
programs for this feature to work correctly.
AUDIO
Compact disc player operation
If you need to insert the next disc, repeat the same procedure
to insert another disc.
(a) Inserting or ejecting compact discs
Setting all the discs:
The ignition switch must be in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
1. Push the “LOAD” button until you hear a beep.
Your automatic changer can store up to 6 discs.
The green indicators at both ends of the slot start blinking and
“WAIT” appears on the display. After the blinking indicators
stay on and the “WAIT” changes to the “LOAD”, the CD door
opens.
2. Insert only one disc while the CD door is open.
20L150c
The CD door closes and “WAIT” appears again.
3. Insert the next disc after the “WAIT” changes to the
“LOAD” and the CD door opens.
4. Repeat this procedure until you insert all the discs.
To cancel the operation, push the “LOAD” or “DISC” button.
Setting a single compact disc:
1. Push the “LOAD” button briefly.
The green indicators at both ends of the slot start blinking and
“WAIT” appears on the display. After the blinking indicators
stay on and the “WAIT” changes to the “LOAD”, the CD door
opens.
2. Insert only one disc while the CD door is open.
You can set a disc at the lowest empty disc number.
If you do not insert the discs within 15 seconds after pushing
the “LOAD” button and “LOAD” is displayed, the operation will
be canceled automatically.
NOTICE
Do not insert one disc stacked on top of another one or
feed them in continuously, to prevent discs from getting
stuck in the player.
After insertion, the set disc is automatically loaded.
If the label faces down, the disc cannot be played. In this case,
“ERROR1” and disc number appear on the display.
281
AUDIO
(b) Playing a compact disc
20L145b
20L366
Ejecting a single disc:
1. Push the button under the “ ” or “ ” signal on the
display to display the disc number you want to eject.
2. Push the “
” (eject) button briefly.
At this time, the display shows “EJECT” and the indicators at
both ends of the slot as well as the disc number light up.
Ejecting all the discs:
Push the “
282
” (eject) button until you hear a beep.
Push the “DISC” button if the discs are already loaded in
the player.
“CD” appears on the display.
The discs set in the player are played continuously, starting
with the last disc you inserted. The disc number of the disc
currently being played, the track number and the time from the
beginning of the program appear on the display.
However, if you accidentally pushed the “ ” (eject) button,
push the “DISC” or “LOAD” button to insert the disc again.
When play of one disc ends, the first track of the following disc
starts. When play of the final disc ends, play of the first disc
starts again.
Do not push in the disc which is being ejected forcibly.
The player will skip any empty disc number.
AUDIO
(c) Selecting a desired disc
20L147b
Push the button under the “ ” or “ ”signal to select the
disc number.
Push the button several times until the desired disc number
appears on the display. When you release the button, the
player will start playing the selected disc from the first track.
(d) Searching for a desired track or disc
20L218
Searching for a desired track:
Push the “SCAN” button briefly. “SCAN” will appear on the
display. The compact disc player will play the next track for 10
seconds, then scan again. To select a track, push the “SCAN”
button a second time. If the player reaches the end of the disc,
it will continue scanning at track 1.
After all the tracks are scanned in one pass, normal play
resumes.
Searching for a desired disc:
Push the “SCAN” button until you hear a beep. With “D.SCAN”
on the display, the program at the beginning of each disc will
be played for 10 seconds. To continue listening to the program
of your choice, push the “SCAN” button a second time.
After all the discs in the automatic changer are scanned in one
pass, the scan function is cancelled.
283
AUDIO
(e) Selecting a desired track
20L151d
“TRACK” button: Use for direct access to a desired track.
Push either side of the “TRACK” button several times until the
desired track number appears on the display. As you release
the button, the player will start playing the selected track from
the beginning.
“Fast forward” button: Push the “TRACK” button on the
upper side and hold it to fast forward the disc. When you
release the button, the compact disc player will resume playing
from that position.
“Reverse” button: Push the “TRACK” button on the lower
side and hold it to reverse the disc. When you release the
button, the compact disc player will resume playing.
284
(f) Repeating a track or a disc
20L178
“RPT” button: There are 2 repeat features — you can either
replay a disc track or a whole compact disc.
Repeating a track: Push the ”RPT” button briefly while the
track is playing. ”RPT” will appear on the display. When the
track ends, it will automatically be replayed. This process will
be continued until you push the button again to turn off the
repeat feature.
Repeating a disc: Push the “RPT” button and hold it until you
hear a beep. “D.RPT” will appear on the display. The player
will repeat all the tracks on the disc you are listening to. When
the disc ends, the player will automatically go back to the first
track on the disc and replay. This process will be continued
until you push the button again to turn off the repeat feature.
AUDIO
(g) Random playing
(h) If the player malfunctions
If the player or another unit equipped with the player
malfunctions, your audio system will display one of the four
following error messages.
20L253c
If “WAIT” appears on the display, it indicates that the inside
of the player unit may be too hot due to the very high ambient
temperature. Remove the disc from the player and allow the
player to cool down.
If “ERROR 1” appears on the display, it indicates that the
disc is dirty, damaged, or it was inserted upside down. Clean
the disc or insert it correctly.
“RAND” button:There are 2 random features — you can
either listen to the tracks on all the compact discs in the player
in random order, or only listen to the tracks on a specific
compact disc in random order.
If “ERROR 3” or “ERROR 4” appears on the display, it
indicates there is trouble inside the system. Eject the disc.
If the malfunction is not rectified, take your vehicle to your
Lexus dealer.
Random playing for the tracks on a disc: Push the “RAND”
button briefly. “RAND” will appear on the display and play the
disc you are listening to in random order.
Random playing for all the tracks in the automatic
changer: Push the “RAND” button and hold it until you hear a
beep. “D.RAND” will appear on the display and the player will
perform all the tracks on all the discs in the automatic changer
in random order. To turn off the random feature, push “RAND”
a second time.
When a track is skipped or the system is inoperative, push the
button to reset.
285
AUDIO
Rear controller (some models)
(a) When the radio mode is selected
The rear controller is installed in the armrest of the rear
center seat so that you can operate the audio system in
the rear seat.
“CH” button: Push the “CH” button to select a station preset
on the preset button of the front audio system. Each push of
the button changes to the station with higher numbered preset
button.
“
” button: Push this button for manual tuning or seek
tuning.
20L132c
Push this button briefly. Each time you push the button, the
radio will step up or down to another frequency.
Push this button and hold it until you hear a beep. The radio
will begin seeking up or down for a station, and will stop on
reception. Each time you push the button, the stations will
be searched out one after another.
(b) When the “TAPE” mode is selected
“POWER” button: Use this button to turn the system on and
off.
“MODE” button: Use this button to change the mode. If a
tape or compact disc is not inserted, the “TAPE” or “CD” mode
is skipped.
You can lock the button operation. To activate the lock, push
and hold the “MODE” button until you hear a beep. “LOCK”
appears on the display. All the buttons in the rear controller are
inoperative. To cancel it, push and hold the “MODE” button
until you hear a beep again. You can use all the buttons.
“VOL” button: Use this button to adjust the volume.
286
The applicable functions are shown in the lowest part of
the display. Push the switch just below to turn on each
function. In the “CD” mode, “DISC” and “TRACK” are
displayed.
“CH” button: Push this button to select the other side of a
cassette tape.
“
” button: Push the left or right side to skip forward or
backward to locate the song you want to hear. For details, see
“Automatic program selection” on page 279.
AUDIO
(c) When the “CD” mode is selected
Steering pad switches
“CH” button: Use this button to search a desired disc.
” button: Use this button to search a desired track or
“
push this button and hold it to fast forward or reverse.
20L353
The steering pad switches are installed on the left side of the
steering wheel.
“MODE” switch: Use this switch to change the mode. If a tape
or compact disc is not inserted, the “TAPE” or “CD” mode is
skipped. When you push the switch with the audio system
turned off, the audio system turns on.
“VOL” switches: Use these switches to adjust the volume.
” to increase the volume and “
” to decrease the
Push “
volume. The volume continues to increase or decrease while
the switch is being pressed.
“SET” switch: Use this switch to adjust the preset volume.
To preset the volume, adjust the volume and then push and
hold this switch until you hear a beep.
287
AUDIO
(a) When the radio mode is selected
“” or “” switch: Push this switch for seek tuning or to
select a station.
Push this switch briefly to select a station that you assigned
to a switch on the audio system.
Push this switch and hold it until you hear a beep. The radio
will begin seeking up or down for a station, and will stop on
reception.
(b) When the “TAPE” mode is selected
Operate the steering pad switches with due care while
you are driving to avoid accidents.
Car audio system operating hints
NOTICE
To ensure correct audio system operations:
“” or “” switch: Push this switch to fast forward or rewind
the tape or for automatic program selection.
Be careful not to spill beverages over the audio
system.
Push this switch until you hear a beep to fast forward or
rewind the tape. To stop fast forwarding or rewinding, push
the same side on the switch until you hear a beep.
Do not put anything other than a cassette tape or
compact disc into the cassette tape slot or compact
disc slot.
Push this switch briefly for automatic program selection.
When automatically selecting a program, you can skip up to
9 programs at a time. For details, see page 279 for details.
The use of a cellular phone inside or near the vehicle
may cause a noise from the speakers of the audio
system which you are listening to. However, this
does not indicate a malfunction.
(c) When the “CD” mode is selected
“” or “” switch: Use this switch to select a desired track
or disc.
Push this switch briefly to select a desired track.
To select a desired disc, push and hold this switch until you
the desired number of the disc appears and you hear a
beep.
288
CAUTION
AUDIO
Radio reception
Usually, a problem with radio reception does not mean there
is a problem with your radio - it is just the normal result of
conditions outside the vehicle.
For example, nearby buildings and terrain can interfere with
FM reception. Power lines or telephone wires can interfere
with AM signals. And of course, radio signals have a limited
range. The farther you are from a station, the weaker its signal
will be. In addition, reception conditions change constantly as
your vehicle moves.
Here are some common reception problems that probably do
not indicate a problem with your radio:
FM
Fading and drifting stations - Generally, the effective range
of FM is about 40 km (25 miles). Once outside this range, you
may notice fading and drifting, which increase with the
distance from the radio transmitter. They are often
accompanied by distortion.
Multi-path - FM signals are reflective, making it possible for
two signals to reach your antenna at the same time. If this
happens, the signals will cancel each other out, causing a
momentary flutter or loss of reception.
Static and fluttering - These occur when signals are blocked
by buildings, trees, or other large objects. Increasing the bass
level may reduce static and fluttering.
Station swapping - If the FM signal you are listening to is
interrupted or weakened, and there is another strong station
nearby on the FM band, your radio may tune in the second
station until the original signal can be picked up again.
AM
Fading - AM broadcasts are reflected by the upper
atmosphere - especially at night. These reflected signals can
interfere with those received directly from the radio station,
causing the radio station to sound alternately strong and weak.
Station interference - When a reflected signal and a signal
received directly from a radio station are very nearly the same
frequency, they can interfere with each other, making it difficult
to hear the broadcast.
Static - AM is easily affected by external sources of electrical
noise, such as high tension power lines, lightening, or electrical
motors. This results in static.
Caring for your cassette player and tapes
For the best performance for your cassette player and tapes:
Clean the tape head and other parts regularly.
A dirty tape head or tape path can decrease sound quality
and tangle your cassette tapes. The easiest way to clean
them is by using a cleaning tape. (A wet type is
recommended.)
289
AUDIO
Use high-quality cassettes:
Caring for your compact disc player and discs
Low- quality cassette tapes can cause many problems,
including poor sound, inconsistent playing speed, and
constant auto- reversing. They can also get stuck or
tangled in the cassette player.
Your compact disc player is intended for use with 12 cm (4.7
in.) discs only.
Do not use a cassette if it has been damaged or tangled or
if its label is peeling off.
Do not leave a cassette in the player if you are not listening
to it, especially if it is hot outside.
Store cassettes in their cases and out of direct sunlight.
Avoid using cassettes with a total playing time longer than
100 minutes (50 minutes per side). The tape used in these
cassettes is thin and could get stuck or tangled in the
cassette player.
Extremely high temperature can keep your compact disc
player from working. On hot days, use air conditioning to
cool the vehicle interior before you listen to a disc.
Bumpy roads or other vibrations may make your compact
disc player skip.
If moisture gets into your compact disc player, you may not
hear any sound even though your compact disc player
appears to be working. Eject all discs from the player and
wait until the player dries.
CAUTION
Compact disc players use an invisible laser beam which
could cause hazardous radiation exposure if directed
outside the unit. Be sure to operate the player correctly.
290
AUDIO
20L037
Use only compact discs marked as shown above. The
following products may not be playable on your compact
disc player.
Copy-protected CD
CD-R (CD-Recordable)
CD-R W (CD-Re-writable)
CD-ROM
22sv01
Special shaped discs
22sv02
Low quality discs
291
AUDIO
22sv03
Labeled discs
Correct
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the player or changer , do not use
special shaped, low quality or labeled discs such as
those shown in the illustrations.
292
20L038
Wrong
Handle compact discs carefully, especially when you set
them into the player. Hold them on the edge and do not bend
them. Avoid getting fingerprints on them, particularly on the
shiny side.
Dirt, scratches, warping, pin holes, or other disc damage
could cause the player to skip or to repeat a section of a
track. (To see a pin hole, hold the disc up to the light.)
AUDIO
20L039
To clean a compact disc: Wipe it with a soft, lint-free cloth
that has been dampened with water. Wipe in a straight line
from the center to the edge of the disc (not in a circle). Do not
use a conventional record cleaner or anti-static device.
293
SECTION
3–1
STARTING AND DRIVING
Starting and driving
Three-way catalytic converters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine exhaust caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Smart ignition system with steering lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ignition switch with steering lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to start the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic throttle control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lexus park assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear view monitor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dynamic radar/laser cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronically modulated air suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Traction control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle stability control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire pressure warning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake pad wear limit indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pre-collision safety system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
294
295
296
297
297
300
301
302
303
313
314
320
324
327
357
359
362
364
367
371
371
STARTING AND DRIVING
THREE-W AY CATALYTIC
CONVERTERS
NOTICE
A large amount of unburned gases flowing into the
three-way catalytic converter may cause it to overheat
and create a fire hazard. To prevent this and other
damage, observe the following precautions:
Use only unleaded gasoline.
31L353a
Do not drive with an extremely low fuel level; running
out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire, creating
an excessive load on the three-way catalytic
converter.
Do not allow the engine to run at idle speed for more
than 20 minutes.
Three- way catalytic converters are emission control
devices installed in the exhaust system.
The purpose is to reduce pollutants in the exhaust gas.
CAUTION
Keep people and combustible materials away from
the exhaust pipe while the engine is running. The
exhaust gas is very hot.
Do not drive, idle or park your vehicle over anything
that might burn easily such as grass, leaves, paper or
rags.
Avoid racing the engine.
Do not push-start or pull-start your vehicle.
Do not turn off the ignition while the vehicle is
moving.
Keep your engine in good running order.
Malfunctions in the engine electrical system,
electronic ignition system or fuel system could cause
an extremely high three-way catalytic converter
temperature.
If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls
frequently, take your vehicle in for a check-up as
soon as possible. Remember, your Lexus dealer
knows your vehicle and its three-way catalytic
converter system best.
295
STARTING AND DRIVING
To ensure that the three-way catalytic converter and
the entire emission control system operate properly,
your vehicle must receive the periodic inspections
required by the Lexus Maintenance Schedule. For
scheduled maintenance information, refer to the
“Owner’s Manual Supplement / Scheduled
Maintenance”.
ENGINE EXHAUST CAUTION
CAUTION
Avoid inhaling the engine exhaust. It contains
carbon monoxide, which is a colorless and odorless
gas. It can cause unconsciousness or even death.
Make sure the exhaust system has no holes or loose
connections. The system should be checked from
time to time. If you hit something, or notice a change
in the sound of the exhaust, have the system checked
immediately.
Do not run the engine in a garage or enclosed area
except for the time needed to drive the vehicle in or
out. The exhaust gases cannot escape, making this
a particularly dangerous situation.
Do not remain for a long time in a parked vehicle with
the engine running. If it is unavoidable, however, do
so only in an unconfined area and adjust the heating
or cooling system to force outside air into the vehicle.
296
Keep the trunk lid closed while driving. An open or
unsealed trunk lid may cause exhaust gases to be
drawn into the vehicle.
To allow proper operation of your vehicle’s
ventilation system, keep the inlet grilles in front of the
windshield clear of snow, leaves, or other
obstructions.
If you smell exhaust fumes in the vehicle, drive with
the windows open and the trunk lid closed. Have the
cause immediately located and corrected.
STARTING AND DRIVING
BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE
1. Check the area around the vehicle before entering it.
SMART IGNITION SWITCH WITH
STEERING LOCK
2. Adjust seat cushion length, seat position, seatback angle,
seat cushion angle, seat cushion height, head restraint height
and steering wheel angle.
3. Adjust the inside and outside rear view mirrors.
4. Lock all doors.
5. Fasten seat belts.
31L345a
Remember to check that the service reminder indicators
function when turning the ignition switch to “ON”, and check the
fuel gauge to see that you have sufficient fuel.
Carrying a smart key allows you to start the engine
without the key being inserted into the ignition switch.
The smart key system can be deactivated using a key cancel
switch. For details, see “Deactivating the smart key system”
on page 34.
297
STARTING AND DRIVING
“ON” - Engine on and all accessories on.
This is the normal driving position.
31L346a
NOTICE
Do not leave the ignition switch in the “ON” position if
the engine is not running. The battery will discharge
and the electronic ignition system could be damaged.
“ACC” - Accessories such as the radio operate, but the
engine is off.
When you enter the vehicle carrying a smart key and push
the ignition switch, the electronic code in the key is
automatically checked as to whether it corresponds to the
registered ID code for the vehicle. The key indicator light
comes on, the steering column lock is released, and the
engine immobilizer system is cancelled.
At this time, the security indicator light goes off and you can
start the engine when you turn the ignition switch and the key
indicator light does not come on. When you turn the ignition
switch, turn it slowly and surely. If you turn it quickly, it may
become stuck. To free it, turn the steering wheel slightly in
either direction with the ignition switch pushed in.
If you push the ignition switch when the smart key is not within
the effective range of the smart key system, a warning tone
sounds and “Key is not Detected” appears on the display.
“START” - Starter motor on. The ignition switch will
return to the “ON” position when released.
For starting tips, see page 302.
298
STARTING AND DRIVING
When you turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” position, the
engine immobilizer system is automatically set. See “Engine
immobilizer system” on page 17.
31L347
If, in an emergency, you must turn the engine off while the
vehicle is moving, turn the ignition switch only to “ACC”.
“LOCK” - Engine is off and the steering wheel is locked.
When you leave your vehicle, be sure to turn the ignition switch
to the “LOCK” position and carry the smart key.
If you open the driver’s door without returning the ignition
switch to the “LOCK” position, beeps keep sounding while
the door is opened.
If you close a door to leave your vehicle while carrying a key
on which the ignition switch has not been returned to the
“LOCK” position, “Key is not Detected” appears on the
multi-information display, a warning tone sounds inside and
beeps sound outside.
If the selector lever is in a position other than “P”, you cannot
turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK” position. At this time,
when you open the driver’s door and are going to get out of
the vehicle, “Shift to P Range” appears on the
multi-information display and a warning tone sounds inside.
299
STARTING AND DRIVING
IGNITION SWITCH WITH STEERING
LOCK
NOTICE
Do not leave the key in the “ON” position if the engine
is not running. The battery will discharge and the
electronic ignition system could be damaged.
“ACC” - Accessories such as the radio operate, but the
engine is off.
31L348
If you leave the key in the “ACC” or “LOCK” position and open
the driver’s door, a buzzer will remind you to remove the key.*
NOTE:
* The volume or interval of beep sound can be changed.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
1 Type A
2 Type B
Type A: Insert the key, push and turn it to each position.
Type B: Insert the key and turn it to each position.
“START” - Starter motor on. The key will return to the
“ON” position when released.
For starting tips, see page 302.
“ON” - Engine on and all accessories on.
This is the normal driving position.
300
STARTING AND DRIVING
PARKING BRAKE
31L349
31L139
1 Type A
2 Type B
“LOCK” - Engine is off and the steering wheel is locked.
The ignition key can be removed only at this position.
To turn the ignition switch from “ACC” to the “LOCK” position,
you must put the transmission selector lever in the “P” position.
Once you remove the key, the engine immobilizer system is
automatically set. See “Engine immobilizer system” on page
17.
When starting the engine, the key may seem stuck at the
“LOCK” position. To free it, first be sure the key is pushed all
the way in, and then rock the steering wheel slightly while
turning the key gently.
1
To set: Fully depress the parking brake pedal.
2
To release: Pull the parking brake release lever.
Before leaving your vehicle, firmly apply the parking brake.
CAUTION
Before driving, make sure the parking brake is fully
released and that the parking brake reminder light is off.
301
STARTING AND DRIVING
HOW TO START THE ENGINE
Before cranking
1. Apply the parking brake firmly.
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and accessories.
3. Put the selector lever in “P”. If you need to restart the engine
while the vehicle is moving, put the selector lever in “N”. A
starter safety device will prevent the starter from operating if
the selector lever is in any drive position.
4. Depress the brake pedal and hold it to the floor until driving
off.
Starting the engine
Before starting the engine, be sure to follow the instructions in
“Before cranking”.
Normal starting procedure
The multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel
injection system in your engine automatically controls the
proper air-fuel mixture for starting. You can start a cold or hot
engine as follows:
With your foot off the accelerator pedal, crank the engine by
turning the ignition switch to “START”. Release it when the
engine starts.
302
The engine should be warmed up by driving, not in idle. For
warming up, drive with smoothly turning engine until the engine
coolant temperature is within normal range.
If the engine stalls ...
Simply restart it, using the correct procedure given in normal
starting.
If the engine will not start
See “If your vehicle will not start” on page 397.
NOTICE
Do not crank for more than 30 seconds at a time. This
may overheat the starter and wiring systems.
Do not race a cold engine.
If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls
frequently, have the engine checked immediately.
STARTING AND DRIVING
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Your automatic transmission has a shift lock system to
minimize the possibility of incorrect operation. This
means you can only shift out of “P” position when the
brake pedal is depressed with the ignition switch in “ON”
position. ()
The shift position or shift range position is displayed
on the instrument cluster.
P: Parking, engine starting and key removal position
R: Reverse position
N: Neutral position
D: Normal driving position (Shifting into overdrive
possible)
S: “S” mode driving
+: Upshifting
–: Downshifting
31L320
303
STARTING AND DRIVING
Correct use of the automatic transmission is explained in
the following parts.
(a) Normal driving
(a) Normal driving
(b) Driving in “S” mode
(c) Using engine braking
(d) Backing up
(e) Parking
31L321a
(f) Good driving practice
(g) If you cannot shift the selector lever
1 “P” (Park) position
2 “N” (Neutral) position
1. Start the engine as instructed in “How to start the
engine” on page 302.
The transmission must be in “P” or “N” position. The engine will
not start in any drive position even if the ignition switch is turned
to “START”.
304
STARTING AND DRIVING
31L322
1 Power position
3 Snow position
2 Normal position
2. Set the driving pattern selector switch to the “Normal”
position.
31l323
1 Brake pedal
2 “D” (Drive) position
4. With your foot holding down the brake pedal, shift the
selector lever to “D”.
Your transmission has a driving pattern selector switch which
allows you to select “Power”, “Normal” or “Snow” mode to suit
your driving condition. For ordinary driving, Lexus
recommends that you use the “Normal” position to improve fuel
economy.
Always use the “D” position to improve fuel economy and quiet
driving. Only in this position, shifting into the overdrive gear is
possible. However, while the engine coolant temperature is
low, the transmission will not shift into the overdrive gear even
in the “D” position. (See “(c) Using engine braking” and “(f)
Good driving practice” for exceptions.)
3. For more powerful acceleration and sporty driving, use
the “Power” position.
CAUTION
In the “Power” position, the “ECT PWR” light in the instrument
cluster is on and the transmission is shifted up at higher vehicle
speeds and shifted down more responsively than in the
“Normal” position.
Never put your foot on the accelerator pedal while
shifting.
For “Snow” mode, see “Electronic Throttle Control
System” on page 313.
305
STARTING AND DRIVING
5. Release the parking brake and brake pedal. Depress
the accelerator pedal slowly for smooth starting.
(b) Driving in “S” mode
In normal cruising, the vehicle will start in first gear and
automatically shift up to the most suitable gear. On inclines,
declines or winding roads, etc., the vehicle shifts up and down
automatically according to the running conditions to obtain the
suitable driving power and engine braking.
31L326
If you need to accelerate rapidly while driving, depress the
accelerator pedal to the full throttle position. This provides
more acceleration by automatically downshifting the
transmission to the next lower gear or beyond, depending on
the vehicle speed.
If engine braking is needed, such as in descending a long hill,
see “(c) Using engine braking”.
AI (Artificial Intelligence) shifting control
AI shifting control selects the most suitable shift range
automatically according to the driver’s operation and
driving condition.
AI shifting control operates automatically with the
selector lever in the “D” position. When the lever is moved
to the “S” position, this function will be canceled.
Shifting control on the slope: On inclines, you can drive
smoothly with reduced shifting quantity. On declines, the
vehicle will shift down automatically to obtain optimum engine
braking and reduce the driver’s foot braking load.
Automatic shifting point change control: The most suitable
shift range is selected depending on the driver’s accelerator
pedal operation and vehicle condition.
306
1
2
3
4
Upshifting
Downshifting
“S” mode position
Shift range position indicator
You can change the shift range position in the “S” mode.
The shift range position can be switched between “6”
(sixth range) and “1” (first range) by moving the selector
lever up to the “+” side or down to the “–” side. The first
shift range position is “5” (fifth range) when the selector
lever is shifted to the “S” position.
However, if you move the lever to the “S” position in AI
shifting control, “5” (fifth range), “4” (fourth range) or “3”
(third range) will be the first shift range. This is because
the suitable shift range is selected depending on the
driving condition.
STARTING AND DRIVING
31L328
Shift range position indicator
The shift range position is displayed on the instrument cluster.
Shift range positions
“6” (sixth range): The most suitable gear is automatically
selected between first and overdrive (sixth) gears according
to vehicle speed and driving conditions. Always use the “6”
(sixth range) position to improve fuel economy and for quiet
driving.
“5” (fifth range): The most suitable gear is automatically
selected between first and fifth gears according to vehicle
speed and driving conditions. This range is suitable for
acceleration such as when you want to pass a vehicle
running ahead of you during high speed driving.
“4” (fourth range): The most suitable gear is automatically
selected between first and fourth gears according to vehicle
speed and driving conditions. In the “4” (fourth range)
position, the automatic transmission system will select the
most suitable gear to handle current running conditions
such as hill climbing, hard towing, etc.
“3” (third range): The most suitable gear is automatically
selected between first and third gears according to vehicle
speed and driving conditions. This range is best used when
stronger engine braking is necessary.
“2” (second range): First or second gear will automatically
be selected according to vehicle speed and driving
conditions. This range is to be used when engine braking
stronger than that of the “3” (third range) position is
necessary.
“1” (first range): This gear is fixed in first regardless of
vehicle speed or driving conditions. This range is to be used
when maximum engine braking is necessary.
If you attempt to downshift the transmission when it is not
possible to downshift due to high vehicle speed, a warning tone
sounds twice.
307
STARTING AND DRIVING
Maximum allowable speeds
(c) Using engine braking
To get on a highway or to pass slower traffic, maximum
acceleration may be necessary. Make sure you observe the
following maximum allowable speeds in each range:
range
1
2
3
km/h (mph)
59 (36)
100 (62)
146 (90)
31L327
NOTICE
Do not downshift if you are going faster than the
maximum allowable speed for the next lower range.
“S” mode indicator light
“S” mode allows you to use the shift range positions.
The “S” mode indicator light comes on when the selector
lever is shifted into the “S” position. When the “S” mode
indicator light does not come on even with the selector lever
moved to the “S” position, there may be a problem
somewhere in the system. Have your vehicle
checked/repaired by your Lexus dealer as soon as
possible. In this case, you can drive in the same condition
as in the “D” position.
308
“S” mode position
To use the braking power of the engine, downshift the range in
the “S” mode position as follows:
Shift into the “5” (fifth range) position. The transmission will
downshift to fifth gear and engine braking will be enabled.
If you drive in the “D” position: Shift the selector lever to
the “S” position and “5” (fifth range) will automatically be
selected.
If you drive in the “S” position: Shift the selector lever
down to the “–” position by selecting the “5” (fifth range).
STARTING AND DRIVING
Vehicles with the cruise control —
When the cruise control is being used, even if you downshift
from “D” or “6” (sixth range) to “5” (fifth range), engine
braking will not be enabled because the cruise control is not
cancelled. For vehicle speed reduction, see page 326.
Vehicles with the cruise control —
When the cruise control is being used, even if you downshift
from “D” or “5” (fifth range) to “4” (fourth range), engine
braking will not be enabled because the cruise control is not
cancelled. For vehicle speed reduction, see page 326.
Vehicles with the dynamic radar/laser cruise control —
When the cruise control is being used in the conventional
(fixed speed) cruise control mode or in the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, even if you
downshift from “D” or “6” (sixth range) to “5” (fifth range),
engine braking will not be enabled because the cruise
control is not cancelled. For vehicle speed reduction, see
pages 356 and 341.
Vehicles with the dynamic radar/laser cruise control —
When the cruise control is being used in the conventional
(fixed speed) cruise control mode or in the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, even if you
downshift from “D” or “5” (fifth range) to “4” (fourth range),
engine braking will not be enabled because the cruise
control is not cancelled. For vehicle speed reduction, see
pages 356 and 341.
Shift into the “4” (fourth range) position. The transmission
will downshift to fourth gear when the vehicle speed is or
becomes lower than 200 km/h (124 mph) and more
powerful engine braking will be enabled.
Shift into the “3” (third range) position. The transmission will
downshift to third gear when the vehicle speed is or
becomes lower than 146 km/h (91 mph) and more powerful
engine braking will be enabled.
If you drive in the “D” position: Shift the selector lever to
the “S” position and shift the lever down to the “–” position
once to select “4” (fourth range). However, when you move
the lever to the “S” position while the AI shifting control is
operating, the first shift range will be “5” (fifth range), “4”
(fourth range) or “3” (third range) because the suitable shift
range is selected depending on the driving condition.
If you drive in the “D” position: Shift the selector lever to
the “S” position and shift the lever down to the “–” position
twice to select the “3” (third range). However, when you
move the lever to the “S” position while the AI shifting control
is operating, the first shift range will be “5” (fifth range), “4”
(fourth range) or “3” (third range) because the suitable shift
range is selected depending on the driving condition.
If you drive in the “S” position: Shift the selector lever
down to the “–” position to select the “4” (fourth range).
If you drive in the “S” position: Shift the selector lever
down to the “–” position to select “3” (third range).
309
STARTING AND DRIVING
Shift into the “2” (second range) position. The transmission
will downshift to second gear when the vehicle speed is or
becomes lower than 98 km/h (61 mph) and more powerful
engine braking than that of the “3” (third range) position will
be enabled.
If you drive in the “D” position: Shift the selector lever to
the “S” position and shift the lever down to the “–” position
three times to select “2” (second range).
(d) Backing up
31L324
If you drive in the “S” position: Shift the selector lever
down to the “–” position to select “2” (second range).
Shift into the “1” (first range) position. The transmission will
downshift to first gear when the vehicle speed is or becomes
lower than 38 km/h (24 mph) and maximum engine braking
will be enabled.
If you drive in the “D” position: Shift the selector lever to
the “S” position and shift the lever down to the “–” position
four times to select “1” (first range).
If you drive in the “S” position: Shift the selector lever
down to the “–” position to select “1” (first range).
CAUTION
Be careful when downshifting on a slippery surface.
The abrupt change in engine speed could cause the
vehicle to spin or skid.
310
1 Brake pedal
2 “R” (Reverse) position
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. With the brake pedal held down with your foot, shift the
selector lever to the “R” position.
NOTICE
Never shift into reverse while the vehicle is moving.
STARTING AND DRIVING
When the selector lever is shifted into the “R” position, the
outside rear view mirrors automatically down to help backing
up. For details, see “Power rear view mirror control” on page
230.
Vehicles with rear view monitor system: When the selector
lever is shifted into the “R” position with the ignition switch in
the “ON” position, rear view monitor system will activate. For
instructions, see “Rear view monitor system” on page 320.
(e) Parking
31L325
1 Parking brake pedal
3 “P” (Park) position
2 Brake pedal
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Depress the parking brake pedal fully to securely apply the
parking brake.
3. With the brake pedal held down with your foot, shift the
selector lever to the “P” position.
CAUTION
Never attempt to move the selector lever into “P” under
any circumstances while the vehicle is moving. Serious
mechanical damage and loss of vehicle control may
result.
311
STARTING AND DRIVING
(f) Good driving practice
(g) If you cannot shift the selector lever
If the transmission repeatedly shifts up and down between
fourth and overdrive gears when climbing a gentle slope,
shift the selector lever to the “4” position. Be sure to shift the
selector lever to the “D” position after climbing the slope.
If you cannot shift the selector lever even though the brake
pedal is depressed, use the shift lock override button. For
instructions, see “If you cannot shift automatic transmission
selector lever” on page 420.
When towing a trailer, in order to maintain efficient engine
braking and electrical charging performance, do not use
overdrive. The selector lever must be in the “4” position.
CAUTION
Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped
with the engine running. This prevents the vehicle from
creeping.
NOTICE
Always use the brake pedal or the parking brake to hold
the vehicle on an upgrade. Do not attempt to hold the
vehicle using the accelerator pedal, as this can cause
the transmission to overheat.
312
STARTING AND DRIVING
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE
CONTROL SYSTEM
The electronic throttle control system always maintains
appropriate engine output in relation to the accelerator
opening in all driving conditions.
In the power mode, the “ECT PWR” light in the instrument
cluster is on and the transmission is shifted up at higher vehicle
speeds and shifted down more responsively than in the normal
mode.
To return to the normal mode, push the driving pattern selector
switch lightly on the “SNOW” side.
Snow mode: For slippery road surfaces such as in snow. In
this mode, the spinning of the rear wheels is controlled
appropriately.
31L322
When you push the driving pattern selector switch on the
“SNOW” side, the snow mode is turned on and the “ECT
SNOW” light in the instrument cluster comes on.
To return to the normal mode, push the driving pattern selector
switch on the “SNOW” side again.
When you turn the ignition switch off in the snow mode, the
mode automatically changes to the normal mode.
1 Power position
3 Snow position
2 Normal position
The electronic throttle control system has 3 modes:
Normal, Power and Snow modes.
Normal mode: For ordinary driving, Lexus recommends that
you use the normal mode to improve fuel economy.
Power mode: For more powerful acceleration and sporty
driving.
313
STARTING AND DRIVING
LEXUS PARK ASSIST SYSTEM
31L354a
31L340
You can use this system in either of the following ways.
Sensors
The Lexus park assist system will help you to easily park
by detecting any obstacle around your vehicle with
ultrasonic sensors and informing you of the approximate
distance from the vehicle to the obstacle with the
indicators on the display and with beeping sounds.*
This system will operate at a vehicle speed of less than about
10 km/h (6 mph) with the selector lever in a position other than
“P”.
NOTE:
* The volume of the beeps can be changed.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
314
Push the main switch of the Lexus park assist system with
the ignition on. A beep sounds for one second. After the
system self- check is performed, the Lexus park assist
system screen appears for 2 seconds.
Push the main switch of the Lexus park assist system and
turn the ignition on. The Lexus park assist system screen
appears for 2 seconds and a system self- check is
performed. At this time, a beep does not sound.
If an error is detected in the Lexus park assist system while
self-checking, beeps sound and the message appears in the
multi-information display. For details, see “Lexus park assist
system failure warning” on page 317.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Up to 4 indicator bars are shown on the front and rear sides of
the vehicle mark and up to 3 indicator arcs are shown on each
corner of the vehicle mark. The number of indicators shows
the approximate range up to the obstacle. The indicator marks
disappear one-by-one as your vehicle comes closer to the
obstacle. Also, as you get closer to the obstacle, the beeping
interval becomes shorter.
Indicators and beeps
34L148b
To turn off the system, push the main switch again.
NOTICE
If an accident should occur, the sensors will be
affected, resulting in a system failure.
If the indicators remain on the display but you do not
hear a beeping sound, the system may be
malfunctioning. Contact your Lexus dealer.
Front or rear obstacles
Depending on the distance between your vehicle and the
obstacle, the display and beeps change as follows:
1
About 50 cm (1.5 ft.) to about 100 cm (3.0 ft.)*: 4 bars
appear on the front or rear side of the vehicle mark where
the obstacle is detected. If the obstacle is detected on the
rear side of the vehicle, the beeps remind you that your
vehicle is getting closer to the obstacle by sounding
intermittently.
2
About 37.5 cm (1.1 ft.) to about 50 cm (1.5 ft.): The
number of bars will decrease from 4 to 3, and the beeps
sound at shorter intervals than in step 1 .
3
About 25 cm (0.8 ft.) to about 37.5 cm (1.1 ft.): The
number of bars will decrease from 3 to 2. The beeps
sound at shorter intervals than in step 2 .
315
STARTING AND DRIVING
4
Less than about 25 cm (0.8 ft.): The number of bars will
decrease from 2 to 1, and the bar blinks while the beeps
sound continuously.
31L149b
NOTE:
* The beeps can be activated or deactivated.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
Corner obstacles
Depending on the distance between your vehicle and the
obstacle, the display and beeps change as follows:
316
1
About 37.5 cm (1.1 ft.) to about 50 cm (1.5 ft.): 3 arcs
appear on the corner of the vehicle mark where the
obstacle is detected. At this time, the beeps remind you
that your vehicle is getting closer to the obstacle by
sounding intermittently.
2
About 25 cm (0.8 ft.) to about 37.5 cm (1.1 ft.): The
number of arcs will decrease from 3 to 2. The beeps
sound at shorter intervals than in step 1 .
3
Less than about 25 cm (0.8 ft.): The number of arcs will
decrease from 2 to 1, and the bar blinks while the beeps
sound continuously.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Lexus park assist system failure warning
W285
If the sensor is malfunctioning or a cable is broken, the
above message appears.
31L351
Although it is no problem to continue driving, have your vehicle
checked by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
W286
If icicles, snowflakes or mud gets on the sensor or it is
frozen, the sensor may not be able to detect an obstacle.
In either case, the above message appears.
The system self check is automatically performed when
the Lexus park assist system is turned on. At this time if
an error is detected, the master warning light comes on
accompanied by 5 beeps, the faulty sensor blinks and
either of the following messages appear in the
multi-information display.
Remove the foreign matter or deice the sensor. If the message
does not appear after cleaning, the system is operating
properly.
“Check Park Sonar”
“Clean Park Sonar”
The sensors operate individually. When one sensor is
malfunctioning, you will notice sounding beeps and blinking
indicators to show that it is malfunctioning. If another sensor
detects an obstacle during this time, the approximate distance
to the obstacle will be shown by that sensor.
317
STARTING AND DRIVING
Lexus park assist system operating hints
CAUTION
Do not install an accessory or the like within the sensor
detection range. Doing so may cause the Lexus park
assist system to malfunction, resulting in an accident.
31L355
NOTICE
The sensors do not detect an obstacle just under the
bumper. A short object, thin stake or the like will be
detected once but might not be detected as your
vehicle gets very close to such an object.
If an obstacle is very close to your vehicle, it might
not be detected.
If a sensor is subjected to a strong impact, it will not
operate properly.
The Lexus park assist system may not work properly in
the following cases:
Sensor detection range
1 About 1 m (3 ft.) 2 About 50 cm (1.5 ft.)
The sensor detection range is limited around the bumper.
Be sure to confirm a safe distance around your vehicle
and drive slowly.
If more than one obstacle is detected in the same
direction, the indicators for the obstacle nearest to the
vehicle will turn on.
318
When icicles, snowflakes or mud gets on the sensors.
If removed, the system will work properly.
When the sensor is frozen.
If deiced, the system will work properly.
When the sensor is covered with something.
If removed, the system will work properly.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Especially in cold weather, a malfunction warning screen may
appear on the display due to frozen sensors. If the “Clean Park
Sonar” appears on the display, be sure to clean the sensor. If
the “Clean Park Sonar” appears despite no mud, ice or
snowflakes on the sensor, the sensor might have
malfunctioned. Have your vehicle checked by your Lexus
dealer.
In the following conditions, the detection range may be
affected:
When you stop your vehicle in extreme hot or cold weather.
Foreign matter such as snowflakes or mud gets on the
sensor.
The Lexus park assist system may detect the following by
mistake:
Bumpy roads or gravelled roads or grass when driving on
such surfaces, or on grass
Devices issuing ultrasonic waves, such as a horn from
another vehicle, motorcycle engine, air braking sound from
heavy-duty vehicles, if such a device is operated around
your vehicle
Rain or water splashing over the sensor
The ground on which the vehicle is tilted
Radio antenna or fender pole mounted on your vehicle
Mud, ice or snowflakes on the sensor
Tall curb stone
Towing eyelet mounted on your vehicle
Towing hitch mounted on your vehicle
319
STARTING AND DRIVING
The Lexus park assist system may not detect the
following:
Thin objects such as wire or rope
Objects with a surface area too small to reflect ultrasonic
waves such as wire gauze or fence
Sound wave absorbing objects such as cotton or snow
Objects with a sharp edge
Shorter objects
Tall objects with the upper part projected
For vehicles with a Navigation System, the park assist
graphics appear both on the navigation display and
multi- information display. For details, see the separate
“Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
For vehicles sold in Canada
This ISM device complies with Canadian ICES-001.
320
REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
The rear view monitor system assists the driver by
displaying an image of the rear of the vehicle while
backing up. The displayed image on the screen is a
horizontally reversed mirror image of the inside rear view
mirror.
To display the rear view image on the screen, place the
selector lever in the “R” position when the ignition switch
is in the “ON” position.
If you move the selector lever out of the “R” position, the screen
returns to the previous screen. Operating another function of
the navigation system will display another screen.
The rear view monitor system is a supplemental device
intended to assist back up. When backing up, be sure to check
behind and all around the vehicle visually.
STARTING AND DRIVING
CAUTION
Never depend on the rear view monitor system
entirely when backing up. Always make sure your
intended path is clear.
Use caution just as you would when backing up any
vehicle.
Never back up while looking only at the screen. The
image on the screen is different from actual
conditions. Depicted distances between objects and
flat surfaces will differ from actual distances. If you
back up while looking only at the screen, you may hit
a vehicle, a person or an object. When backing up, be
sure to check behind and all around the vehicle
visually and with mirrors before proceeding.
If the camera lens becomes dirty, it cannot transmit
a clear image. If water droplets, snow, or mud adhere
to the lens, rinse with water and wipe with a soft cloth.
If the lens is extremely dirty, wash it with a mild
cleanser and rinse.
The displayed image may become darker and moving
images may be slightly distorted when the system is
cold. When backing up, be sure to check behind and
all around the vehicle visually and with mirror before
proceeding.
Do not use the system when the trunk is not
completely closed.
If the back of the vehicle is hit, the position and
mounting angle of the camera may change. Be sure
to have the camera’s position and mounting angle
checked at your Lexus dealer.
If the temperature changes rapidly, such as when hot
water is poured on the vehicle in cold weather, the
system may not operate normally.
321
STARTING AND DRIVING
AREA DISPLAYED ON SCREEN
Image is displayed approximately level on screen.
The area covered by the camera is limited. Objects
which are close to either corner of the bumper or under
the bumper cannot be seen on the screen.
The area displayed on the screen may vary according
to vehicle orientation or road conditions.
31L356
Check surroundings for safety.
Corners of bumper
322
STARTING AND DRIVING
REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM CAMERA
31L352
31L357
Check surroundings for safety.
The rear view monitor system camera is located on the trunk
as shown in the illustration. The camera uses a special lens.
The distance of the image that appears on the screen differs
from the actual distance.
In the following cases, it may become difficult to see the images
on the screen, even when the system is functioning.
If a bright light (for example, sunlight reflected off the vehicle
body) is picked up by the camera, the smear effect* peculiar
to the camera may occur.
*: Smear effect — A phenomenon that occurs when a bright
light (for example, sunlight reflected off the vehicle body) is
picked up by the camera; when transmitted by the camera, the
light source appears to have a vertical streak above and below
it.
In the dark (for example, at night)
When the temperature near the lens is extremely high or low
When water droplets are adhering to the camera, or when
humidity is high (for example, when it rains)
When foreign matter (for example, snow or mud) adheres
to the camera lens
When the sun or the beam of headlights is shining directly
into the camera lens
323
STARTING AND DRIVING
CRUISE CONTROL
Turning the system on
The cruise control allows you to cruise the vehicle at a
desired speed over about 40 km/h (25 mph) with your foot
off the accelerator pedal.
Your cruising speed can be maintained although a slight speed
change may occur when driving up or down a gradient, within
the limits of engine performance. On steeper hills, a great
speed change will occur so it is better to drive without the cruise
control.
31L341
When the cruise control is on, the driving pattern of the
automatic transmission is fixed in the normal position,
regardless of the position of the selector switch.
CAUTION
To help maintain maximum control of your vehicle,
do not use the cruise control when driving in heavy
or varying traffic, or on slippery (rainy, icy or
snow-covered) or winding roads.
Avoid vehicle speed increases when driving
downhill. If the vehicle speed is too fast in relation to
the cruise control set speed, cancel the cruise
control then downshift the transmission to use
engine braking to slow down.
324
To operate the cruise control, push the main switch. This turns
the system on. The indicator light in the instrument cluster
shows that you can now set your desired cruising speed.
Another push on the switch will turn the system completely off.
When the ignition switch is turned off, the main switch is also
automatically turned off. To use the cruise control again, push
the main switch again to turn it on.
CAUTION
To avoid accidental cruise control engagement, keep
the main switch off when not using the cruise control.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Setting operation
2
Cancelling the preset speed
You can cancel the preset speed by either of the following:
a. Pulling the control lever in the “CANCEL” direction.
b. Depressing the brake pedal.
31L342
If the vehicle speed falls below about 40 km/h (25 mph), the
preset speed will be automatically cancelled.
If the vehicle speed drops 16 km/h (10 mph) below the preset
speed, the preset speed will also automatically be cancelled.
If the slip indicator light blinks and a warning tone sounds, the
preset speed will be automatically cancelled.
Each function is described below.
1
Setting at a desired speed.
The transmission must be in the “D” position, or the shift range
position must be “4” (fourth range), “5” (fifth range) or “6” (sixth
range) in the “S” mode before you set the cruise control speed.
Bring the vehicle to the desired speed, press the control lever
downward in the “SET/COAST” direction and release it. This
sets the vehicle at that speed. Now you may take your foot off
the accelerator pedal. If you need acceleration - for example,
when passing - depress the accelerator pedal enough for the
vehicle to exceed the set speed. When you release the
accelerator pedal, the vehicle will return to the speed set prior
to the acceleration.
If the preset speed automatically cancels out for other than the
above reasons, do not operate the cruise control. Although it
is no problem to continue driving, have your vehicle checked
by your Lexus dealer at the earliest opportunity.
3
Resetting to a faster speed
Press the control lever upward in the “RES/ACC” direction and
hold it. Release the lever when the desired speed is attained.
While the lever is held upward, the vehicle will gradually gain
speed.
When the difference between the actual vehicle speed and the
set speed is less than 5 km/h (3 mph), the set speed can be
increased 1.6 km/h (1 mph) each time by pressing the control
lever upward in the “RES/ACC” direction quickly within 0.6
seconds.
However, a quicker way to reset is to accelerate the vehicle
and then press the control lever downward in the
“SET/COAST” direction.
325
STARTING AND DRIVING
4
Resetting to a slower speed
If the “CRUISE” indicator light in the instrument cluster flashes
when using the cruise control, push the main switch to turn the
system off and then push it again to turn it on.
When the difference between the actual vehicle speed and the
set speed is less than 5 km/h (3 mph), the set speed can be
lowered 1.6 km/h (1 mph) each time by pressing the control
lever downward in the “SET/COAST” direction quickly within
0.6 seconds.
The indicator light does not come on.
However, a quicker way to reset is to depress the brake pedal
and then press the control lever downward in the
“SET/COAST” direction.
With the cruise control on, even if you downshift the
transmission from the “D” position or “6” (sixth range) to the “5”
(fifth range), or from the “D” position or “5” (fifth range) to the
“4” (fourth range), engine braking will not be enabled because
the cruise control is not cancelled. To decrease the vehicle
speed, reset to a slower speed with the cruise control lever or
depress the brake pedal. If you use the brake pedal, cruise
control is cancelled.
5
Resuming the preset speed
If the preset speed is cancelled by pulling the control lever, by
depressing the brake pedal or vehicle stability control
activation, pushing the lever up in the “RES/ACC” direction will
restore the speed set prior to cancellation. However, once the
vehicle speed falls below about 40 km/h (25 mph), the preset
speed will not be resumed.
326
Cruise control failure warning
Press the control lever downward in the “SET/COAST”
direction and hold it. Release the lever when the desired
speed is attained. While the lever is held downward, the
vehicle speed will gradually decrease.
If any of the following conditions then occurs, there is some
trouble in the cruise control system.
The indicator light flashes again.
The indicator light goes out after it comes on.
If this is the case, contact your Lexus dealer and have your
Lexus inspected.
STARTING AND DRIVING
DYNAMIC RADAR/LASER CRUISE
CONTROL
The vehicles with pre- collision safety system are
equipped with dynamic radar cruise control. For the
vehicles without pre- collision safety system, dynamic
laser cruise control can be equipped as optional.
Dynamic radar/laser cruise control allows you to drive at
a selected cruising speed over about 45 km/h (28 mph)
with your foot off the accelerator pedal, maintaining an
appropriate vehicle-to-vehicle distance.
31L363
Dynamic laser cruise control
(Vehicles without pre-collision safety system)
1 Laser radar sensor
31L359a
Dynamic radar cruise control
(Vehicles with pre-collision safety system)
1 Millimeter wave grille cover
2 Millimeter wave radar sensor
327
STARTING AND DRIVING
CAUTION
31L358a
Inside view
1 Master warning light 2 Multi-information display
3 Cruise control lever
4 DISP2 switch (for changing vehicle-to-vehicle
distance)
5 “CRUISE” indicator light
The dynamic radar/laser cruise control function has 2 cruise
control modes: vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode for
maintaining an appropriate distance between vehicles, and a
conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode for cruising at
preset speeds.
328
Always drive carefully and attentively when using either
cruise control mode. Read and understand the Owner’s
Manual thoroughly before using the cruise control. To
avoid serious injury or death, do not rely on the system
to avoid accidents or to control the vehicle’s speed in
emergency situations. Do not use cruise control except
in appropriate road and traffic conditions.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Changing the dynamic radar/laser cruise
control mode
To change to the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
from the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode, push
the lever in the “MODE” direction for longer than about 1
second.
CAUTION
31L174
1 Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
2 Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode
When you push the main switch, the vehicle- to- vehicle
distance mode is activated. To change to the conventional
(fixed speed) cruise control mode, push the lever in the
“MODE” direction for longer than about 1 second.
In the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode,
a warning tone does not sound to warn you if you are too
close to the vehicle ahead, as neither the presence of
the vehicle ahead nor the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is
detected. Pay special attention to the distance between
your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. Always confirm the
setting in the multi-information display.
For the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode, see the
following description. For the conventional (fixed speed)
cruise control mode, see page 352.
However, once the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
activates and is used, it cannot be changed to the conventional
(fixed speed) cruise control mode using the above operation.
To change the mode, turn the main switch off and then on. Next
push the lever in the “MODE” direction for longer than about 1
second.
329
STARTING AND DRIVING
Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
Dynamic laser cruise control—
Dynamic radar cruise control—
The laser radar sensor in this system primarily detects the
reflectors of the vehicle ahead of you to determine the
presence of the vehicle ahead as well as measuring the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance. The detection range of the
sensor is about 120 m (400 ft.) ahead.
The millimeter wave radar sensor in this system primarily
detects the reflected wave from the rear end of the vehicle
ahead of you to determine the presence of the vehicle
ahead as well as measuring the vehicle- to- vehicle
distance. The detection range of the sensor is about 120
m (400 ft.) ahead.
When the dynamic radar cruise control is on, the driving
pattern (power, normal) of the automatic transmission is fixed
in the normal position, regardless of the position of the selector
switch.
CAUTION
The dynamic radar cruise control is not a
collision-avoidance system and will not prevent
accidents. The dynamic radar cruise control is a vehicle
speed control device that is intended for use only on
freeways or roads where the traffic is light or moderate.
To avoid serious injury, you must use caution and be
attentive to road and traffic conditions while using
dynamic radar cruise control.
330
When the dynamic laser cruise control is on, the driving pattern
(power, normal) of the automatic transmission is fixed in the
normal position, regardless of the position of the selector
switch.
CAUTION
The dynamic laser cruise control is not a
collision-avoidance system and will not prevent
accidents. The dynamic laser cruise control is a vehicle
speed control device that is intended for use only on
freeways or roads where the traffic is light or moderate.
To avoid serious injury, you must use caution and be
attentive to road and traffic conditions while using
dynamic laser cruise control.
STARTING AND DRIVING
(a) Dynamic radar/laser cruise control
operations
31L360b
The dynamic radar/laser cruise control function operates
automatically and depending on whether a vehicle is
detected ahead may change the speed of your vehicle as
follows:
If no vehicle is running ahead of you:
1
Cruising at a fixed speed: If there is no vehicle detected
ahead, your cruising speed is maintained at the preset
speed from about 45 km/h (28 mph) to about 135 km/h (85
mph). The preset speed is displayed in the
multi-information display. For the vehicle speed setting,
see “Setting operation ” on page 338.
If a vehicle is detected ahead of you:
2
Deceleration cruising function: If a slower moving
vehicle is detected ahead of you, your vehicle cruising
speed decreases within the range of about 40 km/h (25
mph) to about 135 km/h (85 mph). The multi-information
display shows the preset speed, the detected vehicle
ahead and selected vehicle-to-vehicle distance. If your
vehicle gets closer to the vehicle ahead because of
insufficient automatic deceleration, then the warning tone
warns you to also manually apply brakes.
3
Follow-up cruising function: After deceleration, your
vehicle cruising speed changes in proportion to the speed
of the vehicle ahead to maintain an appropriate distance
from your vehicle to the vehicle ahead. The
vehicle-to-vehicle distance can be changed. For details,
see “Changing vehicle-to-vehicle distance setting” on
page 344.
4
Acceleration cruising function: If the vehicle ahead
changes lanes, your vehicle cruising speed will be
gradually increased up to the preset speed, and your
vehicle resumes fixed-speed cruising.
331
STARTING AND DRIVING
CAUTION
Under certain conditions where the vehicle in front
slows drastically, or is stopped, the dynamic radar/laser
cruise control will neither warn you nor decelerate. The
driver must depress the brake pedal to slow down,
ensuring collision avoidance or that sufficient
vehicle-to-vehicle distance is maintained.
When vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is activated,
you must still be attentive to road and traffic conditions. Should
your vehicle speed decrease below about 40 km/h (25 mph),
the dynamic radar/laser cruise control will shut off, requiring
you to apply the brakes to slow. When a vehicle ahead slows
suddenly, stops or a vehicle cuts in front, the system may slow
your vehicle abruptly, but the automatic braking will cease if the
speed decreases below about 40 km/h (25 mph) requiring the
driver’s manual application of brakes.
332
Dynamic radar cruise control—
CAUTION
Certain conditions make vehicle detection difficult or
impossible.
As this system operates by detecting primarily the
reflected wave from the rear end of the vehicle ahead,
the distance cannot be accurately detected in the
following
cases,
resulting
in
improper
vehicle-to-vehicle distance.
The rear section of the vehicle ahead is extremely
small such as an unloaded trailer.
The vehicle ahead or other vehicles around you
are flinging up water or snow.
Heavy luggage which is loaded in your trunk or on
top of your rear seats is raising up the nose of your
vehicle.
STARTING AND DRIVING
The millimeter wave radar sensor automatically
detects dirt if it is sticking to the front of the sensor
or grille cover of your vehicle, and if detected, a
message is shown on the multi-information display.
However, if the sensor or grille cover is covered with
a metallic vinyl bag, icicle, snowflakes, etc., dirt may
not
be
detected,
resulting
in
improper
vehicle-to-vehicle distance. Continue driving with
due care to the vehicle ahead. If dirt is detected, the
dynamic radar cruise control function is
automatically cancelled. Always keep the sensor and
grille cover clean.
Dynamic radar cruise control should not be used in the
following conditions, to avoid serious injury or death.
In bad weather (such as rain, fog, snow, sandstorms,
or when raindrops or snowflakes get in the millimeter
wave radar sensor or the grille cover), the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance will not be measured
accurately.
If the wipers are operated at high speed (including the
high speed operation with the wiper lever in the
“AUTO” position), dynamic radar cruise control is
automatically cancelled. (In the case of the low speed
operation and intermittent wiper operation, it is not
cancelled.)
Dynamic radar cruise control is
automatically cancelled when the measurement is
extremely unstable due to bad weather.
On the roads in heavy traffic or at sharp bends:
As an appropriate speed cannot be maintained,
serious injury or death could result.
On slippery road surfaces (icy or snow-covered road
surfaces):
The tires will race and you will be unable to control.
333
STARTING AND DRIVING
On steep downhill slopes:
If there is no vehicle detected ahead, the preset speed
will be easily exceeded because of inefficient engine
braking, resulting in serious injury or death. (In this
case, automatic braking will not work.) If there is a
vehicle detected ahead, the delay in deceleration
timing could cause serious injury or death.
When the warning tone sounds frequently (because
acceleration or deceleration was repeated or
sufficient vehicle-to-vehicle distance was not
maintained), an appropriate vehicle speed cannot be
attained, resulting in serious injury or death.
On roads with steep and short inclines and declines,
failure to detect the vehicle ahead will shorten the
distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead,
resulting in serious injury or death.
Dynamic laser cruise control—
CAUTION
Certain conditions make vehicle detection difficult or
impossible.
As this system operates by detecting primarily the
reflectors of the vehicle ahead, the distance cannot
be accurately detected in the following cases,
resulting in improper vehicle-to-vehicle distance.
The vehicle ahead has higher ground clearance,
which means that the placement of the reflectors
is in a higher position.
The rear section of the vehicle ahead is extremely
dirty.
The vehicle ahead or other vehicles around you
are flinging up water or snow.
Excessive exhaust gas (black smoke) is coming
from the vehicle ahead or other vehicles around
you, obscuring your front view.
Protective film is attached to the reflectors on the
vehicle ahead, or reflectors are not installed on the
vehicle ahead or are damaged.
Heavy luggage which is loaded in your trunk or on
top of your rear seats is raising up the nose of your
vehicle.
334
STARTING AND DRIVING
The laser radar sensor automatically detects dirt if it
is sticking to the sensor glass of your vehicle, and if
detected, a message is shown on the
multi-information display. However, if the sensor
glass is covered with a transparent or translucent
vinyl bag, icicle, etc., dirt may not be detected,
resulting in improper vehicle-to-vehicle distance.
Continue driving with due care to the vehicle ahead.
If dirt is detected, the dynamic laser cruise control
function is automatically cancelled. Always keep the
sensor glass clean.
Dynamic laser cruise control should not be used in the
following conditions, to avoid serious injury or death.
In bad weather (such as rain, fog, snow, sandstorms
or direct sunlight, or when raindrops or snowflakes
get in the laser radar sensor glass), the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance will not be measured
accurately.
If the wipers are operated at high or low speeds
(including the high and low speed operation with the
wiper lever in the “AUTO” position), dynamic laser
cruise control is automatically cancelled. (In the case
of intermittent wiper operation, it is not cancelled.)
Dynamic laser cruise control is automatically
cancelled when the measurement is extremely
unstable due to bad weather.
On the roads in heavy traffic or at sharp bends:
As an appropriate speed cannot be maintained,
serious injury or death could result.
On slippery road surfaces (icy or snow-covered road
surfaces):
The tires will race and you will be unable to control.
335
STARTING AND DRIVING
On steep downhill slopes:
If there is no vehicle detected ahead, the preset speed
will be easily exceeded because of inefficient engine
braking, resulting in serious injury or death. (In this
case, automatic braking will not work.) If there is a
vehicle detected ahead, the delay in deceleration
timing could cause serious injury or death.
When the warning tone sounds frequently (because
acceleration or deceleration was repeated or
sufficient vehicle-to-vehicle distance was not
maintained), an appropriate vehicle speed cannot be
attained, resulting in serious injury or death.
On roads with steep and short inclines and declines,
failure to detect the vehicle ahead will shorten the
distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead,
resulting in serious injury or death.
Dynamic radar/laser cruise control—
31L361a
Dynamic radar/laser cruise control should not be used in
circumstances which are inappropriate for any cruise control
such as entering freeway on-ramps or off-ramps.
CAUTION
The dynamic radar/laser cruise control should not be
used when exiting from, or when entering or merging
onto a freeway. When you are following a slower
moving vehicle and exiting, the sensor does not detect
the vehicle and will accelerate to preset speed.
336
STARTING AND DRIVING
(b) Turning the system on
The multi- information display will return to the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance screen about 6 seconds after the
vehicle- to- vehicle distance screen has been changed to
another screen.
CAUTION
31L330
To avoid accidentally engaging the cruise control, keep
the main switch off when not using the dynamic
radar/laser cruise control.
To operate the dynamic radar/laser cruise control, push the
main switch. This turns the system on. When the “CRUISE”
indicator light in the instrument cluster comes on and “RADAR
READY” appears on the multi-information display, you can
now set your desired cruising speed and vehicle-to-vehicle
distance. Pushing the main switch again will turn the system
completely off and “CRUISE OFF” will appear in the
multi-information display.
When the ignition is turned off, the main switch is also
automatically turned off. To use the dynamic radar/laser cruise
control again, push the main switch again to turn it on.
When the ignition is turned off, all the preset data is cleared.
When you use the dynamic radar/laser cruise control again,
you need to reset the data.
337
STARTING AND DRIVING
(c) Setting operation
31L331
Each function is described below.
1
Setting the desired speed
The transmission must be in “D”, “6” (sixth range), “5” (fifth
range) or “4”(fourth range) before you set the cruise control
speed.
After bringing the vehicle to the desired speed, press the
control lever downward in the ”SET/COAST” direction and
release it. This sets the vehicle at that speed. At this time, the
multi-information display indicates settings such as the preset
vehicle speed, whether a vehicle is present ahead and
selected vehicle-to-vehicle distance. If there is no vehicle
detected ahead, the dynamic radar/laser cruise control screen
does not display the vehicle ahead. At this time, you may take
your foot off the accelerator pedal. If you need to accelerate
- for example, when passing - depress the accelerator pedal
enough for the vehicle to exceed the preset speed. When you
release the accelerator pedal, the vehicle will return to the
control prior to acceleration.
You cannot set a desired speed if the master warning light
comes on, the warning tone sounds and the multi-information
display indicates a warning message such as “Cruise not
Available”, “Clean Radar Sensor” or “Check Cruise System”.
If any of the above messages appears on the display, see
“Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode failure warning” on
page 349.
If you turn off the main switch while the warning message is
displayed, the warning message turns off and the
multi-information display switches to another screen. If no
warning message appears on the display, when you turn the
main switch on again, the setting can be made.
You can change the dynamic radar/laser cruise control screen
to another screen even while the warning message is
displayed.
338
STARTING AND DRIVING
2
Cancelling the preset speed
You can cancel the preset speed by doing any of the following:
a. Pulling the control lever toward you, in the ”CANCEL”
direction.
b. Depressing the brake pedal.
c. Pushing the main switch at the end of the cruise control
lever.
If cancelled by a. or b., the multi-information display shows
“RADAR READY” and the dynamic radar/laser cruise control
enters the ready mode.
If cancelled by c., the “CRUISE” indicator light goes off in the
instrument panel and the multi- information display shows
“CRUISE OFF”. In this case, the preset speed data is cleared,
and you must set the speed from the beginning.
In the following cases, the preset speed automatically
cancels out. At this time, the multi-information display
shows “RADAR READY” and the dynamic radar/laser
cruise control enters the ready mode.
a. The vehicle speed falls below about 40 km/h (25 mph). (40
km/h (25 mph) is designated as a cancel speed.)
b. The control lever is pressed downward in the “SET/COAST”
direction and held at less than 45 km/h (28 mph). (45 km/h (28
mph) is designated as a lower preset speed limit.)
CAUTION
In either a. or b., the warning tone reminds you that the
dynamic radar/laser cruise control is cancelled and you
must apply the brakes to slow the vehicle.
339
STARTING AND DRIVING
In the following cases, the warning messages appear and
the preset speed automatically cancels out. When
dynamic radar/laser cruise control is restored, the
warning messages turn off and dynamic radar/laser
cruise control enters “RADAR READY” mode.
a. The slip indicator light blinks and a warning tone sounds.
(This occurs when the vehicle is about to skid.)
b. The driving pattern selector switch is set to “SNOW” mode.
c. The anti- lock brake system is activated by automatic
braking. (The warning tone sounds.)
d. The sensor does not operate properly because a foreign
matter sticks to the sensor.
Dynamic radar cruise control—
e. The wipers are operated at high speed (including high
speed operation with the wiper lever in the “AUTO” position.)
Dynamic laser cruise control—
f. The wipers are operated at high or low speeds (including
high and low speed operations with the wiper lever in the
“AUTO” position.)
340
NOTICE
If the preset speed automatically cancels out for other
than the above reasons, do not operate the dynamic
radar/laser cruise control. Although it is no problem to
continue driving, have your vehicle checked by your
Lexus dealer at the earliest opportunity.
STARTING AND DRIVING
3
Resetting to a faster speed
4
Resetting to a slower speed
Press the control lever upward in the ”RES/ACC” direction and
hold it. The displayed speed will increase in increments of 5
mph (for U.S.A.) or 5 km/h (for Canada). Release the lever
when the desired speed is attained. The vehicle will gradually
increase to the displayed speed.
Press the control lever downward in the ”SET/COAST”
direction and hold it. The displayed speed will decrease in
increments of 5 mph (for U.S.A.) or 5 km/h (for Canada).
Release the lever when the desired speed is attained. The
vehicle will gradually decrease to the displayed speed.
Depressing the accelerator pedal and pressing the control
lever downward in the “SET/COAST” direction will not reset to
a faster speed. At this time the set speed falls by 5 mph (for
U.S.A.) or 5 km/h (for Canada).
A quicker way to reset the preset speed is to depress the brake
pedal and then press the control lever downward in the
”SET/COAST” direction.
If the control lever is released when the vehicle speed exceeds
the upper limit of the preset speed traveling downhill while you
are pressing the control lever downward, the system will
memorize the upper limit of the preset speed as a preset
speed.
Even if you downshift the transmission from “D” or “6” (sixth
range) to “5” (fifth range), or from “D” or “5” (fifth range) to “4”
(fourth range) in the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode,
engine braking will not be enabled because this mode is not
cancelled. To decrease the vehicle speed, reset to a slower
speed with the cruise control lever or depress the brake pedal.
If you use the brake pedal, cruise control is cancelled.
341
STARTING AND DRIVING
5
Resuming the preset speed
If the preset speed has been cancelled, when you push the
lever up in the ”RES/ACC” direction while “RADAR READY”
shows up on the multi-information display and at a vehicle
speed of about more than 40 km/h (25 mph), the speed set
prior to cancellation will be restored.
During follow-up cruising, if there are no vehicles running
ahead because they have changed lanes, your vehicle will
accelerate gradually up to the preset speed.
CAUTION
Deceleration cruising function and approach
warning do not operate when the vehicle ahead is at
a stop or driving very slowly
While vehicle-to-vehicle distance control (follow-up
cruising) is on, acceleration and deceleration are
automatically performed in proportion to the speed
of the vehicle ahead detected. However, if the vehicle
ahead of you decelerates abruptly or if another
vehicle cuts in ahead of you, your vehicle may collide
with the vehicle ahead unless you manually depress
the brake pedal to slow down your vehicle. If you
need to accelerate because the vehicle ahead or you
changes lanes, then depress the acceleration pedal.
Depending on the road configuration (curved roads,
left and right continuous curved roads, driving at the
start or end of the curve, narrow driving lanes due to
road construction) or your vehicle condition
(steering wheel maneuvering, position in the lane or
unstable driving because of an accident or
breakdown), vehicles in other lanes or surrounding
objects will be detected, resulting in a control failure
or the activated approach warning. This may also
result in a very close distance between vehicles due
to a failure to detect the vehicle ahead. Maneuvering
the steering wheel in response to a violent lateral
wind will cause similar conditions.
342
STARTING AND DRIVING
CAUTION
31L588
CAUTION
If other vehicles are driving outside of the millimeter
wave radar or laser radar detection range, a delay in the
detection of the vehicle cutting in at short range or
detection failure of the motorcycle running on the side
of the same lane will occur. In this case, the dynamic
radar/laser cruise control system will not function
properly.
When a slower vehicle in front of you leaves the lane,
the dynamic radar/laser cruise control will no longer
detect a vehicle ahead and will attempt to accelerate
the vehicle to the faster preset speed.
When the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control is on
(on follow-up cruising), your cruising speed is
regulated in proportion to the speed of the vehicle
ahead, so increasing the preset vehicle speed using
the control lever does not accelerate the vehicle.
However, if the vehicle ahead leaves the lane, your
cruising speed will increase up to the preset speed
because the preset speed has been set higher using
the control lever. Confirm the setting on the
multi-information display.
343
STARTING AND DRIVING
(d) Changing vehicle-to-vehicle distance
The vehicle-to-vehicle distance is always set to “Long” when
the ignition switch is turned on.
CAUTION
31L163b
Select
the
vehicle-to-vehicle
distance
considering traffic conditions. The approximate
vehicle-to-vehicle
distance based on time
interval when driving at 88 km/h (55 mph) is
shown below :
“Long” . . . . . . . . about 75 m (about 245 ft.)
“Middle” . . . . . . about 50 m (about 165 ft.)
1 Long
2 Middle 3 Short
You can select one of the following vehicle-to-vehicle
distances: “Long”, “Middle” or “Short”. Each time you
push the “DISP2” switch briefly, the setting changes from
“Long” to “Middle” to “Short” and then back to “Long”.
You can confirm the setting on the multi- information
display.
It should be noted that pushing the “DISP2” switch longer will
change to another screen.
Your vehicle speed changes in proportion to the speed of
the vehicle ahead, maintaining the selected distance.
However, if the vehicle speed is slower, the selected
distance will be shorter than the designated distance.
When the vehicle- to- vehicle distance control mode is
activated or the multi-information display indicates “RADAR
READY”, the vehicle- to- vehicle distance setting can be
changed.
344
“Short” . . . . . . . about 30 m (about 100 ft.)
If the vehicle speed is slower than 88 km/h (55 mph),
the distance will be shorter than the above.
During long downhill driving, the vehicle-to-vehicle
distance will be shorter than the selected distance.
STARTING AND DRIVING
(e) Braking control
Dynamic radar/laser cruise control is not a collision avoidance
system. If an approach warning is activated, depress the brake
pedal to decelerate to ensure an appropriate
vehicle-to-vehicle distance.
CAUTION
Braking control will not ensure that your vehicle will
reduce speed appropriately. Do not rely on dynamic
radar/laser cruise control to prevent collision.
31L177
1 Under the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control
2 Braking activated
Braking control is operating only when the vehicle-to-vehicle
distance control mode is selected and your vehicle speed
exceeds about 40 km/h (25 mph).
If you are getting closer to the vehicle ahead at relatively higher
speed than those of the vehicle ahead or if engine braking
cannot be applied properly, braking control is automatically
activated. The multi-information display changes as shown in
the illustration and the stop/tail lights on your vehicle and on the
vehicle on the display come on.
345
STARTING AND DRIVING
(f) Approach warning
The approach warning may not turn on even if the
vehicle drives closer to the vehicle ahead in the
following conditions:
Your vehicle and the vehicle ahead are cruising at
almost the same speed.
31L332
The vehicle ahead is cruising at a faster speed than
yours. (The distance between the vehicles will
become longer.)
Pay special attention to the very slow vehicle at the
end of the line in heavy traffic or at the tollgate.
Immediately after the speed setting
CAUTION
While you are cruising in the vehicle-to-vehicle
distance control mode, if the vehicle ahead decelerates
abruptly or if another vehicle cuts in ahead of you,
inadequate braking will make your vehicle closer to the
vehicle ahead of you and the multi-information display
flashes and beeps. The driver must depress the brake
pedal to slow down, ensuring collision avoidance or
that
sufficient
vehicle-to-vehicle
distance
is
maintained.
346
The accelerator pedal is depressed or immediately
after the release of the accelerator pedal
STARTING AND DRIVING
(g) Millimeter wave radar sensor
(Vehicles with dynamic radar cruise
control)
31L359a
For vehicles sold in U.S.A.
FCC WARNING
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
FCC RF exposure information
This device complies with the FCC RF exposure
requirements.
For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions;
(1) this device may not cause interference, and
1 Millimeter wave grille cover
2 Millimeter wave radar sensor
The millimeter wave radar sensor is used for
vehicle-to-vehicle distance control cruising. When the
millimeter wave radar sensor is disabled for some reason,
the warning message appears on the multi-information
display. For details, see “Vehicle- to- vehicle distance
control mode failure warning” on page 349.
(2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
347
STARTING AND DRIVING
CAUTION
To ensure that the dynamic radar cruise control system
will function properly while driving, observe the
following:
Always keep the millimeter wave radar sensor and
grille cover clean. When cleaning, use a soft cloth
and be careful not to damage the sensor and grille
cover.
Avoid strong impacts around the millimeter wave
radar sensor. An incorrect millimeter wave radar
sensor alignment will result in system malfunction.
A special device is required to adjust the millimeter
wave radar sensor alignment. Be sure to have the
sensor adjusted by your Lexus dealer.
Do not disassemble the millimeter wave radar
sensor.
Do not affix a sticker (including a transparent sticker)
or attach an accessory around the millimeter radar
sensor or the grille cover.
Do not modify or paint the grille cover. When
replacing the cover, be sure to use a genuine cover.
(h) Laser radar sensor
(Vehicles with dynamic laser cruise
control)
31L363
1 Laser radar sensor
The laser radar sensor is used for vehicle- to- vehicle
distance control cruising. When the laser radar sensor is
disabled for some reason, the warning message appears
on the multi- information display. For details, see
“Vehicle- to- vehicle distance control mode failure
warning” on page 349.
This product is a class I laser product complied with 21
C.F.R part 1040.10 and 1040.11.
348
STARTING AND DRIVING
CAUTION
(i) Vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
failure warning
To ensure that the dynamic laser cruise control system
will function properly while driving, observe the
following:
Always keep the laser radar sensor glass clean.
When cleaning, use a soft cloth and be careful not to
damage the sensor.
Avoid strong impacts around the laser radar sensor.
An incorrect laser radar sensor alignment will result
in system malfunction. A special device is required
to adjust the laser radar sensor alignment. Be sure
to have the sensor adjusted by your Lexus dealer.
Do not disassemble the laser radar sensor.
Do not affix a sticker (including a transparent sticker)
or attach an accessory around the laser radar sensor.
31L333
If there is trouble somewhere in the dynamic radar/laser cruise
control while the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode is
on, the ”CRUISE” indicator light in the instrument cluster
flashes, the master warning light comes on and the warning
tone sounds, and one or more of the following warning
messages will appear on the multi-information display.
“Clean Radar Sensor”
“Cruise not Available”
“Check Cruise System”
If any warning message shown above appears, the preset
speed automatically cancels out.
349
STARTING AND DRIVING
w279
Dynamic radar cruise control—
If the system cannot easily measure the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance because of a dirty millimeter
wave radar sensor or grille cover while the dynamic radar
cruise control is on, the above message appears.
If the system cannot easily measure the
vehicle- to- vehicle distance because of the following
conditions while the dynamic radar/laser cruise control is
on, the above message appears.
Dynamic radar cruise control—
If this message appears, clean the sensor and grille cover with
a soft cloth and try setting the preset speed again. If the dirt
is removed without cleaning, the system will automatically
enter the “RADAR READY” mode. If the system does not enter
the “RADAR READY” mode even after cleaning or the
message remains on the display, the system might be
malfunctioning. Although it is no problem to continue driving,
contact your Lexus dealer.
The driving pattern selector switch is set to the “SNOW”
mode.
Dynamic laser cruise control—
The driving pattern selector switch is set to the “SNOW”
mode.
If the system cannot easily measure the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance because of a dirty laser radar
sensor glass while the dynamic laser cruise control is on,
the above message appears.
If this message appears, clean the sensor glass with a soft
cloth and try setting the preset speed again. If the dirt is
removed without cleaning, the system will automatically enter
the “RADAR READY” mode. If the system does not enter the
“RADAR READY” mode even after cleaning or the message
remains on the display, the system might be malfunctioning.
Although it is no problem to continue driving, contact your
Lexus dealer.
350
w280
It is determined that it is difficult to make a measurement
because of bad weather (such as extremely hot weather)
The wipers are operated at high speed with the wiper lever
in the “AUTO” position
Dynamic laser cruise control—
It is determined that it is difficult to make a measurement
because of bad weather (such as rainy, foggy, or snowy
weather)
The wipers are operated at high or low speeds with the
wiper lever in the “AUTO” position.
Direct sunlight from the front
STARTING AND DRIVING
In the following cases, the dynamic radar/laser cruise
control switches to the “RADAR READY” mode:
Dynamic radar cruise control—
The driving pattern selector switch is changed to the
“normal” or “power” position.
The wipers are stopped or are switched to low speed or
intermittent operation. (Including intermittent and stopped
wipers in the “AUTO” position)
In the above conditions, press the control lever upward in the
“RES/ACC” direction and release it. The dynamic radar cruise
control will be restored, however, even after the weather
clears, if the setting operation cannot be performed or if the
warning message still appears, the system might have
malfunctioned. Although it is no problem to continue driving,
contact your Lexus dealer.
Dynamic laser cruise control—
The driving pattern selector switch is changed to the
“normal” or “power” position.
The wipers are stopped or are switched to intermittent
operation. (Including intermittent and stopped wipers in the
“AUTO” position)
No direct sunlight from the front
In the above conditions, press the control lever upward in the
“RES/ACC” direction and release it. The dynamic laser cruise
control will be restored, however, even after the weather
clears, if the setting operation cannot be performed or if the
warning message still appears, the system might have
malfunctioned. Although it is no problem to continue driving,
contact your Lexus dealer.
351
STARTING AND DRIVING
w281
If a system malfunction is detected when dynamic
radar/laser cruise control is in the “RADAR READY” mode
or operating, the above message appears.
If this message appears, stop your vehicle in a safe place, turn
the ignition off, and then restart it to reset the system. If the
setting still cannot be made or the same message appears
again, the system might have malfunctioned. Although it is no
problem to continue driving, contact your Lexus dealer.
NOTICE
While you are cruising with the dynamic radar/laser
cruise control on, if the master warning light comes on,
the cruise indicator light flashes, “Check Cruise
System” appears on the multi-information display and
the warning tone sounds, turn the ignition switch off
and then on again. If the function is cancelled again
after setting or if settings cannot be made, the dynamic
radar/laser
cruise
control
system
may
be
malfunctioning. Although it is no problem to continue
driving, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus
dealer.
352
Conventional (fixed speed) cruise control
mode
This mode allows you to cruise at a desired speed over
about 45 km/h (28 mph) with your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
Cruising speed can be maintained, although a slight speed
change may occur when driving up or down a gradient, within
the limits of engine performance. On steeper hills, the speed
will change more radically so it is better to drive without cruise
control.
When cruise control is on, the driving pattern of the automatic
transmission is fixed in the normal position, regardless of the
position of the selector switch.
STARTING AND DRIVING
CAUTION
In the conventional (fixed speed) cruise control
mode, an approach warning does not activate even if
you are too close to the vehicle ahead, as neither the
presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to-vehicle distance is detected. Pay special
attention to the distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead. Always confirm the setting in the
multi-information display.
The conventional (fixed speed) cruise control mode
of the dynamic radar/laser cruise control should not
be used in the following conditions, which could
result in serious injury or death.
To help maintain maximum control of your vehicle,
do not use fixed speed control mode when using
dynamic radar/laser cruise control while driving in
heavy or varying traffic, or on slippery (rainy, icy
or snow-covered) or winding roads.
Avoid vehicle speed increasing when driving
downhill. If the vehicle speed is too fast in relation
to the preset speed in the fixed speed control
mode, cancel the fixed control mode and then
downshift the transmission to use engine braking
to slow down.
(a) Turning the system on
31L334
To operate conventional cruise control mode, push the main
switch. This turns the system on. The “CRUISE” indicator light
in the instrument cluster comes on and “RADAR READY”
appears on the multi-information display. Push the control
lever in the “MODE” direction for longer than 1 second to
change to conventional cruise control mode. The indicator on
the multi-information display is as shown. You can now set
your desired cruising speed. Pushing the main switch again
will turn the system completely off and “CRUISE OFF” will
appear in the multi-information display.
However, once the vehicle-to-vehicle distance control mode
activates and is used, it cannot be changed to the conventional
(fixed speed) cruise control mode using the above operation.
When the ignition switch is turned off, the main switch is also
automatically turned off. To use the dynamic radar/laser cruise
control again, push the main switch again to turn it on.
353
STARTING AND DRIVING
CAUTION
(b) Setting operation
To avoid accidentally engaging cruise control , keep the
main switch off when not using dynamic radar/laser
cruise control.
31L335
Each function is described below.
1
Setting the desired speed
The transmission must be in “D”, “6” (sixth range), “5” (fifth
range) or “4” (fourth range) before you set the cruise control
speed in the conventional cruise control mode of the dynamic
radar/laser cruise control.
After bringing the vehicle to the desired speed, press the
control lever downward in the ”SET/COAST” direction and
release it. This sets the vehicle at that speed and the
multi-information display shows the preset speed. At this time,
you may take your foot off the accelerator pedal. If you need
to accelerate - for example, when passing - depress the
accelerator pedal enough for the vehicle to exceed the preset
speed. When you release the accelerator pedal, the vehicle
will return to the speed set prior to acceleration.
354
STARTING AND DRIVING
You cannot set a desired speed if the master warning light
comes on, the warning tone sounds and the multi-information
display indicates a warning message such as “Check Cruise
System”. If this messages appears on the display, see
“Conventional cruise control mode failure warning” on page
357.
If you turn off the main switch while the warning message is
displayed, the warning message turns off and the
multi-information display switches to another screen. When
you turn the main switch on again, the warning message
comes back on the display. If no warning message appears on
the display, the setting can be made.
You can change the dynamic radar/laser cruise control screen
to another screen even while the warning message is
displayed.
2
Cancelling the preset speed
You can cancel the preset speed by doing any of the following:
a. Pulling the control lever in the ”CANCEL” direction.
b. Depressing the brake pedal.
c. Turning off the main switch.
If cancelled by a. or b., the multi-information displays shows
nothing and the conventional cruise control enters the ready
mode.
In the following cases, the preset speed automatically
cancels out:
a. The vehicle speed falls below about 40km/h (25 mph).
b. If the vehicle speed drops 16 km/h (10 mph) below the
preset speed, the preset speed will also automatically be
cancelled.
c. The control lever is pressed downward in the “SET/COAST”
direction and held at less than about 45 km/h (28 mph). (45
km/h (28 mph) is designated as a lower preset speed limit .)
d. The slip indicator light blinks and a warning tone sounds.
(This occurs when the vehicle is about to skid.)
If the vehicle speed falls below about 40 km/h (25 mph), the
preset speed data is cleared and you must set the speed from
the beginning.
If cancelled by the above cases, the multi-information displays
shows nothing and the conventional cruise control enters the
ready mode.
If the preset speed automatically cancels out for other than the
above reasons, do not operate the cruise control. Although it
is no problem to continue driving, have your vehicle checked
by your Lexus dealer at the earliest opportunity.
If cancelled by c., the “CRUISE” indicator light goes off in the
instrument panel and the multi- information display shows
“CRUISE OFF”. In this case, the preset speed data is cleared,
and you must set the speed from the beginning.
355
STARTING AND DRIVING
3
Resetting to a faster speed
4
Resetting to a slower speed
Press the control lever upward in the ”RES/ACC” direction and
hold it. Release the lever when the desired speed is attained.
While the lever is held upward, the vehicle will gradually gain
speed.
Press the control lever downward in the ”SET/COAST”
direction and hold it. Release the lever when the desired
speed is attained. While the lever is held downward, the
vehicle speed will gradually decrease.
When the difference between the actual vehicle speed and the
set speed is less than 5 km/h (3 mph), the set speed can be
increased 1.6 km/h (1 mph) each time by pressing the control
lever upward in the ”RES/ACC” direction quickly within 0.6
seconds.
When the difference between the actual vehicle speed and the
set speed is less than 5 km/h (3 mph), the set speed can be
lowered 1.6 km/h (1 mph) each time by pressing the control
lever downward in the ”SET/COAST” direction quickly within
0.6 seconds.
A quicker way to reset the speed is to accelerate and then
press the control lever downward in the ”SET/COAST”
direction.
A quicker way to reset the preset speed is to depress the brake
pedal and then press the control lever downward in the
”SET/COAST” direction.
Even if you downshift the transmission from the “D” or “6” (sixth
range) to “5” (fifth range), or from “D” or “5” (fifth range) to “4”
(fourth range) in the conventional cruise control mode, engine
braking will not be applied because this mode is not cancelled.
To slow down, reset the cruise control to a slower speed with
the cruise control lever or depress the brake pedal. If you use
the brake pedal, cruise control is cancelled.
356
STARTING AND DRIVING
5
Resuming the preset speed
If the preset speed is cancelled by pulling the control lever, by
depressing the brake pedal or vehicle stability control
activation, pushing the lever up in the ”RES/ACC” direction will
restore the speed set prior to cancellation. However, once the
vehicle speed falls below about 40 km/h (25 mph), the preset
speed will not be resumed.
(c) Conventional cruise control mode failure
warning
ELECTRONICALLY MODULATED
AIR SUSPENSION
This electronically modulated air suspension adjusts the
damping effect on the shock absorbers and the vehicle
height. This adjustment is automatically made in
response to the driving conditions to provide good riding
comfort and stability in all driving conditions.
(a) Vehicle height adjustment
w281
If a system malfunction is detected when the conventional
cruise control mode is in the ready mode or operating, the
master warning light comes on, a warning tone sounds
and the above message appears.
If this message appears, push the main switch to turn the
system off and then push it again to turn it on. If the setting still
cannot be made or the same message appears again, the
system might have malfunctioned. Although it is no problem
to continue driving, contact your Lexus dealer.
31L343
1 High position
2 Normal position
This system maintains a stable vehicle height, regardless
of occupants and luggage weight. Select either of the
following modes using a selector switch.
357
STARTING AND DRIVING
Normal mode: Suitable for driving on roads with a normal
surface.
High mode: Suitable for driving on rough roads which are
unsurfaced or continually bumpy.
The damping effect is set slightly firmer in the high mode. So
you may feel the vibration of the vehicle compared to in the
normal mode. However, this does not mean a malfunction in
the system. We recommend you use a normal mode in normal
driving.
31L336
To change the mode, push the selector switch.
The indicator light shows the high mode is selected.
Normal mode:
The vehicle height remains at normal height at all driving
speeds.
High mode:
The vehicle height switches between the following two vehicle
heights according to the driving conditions:
For vehicles equipped with the height control switch, be
sure to turn the ignition switch off before jacking. If this
is not done, the vehicle height adjustment function will
operate, which may cause an accident.
Driving condition
Malfunction warning
Normal
Medium and high speed driving
High
Low speed driving
If the system is malfunctioning, “Height Hi” appears on the
multi-information display, the master warning light comes on
and a warning tone sounds. Although it is no problem to
continue driving, have the system checked by your Lexus
dealer at the first opportunity.
Vehicle height
358
CAUTION
STARTING AND DRIVING
(b) Damping mode selection
TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM
The traction control system automatically helps prevent
the spinning of rear wheels when the vehicle is started or
accelerated on slippery road surfaces.
31L144b
When the ignition switch is turned to “ON”, the system
automatically turns on.
CAUTION
1 Sports position
2 Normal position
The damping effect on the shock absorbers is adjusted.
Select either of the following modes using a selector
switch.
Sports mode: Suitable for sporty type driving, such as on
winding mountain roads and high speed driving.
Under certain slippery road conditions, full traction of
the vehicle and power against rear wheels cannot be
maintained, even though the traction control system is
in operation. Do not drive the vehicle under any speed
or maneuvering conditions which may cause the
vehicle to lose traction control. In situations where the
road surface is covered with ice or snow, your vehicle
should be fitted with snow tires or tire chains. Always
drive at an appropriate and cautious speed for the
present road conditions.
Normal mode: Suitable for ordinary driving.
To turn on the sports mode, push the selector switch on the
“SPORT” side. The indicator comes on in the instrument
cluster and a stronger damping effect than that in normal mode
is automatically provided.
To change to the normal mode, push the switch to the “NORM”
side.
359
STARTING AND DRIVING
Traction control off mode
31L138a
31L344
Slip indicator light
Leave the system on during the ordinary driving so that it
can operate when needed.
You may hear a sound in the engine compartment for a few
seconds just after the vehicle begins to move. This means that
the traction control system is in the self-check mode, but does
not indicate a malfunction.
When the traction control system is operating, the following
conditions occur:
The system controls the spinning of the rear wheels. At this
time, the slip indicator light blinks.
You may feel vibration or noise in your vehicle, caused by
operation of the brakes. This indicates the system is
functioning properly.
The slip indicator light comes on for a few seconds when the
ignition switch is turned to “ON”. If the indicator light does not
come on when the ignition is turned on, contact your Lexus
dealer.
360
If your wheels get stuck in a ditch when you are driving on
a severe off road and sand, turn off the traction control
system. This system that controls engine performance
interferes with the process of freeing your wheels.
To turn off: Push “TRAC OFF” switch.
The “TRAC OFF” indicator light will come on.
The vehicle stability control system is always activated even if
the traction control system is turned off.
To turn on: Push “TRAC OFF” switch once again.
The “TRAC OFF” indicator light will go off.
STARTING AND DRIVING
“TRAC OFF” indicator light comes on for a few seconds when
the ignition switch is turned to “ON”. It will come on again when
you push the “TRAC OFF” switch to turn off the system.
“Check VSC” warning message
In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer:
The indicator light does not come on when the ignition
switch is turned to “ON”.
The indicator light remains on after the ignition is turned on.
31L337a
The indicator light comes on in the normal driving mode
while driving.
If the vehicle stability control system or the traction
control system malfunctions, the master warning light
and “TRAC OFF” indicator light come on. At this time a
warning tone sounds and the above message appears.
If the message appears, the vehicle stability control system
and traction control system do not work. Although it is no
problem to continue driving, have your vehicle checked by
your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
361
STARTING AND DRIVING
VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL
SYSTEM
The vehicle stability control system helps provide
comprehensive control of the systems such as anti-lock
brake system, traction control, engine control, etc. This
system automatically controls the brakes and engine to
help prevent the vehicle from skidding when cornering on
a slippery road surface or operating steering wheel
abruptly.
This system activates when the vehicle speed is about more
than 15 km/h (9 mph).
You may hear a sound in the engine compartment for a few
seconds just after the vehicle begins to move. This means that
the system is in the self-check mode, but does not indicate a
malfunction.
362
CAUTION
Do not rely excessively on the vehicle stability
control system. Even if the vehicle stability control
system is operating, you must always drive carefully
and attentively to avoid serious injury. Reckless
driving will result in an accident. If the slip indicator
light blinks, sounding an alarm, special care should
be taken while driving.
Only use tires of specified size.
The size,
manufacturer, brand and tread pattern for all 4 tires
should be the same. If you use the tires other than
specified, or different type or size, the vehicle
stability control system may not function correctly.
When replacing the tires or wheels, contact your
Lexus dealer.
In situations where the road surface is covered with
ice or snow, your vehicle should be fitted with snow
tires or tire chains.
STARTING AND DRIVING
“Check VSC” warning message
31L138a
31L337a
Slip indicator light
If the vehicle is going to skid during driving, the slip indicator
light blinks and an alarm sounds intermittently. Special care
should be taken while driving.
The slip indicator light comes on for a few seconds when the
ignition switch is turned to “ON”. If the indicator light does not
come on when the ignition is turned on, contact your Lexus
dealer.
If the vehicle stability control system or the traction
control system malfunctions, the master warning light
and “TRAC OFF” indicator light come on. At this time a
warning tone sounds and the above message appears.
If the message appears, the vehicle stability control system
and traction control system do not work. Although it is no
problem to continue driving, have your vehicle checked by
your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
363
STARTING AND DRIVING
BRAKE SYSTEM
The tandem master cylinder brake system is a hydraulic
system with two separate sub-systems. If either sub-system
should fail, the other will still work. However, the pedal will be
harder to press, and your stopping distance will increase. Also,
the brake system warning light may come on.
CAUTION
Do not drive your vehicle with only a single brake
system. Have your brakes fixed immediately.
Brake booster
The brake booster uses engine vacuum to power-assist the
brakes. If the engine should quit while you are driving, you can
bring the vehicle to a stop with normal pedal pressure. There
is enough reserved vacuum for one or two stops but no more!
CAUTION
Do not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls.
Each push on the pedal uses up your reserved
vacuum.
Even if the power assist is completely lost, the brakes
will still work. But you will have to push the pedal
hard, much harder than normal. And your braking
distance will increase.
364
Anti-lock brake system
The anti-lock brake system is designed to automatically
help prevent lock- up of the wheels during a sudden
braking or braking on slippery road surfaces. This assists
in providing directional stability and steering
performance of the vehicle under these circumstances.
Effective way to press the ABS brake pedal: When the
anti-lock brake system function is in action, you may feel the
brake pedal pulsating and hear a noise. In this situation, to
let the anti-lock brake system work for you, just hold the
brake pedal down more firmly. Do not pump the brake in a
panic stop. This will result in reduced braking performance.
The anti- lock brake system becomes operative after the
vehicle has accelerated to a speed in excess of approximately
10 km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when the vehicle
decelerates to a speed below approximately 5 km/h (3 mph).
Depressing the brake pedal on slippery road surfaces such as
on a manhole cover, a steel plate at a construction site, joints
in a bridge, etc. on a rainy day tends to activate the anti-lock
brake system.
You may hear a click or motor sound in the engine
compartment for a few seconds when the engine is started or
just after the vehicle begins to move. This means that the
anti-lock brake system is in the self-check mode, and does not
indicate a malfunction.
STARTING AND DRIVING
When the anti- lock brake system is activated, the
following conditions may occur. They do not indicate a
malfunction of the system:
You may hear the anti-lock brake system operating and feel
the brake pedal pulsating and the vibrations of the vehicle
body and steering wheel. You may also hear the motor
sound in the engine compartment even after the vehicle is
stopped.
At the end of the anti-lock brake system activation, the
brake pedal may move a little forward.
CAUTION
Do not overestimate the anti-lock brake system:
Although the anti-lock brake system assists in
providing vehicle control, it is still important to drive
with all due care and maintain a moderate speed and
safe distance from the vehicle in front of you, because
there are limits to the vehicle stability and effectiveness
of steering wheel operation even with the anti-lock
brake system on.
Anti-lock brake system is not designed to shorten the
stopping distance: Always drive at a moderate speed
and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of
you. Compared with vehicles without an anti-lock
brake system, your vehicle may require a longer
stopping distance in the following cases:
Driving on rough, gravel or snow-covered roads.
Driving with tire chains installed.
Driving over the steps such as the joints on the road.
Driving on roads where the road surface is pitted or
has other differences in surface height.
Install all 4 tires of specified size at appropriate
pressure: The anti-lock brake system detects vehicle
speeds using the speed sensors for respective wheels’
turning speeds. The use of tires other than specified
may fail to detect the accurate turning speed resulting
in a longer stopping distance.
If tire grip performance exceeds its capability, or if
hydroplaning occurs during high speed driving in the
rain, the anti-lock brake system does not provide
vehicle control.
365
STARTING AND DRIVING
“ABS” warning light
If any of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a
malfunction somewhere in the components monitored by
the warning light system. Contact your Lexus dealer as
soon as possible to service the vehicle.
The light does not come on when the ignition switch is
turned to the “ON” position, or remains on.
31L350
The light comes on while you are driving.
A warning light turning on briefly during operation does not
indicate a problem.
CAUTION
1 U.S.A.
2 Canada
The light comes on when the ignition switch is turned to the
“ON” position. If the anti-lock brake system and the brake
assist system work properly, the light turns off after a few
seconds. Thereafter, if either of the systems malfunctions, the
light comes on again.
When the “ABS” warning light is on (and the brake system
warning light is off), the anti-lock brake system, the brake
assist system, the traction control system and/or the vehicle
stability control system do/does not operate, but the brake
system still operates conventionally.
When the “ABS” warning light is on (and the brake system
warning light is off), the anti- lock brake system does not
operate so that the wheels could lock up during a sudden
braking or braking on slippery road surfaces.
366
If the “ABS” warning light remains on together with the
brake system warning light, immediately stop your
vehicle at a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer.
In this case, not only the anti-lock brake system will fail
but also the vehicle will become extremely unstable
during braking.
Drum-in-disc type parking brake system
Your vehicle has a drum-in-disc type parking brake system.
This type of brake system needs bedding-down of the brake
shoes periodically or whenever the parking brake shoes
and/or drums are replaced.
Have your Lexus dealer perform the bedding-down.
STARTING AND DRIVING
Brake assist system
If you slam the brakes on such as in an emergency or
apply the brakes more firmly than usual such as when
descending the hill with the designated number of
occupants in the vehicle, the brake assist system
provides more powerful braking.
If you slam the brakes on or apply the brakes more firmly, more
powerful braking will be applied. At this time, you may hear a
sound in the engine compartment and feel the vibrations of the
brake pedal. This does not indicate a malfunction.
The brake assist system becomes operative after the vehicle
has accelerated to a speed in excess of approximately 10 km/h
(6 mph). It stops operating when the vehicle decelerates to a
speed below approximately 5 km/h (3 mph).
For an explanation of this system’s warning light, see “ABS”
warning light on page 86 or 366.
TIRE PRESSURE WARNING
SYSTEM
The tire pressure warning system is designed to provide
warning using a message in the multi-information
display, master warning light and warning tone when tire
inflation pressure is critically low while driving. This
message appears to inform you that such low tire
pressure may hamper driving.
As this system is not designed to operate when the vehicle is
stopped, check the tire inflation pressure regularly. The
recommended cold tire inflation pressure, tire size and the
vehicle capacity weight are on the tire and loading information
label. (For instructions, see “Checking tire inflation pressure”
on page 478.)
Installed tires should be of the specified size. They should be
of the same size and construction. If tires other than the
specified size are used, or if tires of different sizes or
constructions are mixed, the tire pressure warning system will
not function properly.
367
STARTING AND DRIVING
Low tire pressure warning message
w264
You are driving under 30 km/h (19 mph) or above 100 km/h
(62 mph) for less than 5 minutes.
When the low tire inflation pressure is detected while
driving, the master warning light comes on, the above
message appears and a warning tone sounds.
The tires differ in tread pattern or manufacturer.
If the above message appears and adjust the tire inflation
pressure to the specified level as soon as possible. Push the
tire pressure warning system reset switch for a few seconds
and make sure the warning message goes off. If the message
still remains on, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus
dealer as soon as possible.
The degree of the tread wear is very different among the
installed tires.
The tire pressure warning system does not function
properly under certain circumstances. In the following
cases, the low tire pressure warning may not turn on even
if the tire inflation pressure is low, or it may turn on when
the tire inflation pressure is actually normal.
The loading is over the limit or unbalanced.
A compact spare tire, snow tires, or tire chains are used.
The tire inflation pressure is excessively higher than
specified, or tire inflation pressure suddenly drops due to
bursting or other causes.
368
You are driving on slippery road surfaces such as rough or
frozen roads.
The tires are not the specified size.
Rapid acceleration/deceleration or sharp turns are
continued.
Towing a trailer.
Initialization was not performed correctly after replacing or
rotating tires or wheels.
The outside temperature is below 0C (32F) or above
40C (104F).
If the warning message appears again on the
multi-information display after adjusting tire inflation pressure,
the system may be malfunctioning. Have your vehicle
checked by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
STARTING AND DRIVING
CAUTION
Tire pressure warning system reset switch
When the tire pressure warning message appears,
observe the following instructions:
Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified level
as soon as possible.
Avoid abrupt steering wheel maneuvering and
braking. If the vehicle tires are deteriorated, you
could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes,
causing death or serious injury.
Note:
The tire pressure warning system on your
vehicle will warn you when one of your tires is
significantly
under-inflated
and
when
some
combinations of your tires are significantly
under-inflated. However, there are other combinations
of significantly under-inflated tires for which your tire
pressure warning system may not warn you. These
other combinations are relatively common, accounting
for approximately half the instances in which vehicles
have significantly under-inflated tires. For example,
your system may not warn you when both tires on the
same side or on the same axle of your vehicle are
significantly under-inflated. It is particularly important,
therefore, for you to check the tire inflation pressure in
all of your tires regularly and maintain proper pressure.
31L568b
The tire pressure warning system needs to be initialized
after tires or wheels are replaced or rotated.
To initialize the system, perform the following:
1. Park the vehicle at a safe place with the parking brake
applied and turn the ignition switch to “LOCK”.
2. Adjust the pressure of all the installed tires to the specified
level. (See “Tires and wheels” on page 474.)
3. Turn the ignition switch to “ON”.
If the low tire pressure warning message “Low Tire” appears
in the multi-information display, push the reset switch for a few
seconds and make sure the warning message goes off.
4. With the vehicle stopped, push and hold the reset switch
until “Pressure Initial” appears in the multi-information display.
369
STARTING AND DRIVING
W266
Initialization is completed after driving at the speeds of 30
km/h (19 mph) or over for more than one hour. If the
following driving conditions are satisfied, initialization
will be completed in about one hour.
The vehicle speeds is between 50 km/h (31 mph) and
100 km/h (62 mph).
The roads are dry, smooth and straight.
The number of passengers is one or two (including the
driver).
If you make a mistake in the middle of initialization, perform the
operation from the beginning again.
Do not push the reset switch without adjusting the tire inflation
pressure to the specified level. Otherwise, the low tire
pressure warning may not turn on even if the tire inflation
pressure is low, or it may turn on when the tire inflation
pressure is actually normal.
If you push the reset switch while driving, initialization is not
performed.
If “Pressure Initial”does not appear when the reset switch is
held down, the system may be malfunctioning. Have your
vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
370
Tire pressure system warning message
w265
If there is a problem electrically in the tire pressure
warning system, the master warning light comes on, the
above message appears and a warning tone sounds. At
this time the multi-information display indicates which
part causes an error.
Although it is no problem to continue driving with the above
message on the display, have your vehicle checked by your
Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
STARTING AND DRIVING
BRAKE PAD WEAR LIMIT
INDICATORS
13L338
PRE-COLLISION SAFETY SYSTEM
(Vehicles with dynamic radar cruise control)
When the pre- collision safety system detects what it
perceives to be an unavoidable collision, the front seat
belts are quickly drawn back by the retractors
(pre-collision seat belts) and more powerful braking is
applied according to the amount of pedal depression to
help reduce injury to the front seat occupants and damage
to the vehicle body. In addition, the electronically
modulated air suspension works to help regulate the
vehicle not to pitch forward so much.
Pre-collision sensor
1 Master warning light
2 Brake pad wear warning message
When your brake pads are worn enough to require
replacement, the warning tone sounds, the master
warning light flashes and the brake pad wear warning
message in the multi-information display appears.
If the warning message appears while driving, have the brake
pads checked and replaced by your nearest Lexus dealer
immediately.
Continuous driving without replacing the brake pads will cause
expensive rotor damage and increasing brake pedal effort to
get the same stopping distance.
The millimeter wave radar sensor detects vehicles or
objects near or on the road your vehicle is traveling and
determines the possibility of a collision based on the
object position, vehicle speeds and the course you are
traveling.
The pre- collision sensor will operate in the following
conditions:
When the ignition switch is turned on.
When the vehicle speed is about 5 km/h (3 mph) or over.
(The pre- collision safety system does not work with the
vehicle stopped.)
371
STARTING AND DRIVING
CAUTION
31L359a
1 Millimeter wave grille cover
2 Millimeter wave radar sensor
The millimeter wave radar sensor is installed in the front grille
of the hood.
The millimeter wave radar sensor cannot detect plastic objects
such as pylons, and may not detect people, animals, bicycles,
motor cycles, trees, snowbanks, etc. as objects with which
your vehicle may collide.
To ensure that pre-collision safety system will function
properly while driving, observe the following. Failure to
follow these instructions could reduce the
effectiveness of the pre-collision safety system in case
of vehicle accident:
Always keep the millimeter wave radar sensor and
grille cover clean. When cleaning, use a soft cloth
and be careful not to damage the sensor and grille
cover.
Avoid strong impacts around the millimeter wave
radar sensor. An incorrect millimeter wave radar
sensor alignment will result in system malfunction.
A special device is required to adjust the millimeter
wave radar sensor alignment. Be sure to have the
sensor adjusted by your Lexus dealer.
Do not disassemble the millimeter wave radar
sensor.
Do not affix a sticker (including a transparent sticker)
or attach an accessory around the millimeter radar
sensor or the grille cover.
Do not modify or paint the grille cover. When
replacing the cover, be sure to use a genuine cover.
372
STARTING AND DRIVING
Pre-collision seat belts (Front seat belts only)
Pre-collision brake assist system
When the pre- collision sensor detects an object or
vehicle with which your vehicle might collide and
determines that a collision may be unavoidable, the seat
belts are quickly drawn back by the retractors to enhance
the effects of the seat belt pretensioners. The
pre- collision seat belts also work as well when hard
braking.
When the pre- collision sensor detects an object or
vehicle with which your vehicle might collide, and
determines that a collision may be unavoidable,
depressing the brake pedal provides more powerful
braking according to the amount of pedal depression.
The pre- collision seat belts will operate in the following
conditions:
When the ignition switch is turned on.
When the ignition switch is turned on.
When the vehicle speed is about 5 km/h (3 mph) or over.
When the approaching speed in regard to the object or the
vehicle exceeds about 30 km/h (18 mph).
When the front seat occupants wear the seat belts.
The pre- collision brake assist system will operate in the
following conditions:
When the approaching speed in regard to the object or the
vehicle exceeds about 30 km/h (18 mph).
When the brake pedal is depressed.
If the brake pedal is kept depressed before the sensor’s
determination of unavoidable collision, the pre-collision brake
assist system will operate soon after the sensor ’s
determination.
373
STARTING AND DRIVING
Electronically modulated air suspension
control
When the pre- collision sensor detects an object or
vehicle with which your vehicle may collide, and
determines that a collision may be unavoidable, the
electronically modulated air suspension adjusts the
damping effect on the shock absorbers and regulates the
vehicle not to pitch forward so much.
Pre-collision safety failure warning
31L589
The electronically modulated air suspension will operate in the
following conditions:
When the ignition switch is turned on.
When the vehicle speed is about 5 km/h (3 mph) or over.
When the approaching speed in regard to the object or the
vehicle exceeds about 30 km/h (18 mph).
374
If there is a problem somewhere in the pre-collision safety
system, the master warning light comes on, a warning
tone sounds, and either of the following messages may
appear.
STARTING AND DRIVING
w278
The above message appears in the following conditions:
The millimeter wave radar sensor or the grille cover is
dirty.
Clean the grille or sensor with a soft cloth to remove the dirt.
The pre-collision seat belts are activated repeatedly for
a short time.
The system turns off temporarily for overheating protection,
but turns back on after a while.
w277
If there is a problem somewhere in the pre-collision safety
system, the above message appears.
If the above message appears, the pre-collision safety system
may not operate. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as
possible to service the vehicle.
Precaution for pre-collision safety system
It should be noted that the pre-collision sensor may detect the
following as the objects with which your vehicle might collide,
and the pre-collision safety may operate, even though there
is no possibility of collision.
When traveling through a curve, there is an object on the
edge of the road.
When traveling through a curve, another vehicle is passing
from the opposite direction.
When traveling across a narrow iron bridge.
When there is a metallic object on the road.
When there is a steel plate on the road at a construction site.
When there is a bump on the road.
When waiting to turn to the left in an intersection, and
another vehicle is passing from the opposite direction.
If your vehicle approaches another vehicle ahead very
quickly.
375
STARTING AND DRIVING
CAUTION
NOTICE
Do not rely solely on the pre-collision safety system
to avoid accidents. Your safe and attentive driving
practices are still the best way to avoid accidents and
you are always responsible for the operation of the
vehicle and the safety of your passengers. When
driving, always pay attention to the surrounding
conditions and the course you are driving.
Even if there is no object with which your vehicle may
collide, the pre-collision safety system may be
activated as follows:
The pre-collision sensor’s collision detection
performance is limited. The sensor is able to detect
a forward object within 10 degrees on either left or
right side. If it is out of the range, or if there is no or
weak millimeter wave reflection, the sensor could not
detect the object and the system does not work
properly.
Even if the pre-collision safety is operative in an
unavoidable collision, unless the seat belts are worn
and the brake pedal is depressed, the pre-collision
seat belts and pre-collision brake assist system will
not work.
376
The pre-collision seat belts work to quickly draw
back the front seat belts by the retractors
(pre-collision seat belts).
The pre-collision brake assist system works to apply
more powerful braking than normal braking.
STARTING AND DRIVING
377
SECTION
3–2
STARTING AND DRIVING
Driving tips
Break-in period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation in foreign countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tips for driving in various conditionss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Winter driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dinghy towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to save fuel and make your vehicle last longer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle load limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cargo and luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
378
379
379
379
381
382
383
389
390
391
DRIVING TIPS
BREAK-IN PERIOD
Drive gently and avoid high speeds.
You need not follow a break-in schedule with your new Lexus.
But following a few simple tips for the first 1600 km (1000 miles)
can add to the future economy and long life of your vehicle:
Avoid full throttle acceleration when starting and driving.
Avoid racing the engine.
Try to avoid hard stops during the first 300 km (200 miles).
Do not drive for a long time at any single speed, either fast
or slow.
Do not tow a trailer during the first 800 km (500 miles).
OPERATION IN FOREIGN
COUNTRIES
If you plan to drive your Lexus in another country ...
First, comply with the vehicle registration laws.
Second, confirm the availability of the correct fuel (unleaded
and minimum octane rating).
TIPS FOR DRIVING IN VARIOUS
CONDITIONS
Always slow down in gusty crosswinds. This will allow you
much better control.
Drive slowly onto curbs and, if possible, at a right angle.
Avoid driving onto high, sharp- edged objects and other
road hazards. Failure to do so can lead to severe tire
damage such as a tire burst.
Drive slowly when passing over bumps or travelling on a
bumpy road. Otherwise, the impact could cause severe
damage to the tires and/or wheels.
When parking on a hill, turn the front wheels until they touch
the curb so that the vehicle will not roll. Apply the parking
brake, and place the transmission in “P”. If necessary, block
the wheels.
Washing your vehicle or driving through deep water may get
the brakes wet. To see whether they are wet, check that
there is no traffic near you and then press the pedal lightly.
If you do not feel a normal braking force, the brakes are
probably wet. To dry them, drive the vehicle cautiously while
lightly pressing the brake pedal with the parking brake
applied. If they still do not work safely, pull to the side of the
road and call a Lexus dealer for assistance.
379
DRIVING TIPS
CAUTION
Before driving off, make sure the parking brake is
fully released and that the parking brake reminder
light is off.
Do not leave your vehicle unattended while the
engine is running.
Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving.
It can cause dangerous overheating, needless wear,
and poor fuel economy.
To drive down a long or steep hill, reduce your speed
and downshift. Remember, if you ride the brakes
excessively, they may overheat and not work
properly. See page 308.
Be
careful
when
accelerating,
upshifting,
downshifting or braking on a slippery surface. The
abrupt change in engine speed, such as sudden
acceleration or engine braking, could cause the
vehicle to skid or spin.
Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the
legal speed limit permits it, do not drive over 140 km/h
(85 mph) unless your vehicle has high-speed
capability tires. Driving over 140 km/h (85 mph) may
result in tire failure, loss of control and possible
injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer to determine
whether the tires on your vehicle are high-speed
capability tires or not before driving at such speeds.
380
Do not continue normal driving when the brakes are
wet. If they are wet, your vehicle will require a longer
stopping distance, and it may pull to one side when
the brakes are applied. Also, the parking brake will
not hold the vehicle securely.
DRIVING TIPS
WINTER DRIVING TIPS
Make sure you have a proper freeze protection for engine
coolant.
Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high
quality ethylene glycol based non- silicate, non- amine,
non- nitrite, and non- borate coolant with long- life hybrid
organic acid technology. (Coolant with long-life hybrid organic
acid technology is a combination of low phosphates and
organic acids.)
Make sure the engine oil viscosity is suitable for the cold
weather.
See page 465 for recommended viscosity. Leaving a heavy
summer oil in your vehicle during winter months may cause
harder starting. If you are not sure about which oil to use, call
your Lexus dealer - they will be pleased to help.
Check the electronic ignition system for loose
connections or obvious damage.
Keep the door locks from freezing.
See “Checking the engine coolant level” on page 466 for
details of coolant type selection.
Squirt lock de-icer or glycerine into the locks to keep them from
freezing.
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant
and 50% deionized water. This coolant provides protection
down to about –35C (–31F).
Use a washer fluid containing an antifreeze solution.
This product is available at your Lexus dealer and most auto
parts stores. Follow the manufacturer’s directions for how
much to mix with water.
NOTICE
Do not use plain water alone.
Check the condition of the battery and cables.
Cold temperatures reduce the capacity of any battery, so it
must be in top shape to provide enough power for winter
starting. Page 507 tells you how to visually inspect the battery.
Your Lexus dealer and most service stations will be pleased to
check the battery charge level.
NOTICE
Do not use engine antifreeze or any other substitute
because it may damage your vehicle’s paint.
Do not use your parking brake when there is a possibility
it could freeze.
When parking, put the transmission into “P” and block the front
wheels. Do not use the parking brake, or snow or water
accumulated in and around the parking brake mechanism may
freeze the parking brake, making it hard to release.
381
DRIVING TIPS
Keep ice and snow from accumulating under the fenders.
DINGHY TOWING
Ice and snow built up under your fenders can make steering
difficult. During bad winter driving, stop and check under the
fenders occasionally.
Depending on where you are driving, we recommend you
carry some emergency equipment.
Some of the things you might put in the vehicle are tire chains,
window scraper, bag of sand or salt, flares, small shovel,
jumper cables, etc.
32L013a
Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with four
wheels on the ground) behind a motorhome.
NOTICE
Do not tow your vehicle with four wheels on the ground.
This may cause serious damage to your vehicle.
382
DRIVING TIPS
TRAILER TOWING
Your vehicle is designed primarily as a passenger-carrying
vehicle. Towing a trailer will have an adverse effect on
handling, performance, braking, durability and driving
economy (fuel consumption, etc.). Your safety and satisfaction
depend on the proper use of correct equipment and cautious
driving habits. For your safety and the safety of others, you
must not overload your vehicle or trailer. Lexus warranties do
not apply to damage or malfunction caused by towing a trailer
for commercial purposes. Ask your local Lexus dealer for
further details before towing.
NOTICE
Weight limits
Before towing, make sure the total trailer weight, gross
vehicle weight, gross axle weight and trailer tongue load
are all within the limits.
The total trailer weight and tongue load can be measured with
platform scales found at a highway weighing station, building
supply company, trucking company, junk yard, etc.
61L066
When towing a trailer, be sure to consult your Lexus
dealer for further information on additional
requirements such as a towing kit, etc.
Certification label
CAUTION
The total trailer weight (trailer weight plus its cargo
load) must not exceed 907 kg (2000 lb.). Exceeding
this weight is dangerous.
383
DRIVING TIPS
Trailer hitch assemblies have different weight
capacities established by the hitch manufacturer.
Even though the vehicle may be physically capable of
towing a higher weight, the operator must determine
the maximum weight rating of the particular hitch
assembly and never exceed the maximum weight
rating specified for the trailer hitch. Exceeding the
maximum weight rating set by the trailer hitch
manufacturer can cause an accident resulting in
serious personal injuries.
The gross vehicle weight must not exceed the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) indicated on the
Certification Label. The gross vehicle weight is the
sum weight of the unloaded vehicle, driver,
passengers, luggage, hitch and trailer tongue load.
it also includes the weight of any special equipment
installed on your vehicle.
The load on either the front or rear axle resulting from
distribution of the gross vehicle weight on both axles
must not exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) listed on the Certification Label.
384
32L017
1 Total trailer weight
2 Tongue load
The trailer cargo load should be distributed so that
the tongue load is 9 to 11 % of the total trailer weight,
not exceeding the maximum of 90 kg (200 lb.).
Tongue load
x 100 = 9 to 11%
Total trailer weight
Never load the trailer with more weight in the back
than in the front. About 60 % of the trailer load should
be in the front half of the trailer and the remaining 40
% in the rear.
DRIVING TIPS
Hitches
Brakes and safety chains
If you wish to install a trailer hitch, your Lexus dealer should
be consulted.
Lexus recommends trailers with brakes that conform to
any applicable federal and state/provincial regulations.
Use only a hitch which is recommended by Lexus dealer
and conforms to the total trailer weight requirement.
A safety chain must always be used between the towing
vehicle and the trailer. Leave sufficient slack in the
chain for turns. The chain should cross under the
trailer tongue to prevent the tongue from dropping to
the ground in case it becomes damaged or separated.
For correct safety chain procedures, follow the hitch or
trailer manufacturer’s recommendations.
Follow the directions supplied by the hitch manufacturer.
Lubricate the hitch ball with a light coat of grease.
Lexus recommends removing the trailer hitch whenever
you are not towing a trailer to reduce the possibility of
additional damage caused by the hitch if your vehicle is
struck from behind. After removing the hitch, seal any
mounting holes in the vehicle body to prevent entry of
pollutants such as exhaust fumes, dirt, water, etc.
NOTICE
Install the trailer hitch using only the position
recommended by your Lexus dealer. Do not install
the trailer hitch on the bumper; this may cause body
damage.
Do not use axle-mounted hitches as they can cause
damage to the axle housing, wheel bearings, wheels
or tires.
CAUTION
If the total trailer weight exceeds 450 kg (1000 lb.),
trailer brakes are required.
Never tap into your vehicle’s hydraulic system as it
will lower its braking effectiveness.
Never tow a trailer without using a safety chain
securely attached to both the trailer and the vehicle.
If damage occurs to the coupling unit or hitch ball,
there is possible danger of the trailer wandering over
into another lane.
385
DRIVING TIPS
Tires
Maintenance
Ensure that your vehicle’s tires are properly inflated. Adjust
the tire inflation pressure to the recommended cold tire
inflation pressure indicated below:
If you tow a trailer, your vehicle will require more frequent
maintenance due to the additional load. For this
information, please refer to the scheduled maintenance
information in the “Owner ’s Manual Supplement /
Scheduled Maintenance”.
Tire inflation pressure, kPa (kgf/cm2 or bar, psi)
P225/55R17 95H Front
220 (2.2, 32)
Rear
220 (2.2, 32)
245/45R18 96W
Front
230 (2.3, 33)
Rear
230 (2.3, 33)
The trailer tires should be inflated to the pressure
recommended by the trailer manufacturer in respect to the
total trailer weight.
Trailer lights
Trailer lights must comply with federal, state/provincial and
local regulations. See your local recreational vehicle dealer
or rental agency for the correct type of wiring and relays for
your trailer. Check for correct operation of the turn signals
and stop lights each time you hitch up. Direct splicing may
damage your vehicle’s electrical system and cause a
malfunction of your lights.
Break-in schedule
Lexus recommends that you do not tow a trailer with a new
vehicle or a vehicle with any new power train component
(engine, transmission, differential, wheel bearing, etc.) for
the first 800 km (500 miles) of driving.
386
Retighten all fixing bolts of the towing ball and bracket after
approximately 1000 km (600 miles) of trailer driving.
Pre-towing safety check
Check that your vehicle remains level when a loaded or
unloaded trailer is hitched. Do not drive if the vehicle has
an abnormal nose-up or nose-down condition, and check
for improper tongue load, overload, worn suspension or
other possible causes.
Make sure the trailer cargo is securely loaded so that it
cannot shift.
Check that your rear view mirrors conform to any federal,
state/provincial or local regulations. If they do not, install
required rear view mirrors appropriate for towing purposes.
DRIVING TIPS
Trailer towing tips
When towing a trailer, your vehicle will handle differently
than when not towing. The three main causes of
vehicle-trailer accidents are driver error, excessive speed
and improper trailer loading. Keep these in mind when
towing:
Before starting out, check the operation of the lights and all
vehicle-trailer connections. After driving a short distance,
stop and recheck the lights and connections. Practice
turning, stopping and backing with a trailer in an area away
from traffic until you learn the feel.
Backing with a trailer is difficult and requires practice. Grip
the bottom of the steering wheel and move your hand to the
left to move the trailer to the left. Move your hand to the right
to move the trailer to the right. (This procedure is generally
opposite to that when backing without a trailer.) Also, just
turn the steering wheel a little at a time, avoiding sharp or
prolonged turning. Have someone guide you when backing
to reduce the risk of an accident.
Because stopping distance may be increased,
vehicle- to- vehicle distance should be increased when
towing a trailer. For each 16 km/h (10 mph) of speed, allow
at least one vehicle and trailer length between you and the
vehicle ahead. Avoid sudden braking as you may skid,
resulting in jackknifing and loss of control. This is especially
true on wet or slippery surfaces.
Avoid jerky steering and sharp turns. The trailer could hit
your vehicle in a tight turn. Slow down before making a turn
to avoid the need of sudden braking.
Remember that when making a turn, the trailer wheels will
be closer than the vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn.
Therefore, compensate for this by making a larger than
normal turning radius with your vehicle.
Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely affect handling
of your vehicle and trailer, causing sway. Pay attention to
the rear from time to time to prepare yourself for being
passed by large trucks or buses, which may cause your
vehicle and trailer to sway. If swaying happens, firmly grip
the steering wheel and reduce speed immediately but
gradually. Never increase speed. If it is necessary to
reduce speed, brake slowly. Steer straight ahead. If you
make no extreme correction with the steering or brakes,
your vehicle and trailer will stabilize.
Be careful when passing other vehicles. Passing requires
considerable distance. After passing a vehicle, do not
forget the length of your trailer and be sure you have plenty
of room before changing lanes.
In order to maintain efficient engine braking and electrical
charging performance, do not use overdrive. Transmission
shift range position must be “4” (fourth range) in the “S”
mode.
Avoid jerky starts or sudden acceleration.
387
DRIVING TIPS
Because of the added load of the trailer, your vehicle’s
engine may overheat on hot days (at temperatures over
30C [85F]) when going up a long or steep grade with a
trailer. If the engine coolant temperature gauge indicates
overheating, immediately turn off the air conditioning (if in
use), pull your vehicle off the road and stop in a safe spot.
See “If your vehicle overheats” on page 401.
Always place wheel blocks under both the vehicle and trailer
wheels when parking. Apply the parking brake firmly. Put
the transmission in “P”. Avoid parking on a slope with a
trailer, but if it cannot be avoided, do so only after performing
the following:
1. Apply the brakes and keep them applied.
2. Have someone place wheel blocks under both the vehicle
and trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel blocks are in place, release your brakes
slowly until the blocks absorb the load.
4. Apply the parking brake firmly.
5. Shift into “P” and turn off the engine.
When restarting out after parking on a slope:
1. With the transmission in “P” position, start the engine. Be
sure to keep the brake pedal depressed.
2. Shift into the “3” (third range), “2” (second range), “1” (first
range) or “R” position.
3. Release the parking brake and brake pedal and slowly pull
or back away from the wheel blocks. Stop and apply your
brakes.
4. Have someone retrieve the blocks.
CAUTION
Do not exceed 72 km/h (45 mph) or the posted towing
speed limit, whichever is lower. Because instability
(swaying) of a towing vehicle-trailer combination
usually increases as the speed increases, exceeding
72 km/h (45 mph) may cause loss of control.
Slow down and downshift before descending steep
or long downhill grades. Do not make sudden
downshifts.
Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or too
frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat
and result in reduced braking efficiency.
388
DRIVING TIPS
HOW TO SAVE FUEL AND MAKE
YOUR VEHICLE LAST LONGER
Improving fuel economy is easy - just take it easy. It will help
make your vehicle last longer, too. Here are some specific tips
on how to save money on both fuel and repairs:
Keep your tires inflated at the correct pressure. Check
the pressure every two weeks, or at least once a month.
Underinflation causes tire wear and wastes fuel.
Do not carry unneeded weight in your vehicle. Excess
weight puts a heavier load on the engine, causing greater
fuel consumption.
Avoid lengthy warm- up idling. Once the engine is
running smoothly, begin driving - but gently. Remember,
however, that on cold winter days this may take a little
longer.
Always keep the automatic transmission selector lever
in the “D” position when engine braking is not required.
Driving with the overdrive off will reduce the fuel economy
(For details, see “Automatic transmission” on page 303.)
Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Avoid jackrabbit starts.
Avoid continuous speeding up and slowing down.
Stop-and-go driving wastes fuel.
Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking. Maintain a
steady pace. Try to time the traffic signals so you only need
to stop as little as possible or take advantage of through
streets to avoid traffic lights. Keep a proper distance from
other vehicles to avoid sudden braking. This will also
reduce wear on your brakes.
Avoid heavy traffic or traffic jams whenever possible.
Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal. This causes
premature wear, overheating and poor fuel economy.
Maintain a moderate speed on highways. The faster you
drive, the greater the fuel consumption. By reducing your
speed, you will cut down on fuel consumption.
Keep the front wheels in proper alignment. Avoid hitting
the curb and slow down on rough roads. Improper
alignment not only causes faster tire wear but also puts an
extra load on the engine, which, in turn, wastes fuel.
Keep the bottom of your vehicle free from mud, etc.
This not only lessens weight but also helps prevent
corrosion.
Avoid long engine idling. If you have a long wait and you
are not in traffic, it is better to turn off the engine and start
again later.
Avoid engine over-revving. Use a gear position suitable
for the road on which you are traveling.
389
DRIVING TIPS
Keep your vehicle tuned-up and in top shape. A dirty air
cleaner, improper valve clearance, dirty plugs, dirty oil and
grease, brakes not adjusted, etc. all lower engine
performance and contribute to poor fuel economy. For
longer life of all parts and lower operating costs, keep all
maintenance work on schedule, and if you often drive under
severe conditions, see that your vehicle receives more
frequent maintenance. (For scheduled maintenance
information, please refer to the “Owner ’s Manual
Supplement / Scheduled Maintenance”.)
CAUTION
Never turn off the engine to coast down hills. Your
power steering and brake booster will not function
without the engine running. Also, the emission control
system operates properly only when the engine is
running.
VEHICLE LOAD LIMITS
Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating
capacity, towing capacity and cargo capacity. Follow the
load limits shown below.
Total load capacity:
410 kg (900 lb.)
Total load capacity means combined weight of
occupants, cargo and luggage. Tongue load is included
when trailer towing.
Seating capacity:
Total 5 (Front 2, Rear 3)
Seating capacity means the maximum number of
occupants whose estimated average weight is 68 kg
(150 lb.) per person. Depending on the weight of each
person, the seating capacity given may exceed the total
load capacity.
NOTICE
Even if the number of occupants are within the
seating capacity, do not exceed the total load
capacity.
Towing capacity:
907 kg (2000 lb.)
Towing capacity means the maximum gross trailer
weight (trailer weight plus its cargo weight) that your
vehicle is able to tow.
390
DRIVING TIPS
Cargo capacity
CARGO AND LUGGAGE
Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on
the size (weight) and the number of occupants. For
details, see “Capacity and distribution” that follows.
CAUTION
Do not apply the load more than each load limit.
That may cause not only damage to the tires, but
also deterioration to the steering ability and
braking ability, which may cause an accident.
Stowage precautions
When stowing cargo and luggage in the vehicle,
observe the following:
Put cargo and luggage in the trunk when at all
possible. Be sure all items are secured in place.
Be careful to keep the vehicle level. Placing the
weight as far forward as possible helps maintain
vehicle balance.
For better fuel economy, do not carry unnecessary
weight.
CAUTION
Do not place anything on the package tray
behind the rear seatback. Such items may be
thrown about and possibly injure people in the
vehicle during sudden braking or in an
accident.
Do not drive with objects left on top of the
instrument panel. They may interfere with the
driver’s field of view. Or they may move during
sharp vehicle acceleration or turning, and
impair the driver’s control of the vehicle. In an
accident they may injure the vehicle occupants.
391
DRIVING TIPS
NOTICE
Do not load the vehicle beyond the vehicle
capacity weight specified on the tire and loading
information label affixed on the center pillar on the
driver side.
Capacity and distribution
Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the
occupants.
(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) – (Total weight
of occupants)
Steps for determining correct load limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds”
on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the
“XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150
lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. 1400 – 750
(5 x 150) = 650 lbs.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
392
DRIVING TIPS
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Example on your vehicle
For details about trailer towing, see page 383.
32SA03
1 Cargo capacity
2 Total load capacity
In case that 2 people with the combined weight of 166 kg
(366 lb.) are riding in your vehicle with the total load
capacity of 410 kg (900 lb.), the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity will be as follows:
410 kg – 166 kg = 244 kg.
(900 lb. – 366 lb. = 534 lb.)
From this condition, if 3 more passengers with the
combined weight of 176 kg (388 lb.) get on, the available
cargo and luggage load will be reduced as follows:
244 kg – 176 kg = 68 kg.
(534 lb. – 388 lb. = 146 lb.)
393
DRIVING TIPS
As shown in the above example, if the number of
occupants increases, the cargo and luggage load
equaling the combined weight of occupants who got on
later must be reduced. In other words, if the increase in
the number of occupants causes the excess of the total
load capacity (combined weight of occupants plus cargo
and luggage load), you have to reduce the cargo and
luggage on your vehicle.
For details about total load capacity, see “Vehicle load
limits” on page 390.
CAUTION
Even if the total load of occupant’s weight and the
cargo load is less than the total load capacity, do
not apply the load unevenly. That may cause not
only damage to the tire but also deterioration to
the steering ability due to unbalance of the
vehicle, causing an accident.
394
DRIVING TIPS
395
SECTION
4
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
In case of an emergency
If your engine stalls while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If your vehicle will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If you cannot increase engine speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If you have a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If your vehicle becomes stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If your vehicle needs to be towed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If you cannot shift automatic transmission selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lexus link system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If you lose your keys or lock yourself out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
396
397
397
401
401
402
412
413
420
421
434
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
IF YOUR ENGINE STALLS WHILE
DRIVING
If your engine stalls while driving . . .
1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping a straight line. Move
cautiously off the road to a safe place.
2. Turn on your emergency flashers.
3. Turn the ignition switch to “ACC” or “LOCK”, and try starting
the engine again.
If the engine will not start, see “If your vehicle will not start”.
CAUTION
If the engine is not running, the power assist for the
brakes and steering will not work, so steering and
braking will be much harder than usual.
IF YOUR VEHICLE WILL NOT
START
(a) Simple checks
Before making these checks, make sure you have followed the
correct starting procedure instructions in “How to start the
engine” on page 302 and that you have sufficient fuel. Since
your vehicle is equipped with the engine immobilizer system,
also check whether the other keys will start the engine. If they
work, your key may be broken. Have the key checked at your
Lexus dealer. If none of your keys work, there may be a
malfunction in the immobilizer system. Call your Lexus dealer.
See “Keys” on page 10.
If the engine is not turning over or is turning over too
slowly 1. Check that the battery terminals are tight and clean.
2. If the battery terminals are O.K., switch on the interior light.
3. If the light is out, dim or goes out when the starter is cranked,
the battery is discharged. You may try jump starting. See “(c)
Jump starting” for further instruction.
If the light is O.K., but the engine still will not start, it needs
adjustment or repair. Call a Lexus dealer, Roadside
Assistance or Customer Service Assistance. (See
“Foreword”.)
397
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
NOTICE
Do not pull- or push-start the vehicle. It may damage
the vehicle or cause a collision when the engine starts.
Also the three-way catalytic converter may overheat
and become a fire hazard.
If the engine turns over at its normal speed but will not
start 1. If the engine will not start, the engine may be flooded
because of repeated cranking. See “(b) Starting a flooded
engine” for further instructions.
2. If the engine still will not start, it needs adjustment or repair.
Call a Lexus dealer, Roadside Assistance or Customer
Service Assistance. (See “Foreword”.)
(b) Starting a flooded engine
If the engine will not start, your engine may be flooded
because of repeated cranking.
If this happens, turn the ignition switch to “START” with the
accelerator pedal fully depressed. Continue this operation for
30 seconds and then stop cranking. Then try starting the
engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal.
If the engine does not start after 30 seconds of cranking,
release the ignition switch, wait a few minutes and try again.
If the engine still will not start, it needs adjustment or repair.
Call a Lexus dealer, Roadside Assistance or Customer
Service Assistance. (See “Foreword”.)
NOTICE
Do not crank for more than 30 seconds at a time. This
may overheat the starter and wiring systems.
(c) Jump starting
To avoid serious personal injury and damage to your
vehicle which might result from battery explosion, acid
burns, electrical burns, or damaged electronic
components, these instructions must be followed
precisely.
If you are unsure about how to follow this procedure, we
strongly recommend that you seek help from your Lexus
dealer, Roadside Assistance or Customer Service Assistance.
(See “Foreword”.)
398
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
CAUTION
Batteries contain sulfuric acid which is poisonous
and corrosive. Wear protective safety glasses when
jump starting, and avoid spilling acid on your skin,
clothing, or vehicle.
If you should accidentally get acid on yourself or in
your eyes, remove any contaminated clothing and
flush the affected area with water immediately. Then
get immediate medical attention.
If possible,
continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while
en route to the medical office.
40L140a
The gas normally produced by a battery will explode
if a flame or spark is brought near. Use only
standardized jumper cables and do not smoke or
light a match while jump starting.
NOTICE
The battery used for boosting must be 12 V. Do not jump
start unless you are sure that the booster battery is
correct.
5 Discharged battery
6 Booster battery
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
1. If the booster battery is installed in another vehicle, make
sure the vehicles are not touching. Turn off all unnecessary
lights and accessories.
399
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
When boosting, use the battery of matching or higher quality.
Any other battery may be difficult to jump start with.
If jump starting is difficult, charge the battery for several
minutes.
2. If required, remove all the vent plugs from the booster
battery. Lay a cloth over the open vents on the booster battery.
(This helps reduce the explosion hazard, personal injuries and
burns.)
If the booster battery is an extended maintenance interval
battery, it is not necessary to remove the vent plugs.
3. If the engine in the vehicle with the booster battery is not
running, start it and let it run for about 5 minutes. During jump
starting, run the engine at about 2000 rpm with the accelerator
pedal lightly depressed.
4. Locate positive (+) and negative (–) terminals of each
battery. Connect the jumper cables in the exact order ( 1 2
3 4 ) shown in the illustration.
1
2
Connect the clamp at the other end of the positive (red)
cable to the positive (+) terminal of the booster battery.
3
Connect a negative (black) cable clamp to the negative
(–) terminal of the booster battery.
4
400
Connect a positive (red) jumper cable clamp to the
positive (+) terminal of the discharged battery.
Connect the clamp at the other end of the negative (black)
cable to a solid, stationary, unpainted metallic point (such
as shown in the illustration) away from the battery. Do not
connect it to or near any part that moves when the engine
is cranked.
CAUTION
When making the connections, to avoid serious injury,
do not lean over the battery or accidentally let the
jumper cables or clamps touch anything except the
correct battery terminals or the ground.
5. Start your engine in the normal way. After starting, run it at
about 2000 rpm for several minutes with the accelerator pedal
lightly depressed.
6. Carefully disconnect the cables in the exact reverse order:
the negative cable and then the positive cable.
7. Carefully dispose of the battery cover cloths which may now
contain sulfuric acid.
8. If removed, replace all the battery vent plugs.
If the cause of your battery discharging is not apparent (for
example, lights left on), you should have it checked at your
Lexus dealer.
If the first start attempt is not successful...
Check that the clamp on the jumper cables are tight. Recharge
the discharged battery with the jumper cables connected for
several minutes and restart your engine in the normal way.
If another attempt is not successful, the battery may be
depleted. Have it checked at your Lexus dealer.
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
IF YOU CANNOT INCREASE
ENGINE SPEED
If engine speed does not increase when the accelerator
pedal is depressed, the electronic throttle control system
may be faulty. Move the vehicle to a safe place by means
of creeping and call a Lexus dealer for assistance:
1. Depress the brake pedal and shift to the “D” position.
2. Gradually release the brake pedal, and the vehicle starts to
move by creeping. After arriving at a safe place, stop the
vehicle and call a Lexus dealer for assistance.
CAUTION
The above method of moving the vehicle is for
emergency.
Use it only for moving minimum
distances to a safe place.
Be especially careful to prevent erroneous pedal
operation.
IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS
If your engine coolant temperature gauge indicates
overheating, if you experience a loss of power, or if you
hear a loud knocking or pinging noise, the engine has
probably overheated.
When the engine overheats
Pull safely off the road, stop the vehicle and turn on your
emergency flashers. Put the transmission in “P” and apply the
parking brake.
A: If steam is coming from your engine:
Turn off the engine. Leave the hood closed until there is no sign
of steam or coolant. Your engine could have been seriously
damaged already. Call your Lexus dealer for assistance.
CAUTION
To help avoid personal injury, keep the hood closed until
there is no steam. Escaping steam or coolant is sign of
very high pressure.
401
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
B: If no steam is coming from your engine:
Leave the engine running and turn off the air conditioning.
Check the following.
Is the coolant in the acceptable range?
1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping a straight line.
Move cautiously off the road to a safe place - well away
from the traffic. Avoid stopping on the center divider of
a highway. Park on a level spot with firm ground.
Is the engine drive belt O.K.?
2. Stop the engine and turn on your emergency flashers.
Is the cooling fan operating?
CAUTION
3. Firmly set the parking brake and put the transmission
in “P”.
When the engine is running, keep hands and clothing
away from the moving fan and engine drive belt.
4. Have everyone get out of the vehicle on the side away
from traffic.
Do not attempt to remove the radiator cap when the
engine and radiator are hot. Serious injury could
result from scalding hot fluid and steam blown out
under pressure.
5. Read the following instructions thoroughly.
If the cooling fan is not operating or the coolant is not in the
acceptable range, turn off the engine and call your Lexus
dealer.
If both conditions are O.K., after the engine coolant
temperature has cooled to normal, continue driving your
vehicle.
If the engine coolant temperature does not cool down, or your
vehicle overheats again, have it checked as soon as possible
by your Lexus dealer.
402
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE
CAUTION
When jacking, be sure to observe the following to
reduce the possibility of personal injury:
Follow jacking instructions.
Do not put any part of your body under a vehicle
supported by a jack. Otherwise, personal injury
may occur.
Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle
is supported by the jack.
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
Stop the vehicle on a level firm ground, firmly
set the parking brake and put the transmission
in “P”. Block the wheel diagonally opposite to
the one being changed if necessary.
Make sure to set the jack properly in the jack
point. Raising the vehicle with jack improperly
positioned will damage the vehicle or may allow
the vehicle to fall off the jack and cause
personal injury.
Never get under the vehicle when the vehicle is
supported by the jack alone.
Use the jack only for lifting your vehicle during
wheel changing.
Do not raise the vehicle with someone in the
vehicle.
When raising the vehicle, do not put an object
on or under the jack.
Raise the vehicle only high enough to remove
and change the tire.
For vehicles equipped with the height control
switch, be sure to turn the ignition switch off
before jacking. If this is not done, the vehicle
height adjustment function will operate, which
may cause an accident.
NOTICE
Do not continue driving with a deflated tire.
Driving even a short distance can damage a tire
and wheel beyond repair.
403
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
Access to spare tire
40L080
40L079
1. Pull up the deck board.
2. Lift up the back side of the board and secure the
board by hooking the lever at the top of the trunk lid
opening as shown.
Make sure the board is secured and does not fall down.
404
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
40L081
When closing the board, replace the hook also in its
original position as shown.
NOTICE
If you close the trunk lid with the board hooked,
the hook may be damaged.
40L051b
1 Tool box
2 Towing eyelet (For emergency towing)
3 Jack handle 4 Spare tire 5 Jack
1. Get the tool, jack and spare tire.
To prepare yourself for an emergency, you should
familiarize yourself with the use of the jack and each tool,
and their storage locations.
405
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
40L052
1 Joint
2 When removing the jack, turn the joint by hand in
the “contract” direction until the jack is free.
3
406
When storing, turn the joint by hand in the
“expand” direction until the jack is firmly secured
to prevent it from flying forward during a collision
or sudden braking.
40L160
To remove the spare tire:
1 Remove the spare tire cover.
2 Loosen the bolt and remove it.
When storing the spare tire, place it with the inner side
of the wheel facing up. Then bolt the tire in place and
install the spare tire cover to prevent the tire from flying
forward during a collision or sudden braking.
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
40L169
40L161
2. Block the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire to
keep the vehicle from rolling when it is jacked up.
3. Loosen all the wheel nuts.
When blocking a wheel, place a wheel block in front of
one of the front wheels or behind one of the rear wheels.
Turn the wheel nuts counterclockwise to loosen them.
To get maximum leverage, fit the wrench to the nut so
that the handle is on the right side, as shown above.
Grab the wrench near the end of the handle and pull up
on the handle. Be careful that the wrench does not slip
off the nut.
Always loosen the wheel nuts before raising the vehicle.
Do not remove the nuts yet - just unscrew them about
one-half turn.
CAUTION
Never use oil or grease on the bolts or nuts. The
nuts may loosen and the wheels may fall off, which
could cause a serious accident.
407
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
40L170
4. Position the jack at the jack points as shown.
Make sure the jack is positioned on a level and solid
surface.
40L162
5. After making sure no one is in the vehicle, raise it
high enough so that the spare tire can be installed.
Allow for the fact that you need more ground clearance
when putting on the spare tire than when removing the
flat tire.
To raise the vehicle, insert the jack handle into the jack
(it is a loose fit) and turn it clockwise. As the jack touches
the vehicle and begins to lift, double-check that it is
properly positioned.
CAUTION
Never get under the vehicle when the vehicle is
supported by the jack alone.
408
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
40L163
40L164
6. Remove the wheel nuts and remove the flat tire.
7. Remove the wheel ornament.
Lift the flat tire straight off and put it aside.
When installing the alloy wheels, remove the wheel
ornament from the flat tire and replace it on the newly
installed tire.
409
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
40L165
Before putting on the wheel, remove any corrosion on
the mounting surfaces with a wire brush or such.
Installation of wheels without good metal- to- metal
contact at the mounting surface can cause wheel nuts to
loosen and eventually cause a wheel to come off while
driving.
40L166
8. Reinstall all the wheel nuts finger tight.
Align the holes in the wheel with the bolts. Then lift up
the wheel and get at least the top bolt started through its
hole. Wiggle the tire and press it back over the other
bolts.
Reinstall the wheel nuts and tighten them as much as
you can by hand. Press the tire back and see if you can
tighten them more.
CAUTION
Never use oil or grease on the bolts or nuts. Doing
so may lead to overtightening the nuts and
damaging the bolts. The nuts may loosen and the
wheels may fall off, which could cause a serious
accident. If there is oil or grease on any bolt or nut,
clean it.
410
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
40L167
Have the wheel nuts tightened with torque
wrench to 103 N·m (10.5 kgf·m, 76 ft·lbf.), as
soon as possible after changing wheels.
Otherwise, the nuts may loosen and the wheels
may fall off, which could cause a serious
accident.
10. After changing the wheel, check the air pressure
of the replaced tire. Stow all the tools, jack and flat
tire securely.
9. Lower the vehicle completely and tighten the
wheel nuts.
Turn the jack handle counterclockwise to lower the
vehicle.
Use only the wheel nut wrench to tighten the nuts. Do
not use other tools or any additional leverage other than
your hands, such as a hammer, pipe or your foot. Make
sure the wrench is securely engaged over the nut.
Tighten each nut a little at a time in the order shown.
Repeat the process until all the nuts are tight.
If the pressure of the replaced tire is low, drive slowly to
the nearest service station and fill to the correct
pressure.
Do not forget to reinstall the tire valve cap as dirt and
moisture could get into the valve core and possibly
cause air leakage. If the cap is missing, put a new one
on as soon as possible.
This is the same procedure for changing or rotating your
tires.
CAUTION
When lowering the vehicle, make sure all
portions of your body and all other persons
around will not be injured as the vehicle is
lowered to the ground.
411
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
CAUTION
Before driving, make sure all the tools, jack and
flat tire are securely in place in their storage
location to reduce the possibility of personal
injury during a collision or sudden braking.
When reinstalling a standard tire, take due care
in handling the ornament to avoid unexpected
personal injury.
IF YOUR VEHICLE BECOMES
STUCK
If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow, mud, sand, etc.,
then you may attempt to rock the vehicle free by moving
it forward and backward.
Turn off the traction control system to become unstuck to
allow the tires to spin enough to remove the vehicle from
the obstruction. (For details, see “Vehicle stability control
system” on page 362.)
CAUTION
Do not attempt to rock the vehicle free by moving it
forward and backward if people or objects are anywhere
near the vehicle. During the rocking operation the
vehicle may suddenly move forward or backward as it
becomes unstuck, causing injury or damage to nearby
people or objects.
412
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
NOTICE
If you rock your vehicle, observe the following
precautions to prevent damage to the transmission and
other parts.
Do not depress the accelerator pedal while shifting
the selector lever or before the transmission is
completely shifted to forward or reverse gear.
Do not race the engine and avoid spinning the
wheels.
If your vehicle remains stuck after rocking the vehicle
several times, consider other ways such as towing.
IF YOUR VEHICLE NEEDS TO BE
TOWED
If towing is necessary, we recommend you to have it done
by your Lexus dealer or a commercial tow truck service.
In consultation with them, have your vehicle towed using
either (a) or (b).
(a) Towing with a wheel lift type truck
(b) Using a flat bed truck
(c) Never tow with a sling type truck
Only when you cannot receive a towing service from a
Lexus dealer or commercial tow truck service, tow your
vehicle carefully in accordance with the instructions
given in “(d) Emergency towing” on page 417.
Proper equipment will help ensure that your vehicle is not
damaged while being towed. Commercial operators are
generally aware of the state/provincial and local laws
pertaining to towing.
Your vehicle can be damaged if it is towed incorrectly.
Although most operators know the correct procedure, it is
possible to make a mistake. To avoid damage to your vehicle,
make sure the following precautions are observed. If
necessary, show this page to the tow truck driver.
TOWING PRECAUTIONS:
Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by the
state/provincial and local laws. The wheels and axle on the
ground must be in good condition. If they are damaged, use
a towing dolly.
413
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
(a) Towing with a wheel lift type truck
From rear
From front
40L171
40L172
Place the ignition switch in the “ACC” position.
Use a towing dolly under the rear wheels.
NOTICE
NOTICE
Never tow a vehicle from the front with rear wheels on
the ground, as this may cause serious damage to the
transmission.
414
Do not tow with the key removed or in the “LOCK”
position, as the steering lock mechanism is not
strong enough to hold the front wheels straight.
When lifting wheels, take care to ensure adequate
ground clearance for towing at the opposite end of
the raised vehicle. Otherwise, the bumper and/or
underbody of the towed vehicle will be damaged
during towing.
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
(b) Using a flat bed truck
40L168
40L173
A Front
Tie down points
B Rear
If your Lexus is transported by a flat bed, it should be tied
down at locations A and B as shown above.
40L076
40L174c
Rear eyelets
415
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
NOTICE
(c) Towing with a sling type truck
Do not use the rear eyelets.
Before your vehicle is transported by flat bed, the
height control switch, if so equipped, must be in the
“HIGH” mode.
Tie down angle
40L175
40L176
NOTICE
Do not tow with a sling type truck, either from the front
or rear. This may cause body damage.
If you use chains or wires to tie down your vehicle, the
angles shaded black must be at 45.
416
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
(d) Emergency towing
A driver must be in the vehicle to steer it and operate the
brakes.
Towing in this manner may be done only on hard-surfaced
roads for a short distance and at low speeds. Also, the wheels,
axles, drive train, steering and brakes must all be in good
condition.
40L217
If towing is necessary, we recommend you to have it done
by your Lexus dealer or a commercial tow truck service.
If towing service is not available in an emergency, your
vehicle may be temporarily towed by a cable or chain
secured to the emergency towing eyelet. Use extreme
caution when towing the vehicle.
To install the front towing eyelet, see “Installing towing eyelet”
on page 419.
CAUTION
Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle. Avoid
sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which would
place excessive stress on the emergency towing eyelet
and towing cable or chain. The eyelet and towing cable
or chain may break and cause serious injury or damage.
NOTICE
Use only a cable or chain specifically intended for use
in towing vehicles. Securely fasten the cable or chain
to the towing eyelet provided.
NOTICE
Before towing, release the parking brake and put the
transmission in “N”. The ignition switch must be in “ACC”
(engine off) or “ON” (engine running).
Only use specified towing eyelet; otherwise your
vehicle may be damaged.
CAUTION
Never tow a vehicle from the rear with four wheels on
the ground. This may cause serious damage to the
transmission.
If the engine is not running, the power assist for the
brakes and steering will not work so steering and
braking will be much harder than usual.
417
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
Emergency towing eyelet precautions:
Before emergency towing, check that the eyelet is not
broken or damaged and that the installation bolts are not
loose.
Fasten the towing cable or chain securely to the eyelet.
Do not jerk the eyelet. Apply steady and even force.
To avoid damaging the eyelet, do not pull from the side or
at a vertical angle. Always pull straight ahead.
CAUTION
If the emergency towing eyelet is used to get out when
your vehicle becomes stuck in the mud, sand or other
condition from which the vehicle cannot be driven out
under its own power, make sure to observe the
precautions mentioned below. Otherwise, excessive
stress will be put on the eyelet and the towing cable or
chain may break, causing serious injury or damage.
If the towing vehicle can hardly move, do not forcibly
continue the towing. Contact your Lexus dealer or a
commercial tow truck service for assistance.
418
Tow the vehicle as straight ahead as possible.
Keep away from the vehicle during towing.
Tips for towing a stuck vehicle:
The following methods are effective to use when your
vehicle is stuck in the mud, sand or other condition from
which the vehicle cannot be driven out under its own
power. Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle. In
addition, keep away from the vehicles and towing cable or
chain when towing.
Remove the sand and soil in the front and the back of the
tires.
Place stones or wood under the tires.
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
(e) Installing towing eyelet
40L180
40L178a
3. Tighten the towing eyelet securely by a wheel nut wrench.
1. Remove the towing eyelet cover on the front bumper by
pushing the right side of the cover.
CAUTION
When installing the eyelet on the vehicle, be sure to
tighten the eyelet securely. If the eyelet is loose, it may
come off when being towed and result in death or
serious injury.
40L179
2. Use the towing eyelet in the trunk. Secure it to the hole on
the bumper by turning clockwise. (For the eyelet location, see
page 405.)
419
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
IF YOU CANNOT SHIFT
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
SELECTOR LEVER
If you cannot shift the selector lever out of “P” position to
other positions even though the brake pedal is depressed,
use the shift lock override button as follows:
40L215
1. Turn the ignition switch to “LOCK” or “ACC”. Make sure the
parking brake is applied.
3. Push down the shift lock override button. You can shift out
of “P” position only while pushing the button.
40L214
4. Shift into “N” position.
Insert the cover. Start the engine. For your safety, keep the
brake pedal depressed.
Be sure to have the system checked by your Lexus dealer as
soon as possible.
2. Pry up the cover with a flat- bladed screwdriver or
equivalent.
420
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
LEXUS LINK SYSTEM
(U.S.A. ONLY)
Safety information for the Lexus Link System
Important!: Read this information before using the Lexus
Link System.
EXPOSURE TO RADIO FREQUENCY SIGNALS
40L208
The Lexus Link System is an in-vehicle communications
service that provides you with enhanced safety, security
and convenience. With an active subscription you can
push the “SERVICES” button for operator assistance or in
an emergency situation such as a vehicle accident (in
which the airbag was activated), you will automatically be
connected to the Lexus Link Call Center which will assist
you and/or send help 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
The Lexus Link System can also record your voice or your
conversation with the Lexus Link Call Center Advisor.
The Lexus Link System to be installed in your vehicle is a low
power radio transmitter and receiver. When the ignition is
turned to the “ON” position, it receives and also sends out radio
frequency (RF) signals.
In August 1996, the Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) adopted RF exposure guidelines with safety levels for
mobile wireless phones. Those guidelines are consistent with
the safety standards previously set by both U.S. and
international standards bodies.
ANSI C95.1 (1992)*1
NCRP Report 86 (1986)*2
ICNIRP (1996)*3
*1: American National Standards Institute
*2: National Council on Radiation Protection and
Measurements
*3: International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation
Protection
421
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
Those standards were based on comprehensive and periodic
evaluations of the relevant scientific literature. Over 120
scientists, engineers, and physicians from universities,
government health agencies, and industry reviewed the
available body of research to develop the ANSI Standard
(C95.1).
The design of the Lexus Link System complies with the FCC
guidelines in addition to those standards.
Information for using the Lexus Link System
The Lexus Link System is a subscription-based service. To
obtain any of the Lexus Link services you must have enrolled
with the Lexus Link Call Center and have an active
subscription. It is important to be aware that an active
subscription is required to receive safety and security services.
To learn more about your subscription status or how to renew
or extend your subscription, please push the “SERVICES”
button and speak to the Lexus Link Advisor, or you may dial toll
free 1- 800- 25 Lexus (Toll- Free) (1- 800- 255- 3987) and
select the option for Lexus Link. If you are not enrolled, you will
hear the explanation about Lexus Link System. The actual
message is shown on “Audible voice prompts” on page 431.
If you push the “SERVICES” button again, the services
enrollment call will be announced. To cancel the enrollment
call, push the “SERVICES” button one more time.
NOTICE
This system is only operational in GPS (Global
Positioning System) and analog cellular coverage
areas. Services may not be available in an area where
the GPS and analog cellular phone signals cannot be
received.
422
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
40L185a
NOTICE
Observe the following instructions, or reception by GPS
antenna may be affected.
Do not place luggage (especially metallic type) on the
package tray.
Do not apply window tint (especially a conductive or
metallic tape) by yourself. Consult with your Lexus
dealer if you need to add window tint.
40L209
1 Lexus Link System indicator light (green or amber)
2 Lexus Link System warning light (red)
When the ignition is turned to the “ON” position, the warning
light (red) should come on for a few seconds, and go off. The
indicator light (amber) comes on for a few seconds and the
color of the indicator changes from amber to green. This
means the Lexus Link System is operating properly. The green
indicator light should remain on to inform you that you have an
active subscription. If your Lexus Link subscription has
expired, the green indicator light should go off. To activate your
Lexus Link System, press the “SERVICES” button. To learn
more about your subscription status or how to renew or extend
your subscription, please push the “SERVICES” button to
speak to a Lexus Link Advisor, or you may dial toll free
1-800-25 Lexus (Toll-Free) (1-800-255-3987) and select
the option for Lexus Link. If problems are detected in the Lexus
Link System, you will hear “A Lexus Link System error has
been detected. Please contact your Lexus dealer.” The
warning light should come on. If you hear this message, take
your vehicle to your Lexus dealer.
423
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
In some cases, even if your subscription has expired, the green
indicator light may come on. This is due to the time delay
required to process the deactivation of your Lexus Link
System. During this period, when you push the “SERVICES”
button, your call will be forwarded to enrollment. Once the
deactivation process has been completed, the indicator light
will go off.
When you push the “– VOL +” button on the “–” side
immediately followed by the “PLAY” button, you can hear an
explanation about the Lexus Link System. However, this
function is not available when you are recording or hearing a
playback. See “Audible voice prompts” on page 431 for a
written version of this recorder message.
The basic subscriber service package is available free of
charge for the first year.
NOTICE
The green indicator light is the primary means to let you
know the status of your subscription. It is important to
be aware that an active subscription is required to
receive safety and security services. If the green
indicator light is disabled, your subscription has
expired. If you would like to renew your subscription for
Lexus Link services, please contact Lexus Link Call
Center by pushing the “SERVICES” button twice, dial
toll free 1-800-25 Lexus (Toll-Free) (1-800-255-3987)
and select the option for Lexus Link, or contact your
Lexus dealer.
424
NOTICE
Do not remove the Lexus Link fuse and wiring harness
with the ignition on, or an emergency call will be placed
to the Lexus Link Call Center.
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
Automatic notifications
If an airbag deploys, an emergency signal is sent
automatically to the Lexus Link Call Center. In your vehicle, the
system announces “Placing an emergency call to Lexus Link
Center.” In response to the signal, the Lexus Link Advisor will
attempt to communicate with you first. If the Advisor cannot get
any response from you, the Advisor will locate your vehicle
through the GPS, call the nearest emergency services
provider, describe the situation and your location. If necessary,
the Advisor will transfer your call to the emergency services
operator.
If the theft deterrent system on your vehicle is activated,
the Lexus Link System on your vehicle will automatically call
the Lexus Link Call Center. The Advisor will attempt to contact
you to determine whether the alarm is valid.
NOTICE
Once the emergency button is pushed, an emergency
call cannot be cancelled.
If your vehicle is in area where the GPS signal is weak
or cannot be received in the Lexus Link System, the
color of the indicator light will change from green to
amber. The system is not in operation.
This system is only operational in GPS and analog
cellular coverage areas.
Upon subscription
expiration, all Lexus Link services (i.e. automatic
notification, emergency call functions, service call
functions, door locking/unlocking function) are
deactivated.
If you report to the Lexus Link Call Center that your vehicle has
been stolen, the Advisor will locate, track and provide location
information to the appropriate law enforcement authority. To
protect subscriber privacy, the Lexus Link Call Center will not
provide the location of a vehicle to anyone other than a law
enforcement authority.
If you accidentally activate the vehicle alarm, push the
“UNLOCK” button on the wireless remote control key within 55
seconds after the alarm was set off, or insert the key into the
door keyhole or ignition switch. The Lexus Link System will
cancel the theft call.
425
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
Manual emergency calling
NOTICE
If your vehicle is in area where the GPS signal is weak
or cannot be received in the Lexus Link System, the
color of the indicator light will change from green to
amber. The system is not in operation.
40L210
You can place an emergency call manually. Open the
cover and push the emergency button. You will hear
“Placing an emergency call to Lexus Link Center.” Upon
reception of your call, the Advisor will locate your vehicle
and contact you to assess the situation. If necessary, the
Advisor will alert the nearest emergency service provider.
This emergency call should only be made in
life-threatening situations.
If your vehicle is stolen, call the Lexus Link Call Center at
1- 800- 25- LEXUS (Toll- Free) (1- 800- 255- 3987). The
Center will locate, track and provide location information to the
appropriate police authority. To protect subscriber privacy, the
Lexus Link Call Center will not provide the location of a vehicle
to anyone other than a law enforcement authority.
426
This system is only operational in GPS and analog
cellular coverage areas.
Upon subscription
expiration, all Lexus Link services (i.e. automatic
notification, emergency call functions, service call
functions, door locking/unlocking function) are
deactivated.
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
Other Services
40L211
If any problem concerning the Lexus Link System occurs
during driving, the system will announce “A Lexus Link System
error has been detected. Please contact your Lexus dealer.”
If you hear this message, take your vehicle to your Lexus
dealer.
Lexus Link services may not be available in the following
cases.
The components or wire harnesses for the system are
damaged.
The Lexus Link Call Center is not operational.
The antenna does not work properly due to vehicle damage.
When you push the “SERVICES” button, you will hear
“Calling the Lexus Link Center”. When the Advisor
receives your location and ID from the system, the
Advisor provides you with the service. The services
provided will depend on the level of service package
selected.
For details about various services that are available, contact
your Lexus dealer, or push the “SERVICES” button and speak
to the Lexus Link Advisor, or you may dial toll free 1-800-25
Lexus (Toll-Free) (1-800-255-3987) and select the option for
Lexus Link.
In a weak or non-analog cellular coverage area.
Your vehicle is in area where the GPS signal is weak or
cannot be received.
The Lexus Link subscription has expired.
NOTICE
Upon subscription expiration, all Lexus Link services
(i.e. automatic notification, emergency call functions,
service call functions) are deactivated.
To cancel a services call, push the “SERVICES” button a
second time. “Lexus Link call cancelled” will be announced.
427
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
Door Locking/Unlocking by Lexus Link
System
Memo record
The Lexus Link System will allow your vehicle to be locked
and unlocked remotely.
If you find that your vehicle has not been locked, call the Lexus
Link Call Center 1- 800- 25- LEXUS (Toll- Free)
(1- 800- 255- 3987), the Lexus Link Advisor can assist in
locking your vehicle.
40L212
In case you are locked out, call the Lexus Link Call Center
1-800-25 Lexus (Toll-Free) (1-800-255-3987), a Lexus Link
Advisor can assist in unlocking your vehicle.
NOTICE
You must provide the Lexus Link operator with your
Lexus Link PIN (Personal Identification Number ) or
personal security word, before they lock/unlock your
vehicle. However, the Lexus Link System will not be
able to lock or unlock your vehicle if it has been parked
for 48 hours or more after the ignition is turned off.
Upon subscription expiration, all Lexus Link services
(i.e. automatic notification, emergency call functions,
service call functions, door locking/unlocking function)
are deactivated.
428
1 “REC” button 2 “PLAY” button
3 “– VOL +” button
During a service call, you can record a conversation with the
Lexus Link Call Center Advisor. This function is very
convenient for drivers so they do not have to take notes while
driving.
“REC” button: Push this button to record information or a
conversation with Lexus Link Call Center. To stop recording,
push the button again. Up to 5 minutes of recording time is
available.
When you push the “REC” button, all previous messages are
deleted and the system begins recording your new message.
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
At the start of recording, “Recording” will be announced. At the
end of recording, you will hear “Recording complete”. If there
are only 15 seconds left for recording, two chimes sound. If the
recording memory is full, “Recording time exceeded” will be
announced and recording will be terminated.
If you push this button while you are hearing a playback of
recording, it terminates the playback and recording will start.
At this time, the previous recording will be erased.
“PLAY” button: Push this button to play the recorded
conversation. “Playback Complete” is announced when the
playback is complete. To stop the operation, push the button
again. “Playback Cancelled” is announced. The volume has
a total of seven positions/levels available.
“– VOL +” button: Push this button on either side to adjust
the volume. When you change the volume, one chime sounds.
Lexus Link System indicator and warning
lights
40L209
1 Lexus Link System indicator light (green or amber)
2 Lexus Link System warning light (red)
429
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
When the green indicator light remains on, you have an
active subscription. You can obtain any of the Lexus Link
services.
When the green indicator light starts flashing, the Lexus
Link Call Center is connected.
When the color of the indicator light changes from green
to amber, the GPS signal is weak or cannot be received.
If something is placed on the package tray, remove it. It may
be interfering the GPS signal reception.
If nothing is placed on the package tray and the amber
indicator light remains on for about 10 minutes or more, contact
your Lexus dealer.
When the engine is turned off and then restarted, the indicator
color changes to green. However, if the color of the indicator
light changes to amber again after 10 minutes or more, contact
your Lexus dealer.
When the warning light remains on, there is any problem
with the Lexus Link system.
When the indicator and warning lights go off, your
subscription has expired.
430
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
Audible voice prompts
The following table shows the voice responses from the Lexus Link System.
Voice phrase: Explanation about Lexus Link System
This is the Lexus Link system.
Integrating global positioning satellite
and wireless communication technology
into your Lexus and providing enhanced
safety, security, and convenience. At
the touch of a button, or automatically in
the event of an accident, you are
connected to a Lexus Link Advisor who
will assist you - 24 hours a day, 7 days
a week where GPS and cellular
coverage is available. The Lexus Link
System also has an audio recorder
allowing you to record reminders to
yourself or information from a Lexus
Link Advisor.
To contact a Lexus Link Advisor, press
the “SERVICES” button. The Lexus
Link System will inform the advisor of
your vehicle’s current location and your
identity. The advisors can handle a wide
variety of services, such as giving
directions to shops, gas stations, ATMs,
restaurants and roadside assistance
with location. Services available will
depend on the service package you
selected.
In an emergency, press the emergency
services button on your Lexus Link
console.
It is marked with a red
ambulance. Upon receiving your call, the
advisor will assess the situation and, if
necessary, alert the nearest emergency
services provider. The emergency button
should only be used in life threatening
situations.
If your Lexus detects that an airbag
deployment may have occurred, the
Lexus Link System will automatically
send an emergency message to the
Lexus Link Call Center.
The system will also automatically
contact the call center if the security
system alarm goes off. An advisor will
first contact you to determine if the
alarm is valid. Upon your confirmation,
the advisor will then provide the vehicle
location to the police.
If you accidentally set off the alarm,
press the remote door unlock, or insert
your key in the door lock or ignition
within 55 seconds. This will prevent the
Lexus Link System from placing a theft
call.
The volume control lets you adjust the
volume level for Lexus Link calls,
system prompts, and memos. Press the
plus key to increase volume and the
minus key to decrease it.
To record a memo or a call, press the key
labeled “REC”. When you are finished
recording, press the “REC” button again.
To listen to the memo, press the “PLAY”
button. You can record one message up
to five minutes long. When you record a
new memo, all of the previous memos will
be erased.
For more detailed information on the
use, features and limitations of this
system, please consult your Lexus Link
Owner’s Manual.
431
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
Voice phrase
432
Description
Placing an emergency call
to Lexus Link Center
Emergency call is placed.
Calling the Lexus Link
Center
Service call is placed.
Lexus Link Call cancelled
Service call is cancelled.
Previous attempt to call the
Lexus Link Center was
unsuccessful.
The attempt to call the
Lexus Link Center was
unsuccessful.
Recording
The recording will start.
Recording complete
The recording is complete.
Recording time exceeded
The recording memory is
now full.
Playback complete
The playback is complete.
Playback cancelled
The playback is cancelled.
A Lexus Link System error
has been detected. Please
contact your Lexus dealer.
An error has been detected
with the Lexus Link System.
Contact your Lexus dealer.
Voice phrase
Description
Your Lexus Link
subscription has expired.
Services are not available.
You operated a Lexus Link
button despite an expired
subscription. Your Lexus
Link subscription has
expired, push the “Services”
button a second time to
reactivate.
No cellular service
available. Unable to
contact the Call Center.
In cellular coverage areas
without analog coverage,
you cannot use the Lexus
Link System. Unable to
contact the Lexus Link Call
Center until you have
cellular coverage.
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
Lexus Link transceiver antenna
40L186a
CAUTION
Persons who use a medical appliance like a pacemaker
should not touch or come in close contact with the
antenna while the vehicle ignition is on. Otherwise, the
analog cellular signals may produce improper
operation of a medical appliance.
NOTICE
The Lexus Link transceiver antenna is removable. Before
taking the vehicle to an automatic car wash, disconnect
the antenna by unscrewing it from the roof mount.
When you remove the antenna, make sure the ignition is
turned off.
Use only the supplied or an approved antenna. Unauthorized
antennas, modifications, or attachments could damage the
Lexus Link System and may violate FCC regulations.
Do not contact with the antenna, this may affect
quality of transceiver’s operation and may cause the
unit to operate at a higher power level than needed.
If you forget reattaching the Lexus Link transceiver
antenna, the Lexus Link System may not function
properly.
To prevent damage to the antenna, make sure it is
removed before driving your vehicle through an
automatic car wash.
433
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
IF YOU LOSE YOUR KEYS OR
LOCK YOURSELF OUT
You can purchase a new key at your Lexus dealer if you
can give them the key number and master key.
Even if you lose only one key, contact your Lexus dealer to
make a new key. If you lose all your master keys, you cannot
make new keys; the whole engine immobilizer system must be
replaced.
See the suggestion given in “Keys” on page 10.
You can use the wireless remote control system with the new
key. Contact your Lexus dealer for detailed information.
If your keys are locked in the vehicle and you cannot get a
duplicate, many Lexus dealers can still open the door for you
using special tools. If your vehicle is equipped with Lexus Link
System, call the Lexus Link Call Center 1-800-25-LEXUS
(Toll-Free) (1-800-255-3987). Once you provide the Lexus
Link Call Center Advisor with your Lexus Link PIN (Personal
Identification Number), or personal security word, they will
unlock your vehicle.
434
NOTICE
You must provide the Lexus Link operator with your
Lexus Link PIN (Personal Identification Number ) or
personal security word, before they lock/unlock your
vehicle. However, the Lexus Link System will not be
able to lock or unlock your vehicle if it has been parked
for 48 hours or more after the ignition is turned off.
Upon subscription expiration, all Lexus Link services
(i.e. automatic notification, emergency call functions,
service call functions) are deactivated.
If you must break a window to get in, we suggest breaking the
smallest side window because it is the least expensive to
replace. Be extremely cautious to avoid glass cuts.
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
435
SECTION
5
MAINTENANCE
Maintenance
Maintenance requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Does your vehicle need repairing? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emissions inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
For
to
436
scheduled
maintenance
the
“Owner’s
Manual
Maintenance”.
information,
Supplement
437
438
441
442
please
refer
/
Scheduled
MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
Your Lexus vehicle has been designed to have fewer
maintenance requirements with longer service intervals to
save both your time and money. However, each regular
maintenance as well as day-to-day care is more important
than ever before to ensure smooth, trouble-free, safe, and
economical driving.
It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure the specified
maintenance, including general maintenance services, is
performed. Note that both the new vehicle and emission
control system warranties specify that proper maintenance
and care must be performed. See “Owner’s Guide”, “Owner’s
Manual Supplement” or “Warranty Booklet” for complete
warranty information.
General maintenance
General maintenance items are those day- to- day care
practices that are important to your vehicle for proper
operation. It is the owner’s responsibility to ensure that the
general maintenance items are performed regularly.
Scheduled maintenance
The scheduled maintenance items listed in the “Owner’s
Manual Supplement / Scheduled Maintenance” are those
required to be serviced at regular intervals.
For details of your maintenance schedule, read the “Owner’s
Manual Supplement / Scheduled Maintenance”.
It is recommended that only genuine Lexus parts be used
for maintenance or for the repair of the emission control
system.
The owner may elect to use non-Lexus supplied parts for
replacement purposes without invalidating the emission
control system warranty. However, use of replacement
parts which are not of equivalent quality may impair the
effectiveness of the emission control systems.
You may also elect to have maintenance, replacement, or
repair of the emission control devices and system
performed by any automotive repair establishment or
individual without invalidating this warranty. See
“Owner’s Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement” or
“Warranty Booklet” for complete warranty information.
These checks or inspections can be done either by yourself or
your Lexus dealer.
437
MAINTENANCE
Where to go for service?
Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be
performed at the intervals specified. It is recommended that
any problem you notice be brought to the attention of your
Lexus dealer or qualified service shop for their advice.
You can be confident that your Lexus dealer’s service
department performs the best job to meet the maintenance
requirements of your vehicle - reliably and economically.
CAUTION
Your copy of the repair order is proof that all required
maintenance has been performed for warranty coverage. If
any problems should arise with your vehicle while under
warranty, your Lexus dealer will promptly take care of it. Again,
be sure to keep a copy of the repair order for any service
performed on your Lexus.
What about do-it-yourself maintenance?
Many of the maintenance items are easy to do yourself, if you
have a little mechanical ability and a few basic automotive
tools. Simple instructions for how to perform them are
presented in Section 6.
If you are a skilled do-it-yourself mechanic, the Lexus service
manuals are recommended. Please be aware that
do- it- yourself maintenance can affect your warranty
coverage. See “Owner ’s Guide”, “Owner ’s Manual
Supplement” or “Warranty Booklet” for the details.
438
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
Lexus technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up
to date with the latest service information through technical
bulletins, service tips, and in-dealership training programs.
They are well informed about the operation of all the systems
on your vehicle.
Make these checks only with adequate ventilation if you
run the engine.
Engine compartment
Items listed below should be checked from time to time,
e.g. each time when refueling.
Washer fluid
Make sure there is sufficient fluid in the tank. See page 514 for
additional information.
Engine coolant level
Make sure the coolant level is between the Upper and Lower
lines on the see-through reservoir when the engine is cold.
See page 466 for additional information.
Radiator, condenser and hoses
Check that the front of the radiator and condenser are clean
and not blocked with leaves, dirt, or insects. See page 468 for
additional information.
MAINTENANCE
Battery
Vehicle interior
Your Lexus has a maintenance free battery. You do not have
to add distilled water. For longer life of the battery, however,
see page 507 for additional information.
Items listed below should be checked regularly, e.g. while
performing periodic services, cleaning the vehicle, etc.
Brake fluid level
Make sure the brake fluid level is correct. See page 476 for
additional information.
Engine oil level
Check the level on the dipstick with the engine turned off and
the vehicle parked on a level spot. See page 463 for additional
information.
Power steering fluid level
Check the level through the reservoir. The level should be in
the “HOT” or “COLD” range depending on the fluid
temperature. See page 477 for additional information.
Exhaust system
If you notice any change in the sound of the exhaust or smell
exhaust fumes, have the cause located and corrected
immediately. (See “Engine exhaust cautions” on page 296.)
Lights
Make sure the headlights, stop lights, tail lights, turn signal
lights, and other lights are working. Check headlight aim.
Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers
Check that all service reminder indicators and warning
buzzers function properly.
Steering wheel
Check that it has the specified free play. Be alert for changes
in steering condition, such as hard steering, excessive free
play or strange noise.
Seats
Check that all front seat controls such as seat adjusters,
seatback recliner, etc. operate smoothly. Check that the head
restraints move up and down smoothly and that the locks hold
securely in any latched position.
Seat belts
Check that the seat belt system such as buckles, retractors
and anchors operate properly and smoothly. Make sure the
belt webbing is not cut, frayed, worn or damaged.
439
MAINTENANCE
Accelerator pedal
Vehicle exterior
Check the pedal for smooth operation and uneven pedal effort
or catching.
Items listed below should be performed from time to time,
unless otherwise specified.
Brake pedal
Fluid leaks
Check the pedal for smooth operation and the proper
clearance and free play. Check the brake booster function.
Check underneath for leaking fuel, oil, water or other fluid after
the vehicle has been parked for a while. If you smell fuel fumes
or notice any leak, have the cause found and corrected
immediately.
Brakes
In a safe place, check that the brakes do not pull to one side
when applied.
Parking brake
Check that the pedal has the proper travel and that, on a safe
incline, your vehicle is held securely with only the parking
brake applied.
Automatic transmission “Park” mechanism
On a safe incline, check that your vehicle is held securely with
the selector lever in “P” position and all brakes released.
Doors and engine hood
Check that all doors, including trunk lid, operate smoothly and
all latches lock securely. Make sure the engine hood
secondary latch secures the hood when the primary latch is
released.
Wheel nuts
When checking the tires, make sure to check the nuts for
looseness. Tighten them if necessary.
Tire inflation pressure
Check the pressure with a gauge every two weeks, or at
least once a month and adjust as shown on the tire
loading and information label. See page 478 for
additional information.
Tire surface
Check the tires carefully for cuts, damage or excessive
wear. See page 492 for additional information.
440
MAINTENANCE
Tire rotation
Rotate the tires according to the maintenance schedule.
(For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to
the “Owner ’s Manual Supplement / Scheduled
Maintenance”.) See page 491 for additional information.
DOES YOUR VEHICLE NEED
REPAIRING?
Be on the alert for changes in performance and sounds, and
visual tip-offs that indicate service is needed. Some important
clues are:
Engine missing, stumbling, or pinging
Appreciable loss of power
Strange engine noises
A fluid leak under the vehicle (However, water dripping from
the air conditioning after use is normal.)
Change in exhaust sound (This may indicate a dangerous
carbon monoxide leak. Drive with the windows open and
have the exhaust system checked immediately.)
Flat-looking tires, excessive tire squeal when cornering,
uneven tire wear
Vehicle pulls to one side when driving straight on a level
road
Strange noises related to suspension movement
Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling brake pedal,
pedal almost touches floors, vehicle pulls to one side when
braking
Engine coolant temperature continually higher than normal
If you notice any of these clues, take your vehicle to your Lexus
dealer as soon as possible. It probably needs adjustment or
repair.
441
MAINTENANCE
CAUTION
Do not continue driving with the vehicle unchecked. It
could result in serious vehicle damage and possibly
personal injury.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE (I/M) PROGRAMS
Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs
which include OBD (On-Board Diagnostics) checks.
The OBD system monitors the operation of the emission
control system. When the OBD system determines that a
problem exists somewhere in the emission control system, the
malfunction indicator lamp comes on. In this case, your vehicle
may not pass the I/M test and need to be repaired. Contact
your Lexus dealer to service the vehicle.
Even if the malfunction indicator lamp does not come on, your
vehicle may not pass the I/M test as readiness codes have not
been set in the OBD system.
Readiness codes are automatically set during ordinary driving.
However, when the battery is disconnected or run down, the
codes are erased. Also, depending on your driving habits, the
codes may not be completely set.
Also, if the malfunction indicator lamp had come on recently
due to temporary malfunction such as a loose fuel tank cap,
your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.
The malfunction indicator lamp will go off after taking several
driving trips, but the error code in the OBD system will not be
cleared unless about 40 trips or more are taken.
If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test and the malfunction
indicator lamp does not come on, contact your Lexus dealer to
prepare the vehicle for re-testing.
442
MAINTENANCE
443
SECTION
6–1
SERVICE PROCEDURES AND
SPECIFICATIONS
Introduction
Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Theft prevention labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine compartment overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Do-it-yourself service precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parts and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Positioning the jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
444
445
446
447
448
450
451
INTRODUCTION
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
61L066
61L069
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is also on the
Certification Label.
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal
identifier for your vehicle. This number is on the left top
of the instrument panel and can be seen through the
windshield from outside.
This is the primary identification number for your Lexus. It is
used in registering the ownership of your vehicle.
61L017a
The engine number is stamped on the engine block as
shown.
445
INTRODUCTION
THEFT PREVENTION LABELS
(U.S.A.ONLY)
61L067a
Your new vehicle carries theft prevention labels which are
approximately 47 mm (1.85 in.) by 12 mm (0.47 in.).
The purpose of these labels is to reduce the incidence of
vehicle thefts by facilitating the tracing and recovery of parts
from stolen vehicles. The label is designed so that once it is
applied to a surface, any attempt to remove it will result in
destroying the integrity of the label. Transferring these labels
intact from one part to another will be impossible.
NOTICE
You should not attempt to remove the theft prevention
labels as it may violate certain state or federal laws.
446
INTRODUCTION
ENGINE COMPARTMENT OVERVIEW
61L016i
1
Fuse box
2
Battery
3
Engine oil filler cap
4
Engine oil level
dipstick
5
Brake fluid reservoir
6
Washer fluid tank
7
Radiator
8
Condenser
9
Engine coolant
reservoir
10
Electric cooling fans
11
Power steering fluid
reservoir
447
INTRODUCTION
DO-IT-YOURSELF SERVICE
PRECAUTIONS
If you perform maintenance yourself, be sure to follow the
correct procedure given in this Section.
You should be aware that improper or incomplete servicing
may result in operating problems.
Performing do-it-yourself maintenance during the warranty
period may affect your warranty coverage. Read the separate
Lexus Warranty statement for details and suggestions.
This Section gives instructions only for those items that are
relatively easy for an owner to perform. As explained in
Section 5, there are still a number of items that must be
performed by a qualified technician with special tools.
For information on tools and parts for do- it- yourself
maintenance, see “Parts and tools” on page 450.
Utmost care should be taken when working on your vehicle to
prevent accidental injury. Here are a few precautions that you
should be especially careful to observe:
CAUTION
When the engine is running, keep hands, clothing,
and tools away from the moving fan and engine drive
belt.
(Removing rings, watches, and ties is
advisable.)
Right after driving, the engine compartment - the
engine, radiator, exhaust manifold and power
steering fluid reservoir, etc. - will be hot. So be
careful not to touch them. Oil and other fluids may
also be hot.
Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as
paper or rags, in the engine compartment.
Do not smoke, cause sparks or allow open flames
around fuel or the battery.
Their fumes are
flammable.
Do not get under your vehicle with just the body jack
supporting it. Always use automotive jack stands or
other solid supports.
Be sure the ignition is off if you work near the electric
cooling fan or radiator grille. With the ignition on, the
electric cooling fan may automatically start to run if
the air conditioning is on and/or if the coolant
temperature is high.
Use eye protection whenever you work on or under
your vehicle where you may be exposed to flying or
falling material, fluid spray, etc.
Be extremely cautious when working on the battery.
It contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.
448
INTRODUCTION
Warning: Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
NOTICE
Remember that battery and ignition cables carry high
currents or voltages. Be careful of accidentally
causing a short circuit.
Add only “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar
high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate,
non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with
long-life hybrid organic acid technology to fill the
radiator. “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a
mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized water.
If you spill some of the coolant, be sure to wash it off
with water to prevent it from damaging the parts or
paint.
Before closing the engine hood, check to see that you
have not forgotten any tools, rags, etc.
Do not drive with the air cleaner removed, or
excessive engine wear could result. Also backfiring
could cause a fire in the engine compartment.
If you spill the fluid, be sure to wash it off with water
to prevent it from damaging the parts or paint.
Do not overfill automatic transmission fluid, transfer
oil and power steering fluid, or the transmission and
power steering could be damaged.
Be careful not to scratch the glass surface with the
wiper frame.
449
INTRODUCTION
PARTS AND TOOLS
Here is a list of parts and tools you will need to perform
do-it-yourself maintenance. Remember all Lexus parts are
designed in metric sizes, so your tools must be metric.
Parts (if level is low):
Checking the engine oil level
Funnel (only for adding fluid)
Parts (if level is low):
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent
Oil grade: API grade SL “Energy-Conserving” or ILSAC
multigrade engine oil. For recommended oil viscosity, see
page 465.
Tools:
Rag or paper towel
Funnel (only for adding oil)
Checking the engine coolant level
Parts (if level is low):
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality
ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite,
and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid
technology.
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50%
coolant and 50% deionized water.
Distilled water
Tools:
Funnel (only for adding coolant)
450
Checking brake fluid
FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid
Tools:
Checking power steering fluid
Parts (if level is low):
Automatic transmission fluid DEXRONII or III
Tools:
Rag or paper towel
Funnel (only for adding fluid)
Checking battery condition
Tools:
Warm water
Baking soda
Grease
Conventional wrench (for terminal clamp bolts)
Checking and replacing the blade type fuses
Parts (if replacement is necessary):
Fuse with same amperage rating as original
INTRODUCTION
Checking the cartridge type fuses
POSITIONING THE JACK
Parts (if replacement is necessary):
Genuine Lexus fuse or equivalent with same amperage
rating as original
Adding washer fluid
61L047
Parts:
Water
Washer fluid containing antifreeze (for winter use)
Tools:
Funnel
Front
61L048
Rear
When jacking up your vehicle with the jack, position the
jack correctly as shown in the illustrations.
451
INTRODUCTION
CAUTION
NOTICE
When jacking, be sure to observe the following to reduce the possibility of personal injury:
Make sure to place the jack correctly, or your vehicle
may be damaged.
Follow jacking instructions.
Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle
supported by the jack. Otherwise, personal injury
may occur.
Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is
supported by the jack.
Stop the vehicle on a level firm ground, firmly set the
parking brake and put the transmission in “P”. Block
the wheels on the opposite side of the jack up point
if necessary.
Make sure to set the jack properly in the jack point.
Raising the vehicle with jack improperly positioned
will damage the vehicle or may allow the vehicle to fall
off the jack and cause personal injury.
Never get under the vehicle when the vehicle is
supported by the jack alone; use vehicle support
stands.
Do not raise the vehicle with someone in the vehicle
When raising the vehicle, do not place any objects on
top of or underneath the jack.
For vehicles equipped with the height control switch,
be sure to turn the ignition switch off before jacking.
If this is not done, the vehicle height adjustment function will operate, which may cause an accident.
452
INTRODUCTION
453
SECTION
6–2
SERVICE PROCEDURES AND
SPECIFICATIONS
Engine
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel pump shut off system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Facts about engine oil consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Used engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking the engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking the engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking the radiator and condenser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
454
455
458
460
461
462
463
466
468
468
ENGINE
SPECIFICATIONS
– GENERAL
Model
3UZ-FE
Type
8 cylinder V type, 4 cycle, gasoline
Bore and stroke
91.0 X 82.5 mm (3.58 X 3.25 in.)
Displacement
4293 cm3 (262.0 cu.in.)
Valve clearance (engine cold)
Intake
Exhaust
0.15 - 0.25 mm (0.006 - 0.010 in.)
0.25 - 0.35 mm (0.010 - 0.014 in.)
Drive belt tension
Automatic adjustment
– FUEL
Fuel type
Only UNLEADED
Octane rating
91 (Research octane number 96) or higher
455
ENGINE
– LUBRICATION SYSTEM
Oil capacity
Drain and refill
with filter
without filter
5.1 L (5.4 qt., 4.5 lmp.qt.)
4.5 L (4.8 qt., 4.0 lmp.qt.)
Oil grade
API grade SL “Energy-Conserving” or ILSAC multigrade engine oil
Recommended oil viscosity (SAE):
5W-30
62L042
Outside temperature
NOTE:
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Lexus vehicle. Use Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy
the above grade and viscosity. Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details.
456
ENGINE
– COOLING SYSTEM
Capacity
9.5 L (10.0 qt., 8.4 lmp.qt.)
Coolant type
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene glycol
based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant
with long-life hybrid organic acid technology (Coolant with long-life
hybrid organic acid technology is a combination of low phosphates and
organic acids.)
Do not use plain water alone.
NOTE:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is used in your Lexus vehicle at factory fill. In order to avoid technical problems, only use “Toyota
Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant
with long-life hybrid organic acid technology. (Coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technology is a combination of low
phosphates and organic acids.) Do not use plain water alone. Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details.
– IGNITION SYSTEM
Spark plug
– Make
DENSO
NGK
– Gap
SK20R11
IFR6A11
1.1 mm (0.043 in.)
– ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Battery – Open voltage at 20C (68F):
– Charging rates
12.7 V Fully charged
12.3 V Half charged
11.9 V Discharged
[Voltage that is checked 20 minutes after the key is removed with all the
lights turned off]
5A max.
457
ENGINE
FUEL
Fuel type
Your vehicle must use only unleaded gasoline.
To help prevent gas station mixups, your Lexus has a smaller
fuel tank opening. The special nozzle on pumps with unleaded
fuel will fit it, but the larger standard nozzle on pumps with
leaded gas will not.
At a minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the
specifications of ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB
3.5-M93 in Canada.
Use of unleaded fuel with an octane number or rating lower
than stated above will cause persistent heavy knocking. If
severe, this will lead to engine damage.
If your engine knocks ...
If you detect heavy knocking even when using the
recommended fuel, or if you hear steady knocking while
holding a steady speed on level roads, consult your Lexus
dealer.
However, occasionally, you may notice light knocking for a
short time while accelerating or driving up hills. This is normal
and there is no need for concern.
Gasoline containing detergent additives
NOTICE
Do not use leaded gasoline. Use of leaded gasoline will
cause the three- way catalytic converter to lose its
effectiveness and the emission control system to function
improperly. Also, this can increase maintenance costs.
Octane rating
Select premium unleaded gasoline with an Octane Rating
of 91 (Research Octane Number 96) or higher for optimum
engine performance. However, if such premium type
cannot be obtained, you may temporarily use unleaded
gasoline with an Octane Rating as low as 87 (Research
Octane Number 91).
458
Lexus recommends the use of gasoline that contains
detergent additives to avoid build-up of engine deposits.
However, all gasoline sold in the U.S. contains detergent
additives to keep clean and/or clean intake systems.
Quality gasoline
Automotive manufacturers in the U.S., Europe and Japan
have developed a specification for quality fuel named
World-W ide Fuel Charter (WWFC) that is expected to be
applied world wide. The WWFC consists of four
categories that depend on required emission levels. In the
U.S., category 3 has been adopted. The WWFC improves
air quality by providing for better emissions in vehicle
fleets, and customer satisfaction through better vehicle
performance.
ENGINE
Cleaner burning gasoline
Gasoline containing MMT
Cleaner burning gasoline, including reformulated
gasoline that contains oxygenates such as ethanol or
MTBE is available in many areas.
Some gasoline contain an octane enhancing additive
called MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese
Tricarbonyl).
Lexus recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline and
appropriately blended reformulated gasoline. These types of
gasoline provide excellent vehicle performance, reduce
vehicle emissions, and improve air quality.
Lexus does not recommend the use of gasoline that contains
MMT. If fuel containing MMT is used, your emission control
system may be adversely affected. The Malfunction Indicator
Lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this happens,
contact your Lexus dealer for service.
Oxygenates in gasoline
Lexus allows the use of oxygenate blended gasoline
where the oxygenate content is up to 10% ethanol or 15%
MTBE. If you use gasohol in your Lexus, be sure that it has
an octane rating no lower than 87.
Lexus does not recommend the use of gasoline containing
methanol.
Gasoline quality
In a very few cases, you may experience driveability problems
caused by the particular gasoline that you are using. If you
continue to have unacceptable driveability, try changing
gasoline brands. If this does not rectify your problem, then
consult your Lexus dealer.
NOTICE
Do not use gasohol other than stated above. It will
cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance
problems.
If drivability problems are encountered (poor hot
starting, vaporizing, engine knock, etc.), discontinue
its use.
459
ENGINE
Take care not to spill gasohol during refueling.
Gasohol may cause paint damage.
Fuel tank capacity
84 L (22.2 gal., 18.5 lmp.gal.)
FUEL PUMP SHUT OFF SYSTEM
The fuel pump shut off system stops supplying fuel to the
engine to minimize the risk of fuel leakage when the engine
stalls or an airbag inflates upon collision. To restart the engine
after the fuel pump shut off system activates, turn the ignition
switch to “ACC” or “LOCK” once and start it.
CAUTION
Inspect the ground under the vehicle before restarting
the engine. If you find that liquid has leaked onto the
ground, it is the fuel system that has been damaged and
it is in need of repair. In this case, do not restart the
engine.
460
ENGINE
FACTS ABOUT ENGINE OIL
CONSUMPTION
The amount of engine oil consumed depends on the
viscosity of the oil, the quality of the oil and the way the
vehicle is driven.
Functions of engine oil
More oil is consumed by high- speed driving and frequent
acceleration and deceleration.
Engine oil has the primary function of lubricating and cooling
the inside of the engine, and plays a major role in maintaining
the engine in proper working order.
A new engine consumes more oil, since its pistons, piston rings
and cylinder walls have not become conditioned.
Engine oil consumption
Oil consumption: Max. 1.0 L per 1000 km (1.1 qt./600 miles,
0.9 lmp. qt./600 miles)
It is normal that an engine should consume some engine
oil during normal engine operation. The causes of oil
consumption in a normal engine are as follows.
When judging the amount of oil consumption, keep in
mind that the oil may have become diluted, making it
difficult to judge the true level accurately.
Oil is used to lubricate pistons, piston rings and cylinders.
A thin film of oil is left on the cylinder wall when a piston
moves downwards in the cylinder. High negative pressure
generated when the vehicle is decelerating sucks some of
this oil into the combustion chamber. This oil as well as
some part of the oil film left on the cylinder wall is burned by
the high temperature combustion gases during the
combustion process.
For example, if a vehicle is used for repeated short trips and
consumes a normal amount of oil, the dipstick may not show
any drop in the oil level at all, even after 1000 km (600 miles)
or more. This is because the oil is gradually becoming diluted
with fuel or moisture, making it appear that the oil level has not
changed.
Oil is also used to lubricate the stems of the intake valves.
Some of this oil is sucked into the combustion chamber
together with the intake air and is burned along with the fuel.
High temperature exhaust gases also burn the oil used to
lubricate the exhaust valve stems.
The diluting ingredients evaporate out when the vehicle is then
driven at high speeds, as on an expressway, making it appear
that oil is excessively consumed after driving at high speeds.
461
ENGINE
Importance of engine oil level check
One of the most important points in proper vehicle
maintenance is to keep the engine oil at the optimum level so
that oil function will not be impaired. Therefore, it is essential
that the oil level be checked regularly. Lexus recommends that
the oil level be checked every time you refuel the vehicle.
NOTICE
Failure to check the oil level regularly could lead to
serious engine trouble due to insufficient oil.
For detailed information on oil level check, see “Checking the
engine oil level” described below.
462
USED ENGINE OIL
CAUTION
Used engine oil contains potentially harmful
contaminants which may cause skin disorders such
as inflammation or skin cancer, so care should be
taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact with
it. To remove used engine oil from your skin, wash
thoroughly with soap and water.
Do not leave used oil within the reach of children.
Dispose of used oil and used oil filters only in a safe
and acceptable manner. Do not dispose of used oil
and used oil filters in household trash, in sewers or
onto the ground. Call your Lexus dealer or a service
station for information concerning recycling or
disposal.
ENGINE
CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL
62L018
62L017c
1 Add oil
2 O.K.
3 Too full
With the engine at operating temperature and turned off,
check the oil level on the dipstick.
4. Pull the dipstick out and look at the oil level while holding a
rag under the end. If it is between the low level mark ( 4 ) and
the full level mark ( 5 ), it is O.K.
1. To get a correct reading, the vehicle should be on level
ground. After turning off the engine, wait a few minutes for the
oil to drain back into the bottom of the engine.
NOTICE
2. Pull the dipstick out, hold a rag under the end and wipe it
clean.
Be careful not to drop engine oil on the vehicle
components.
3. Reinsert the dipstick and push it in as far as it will go, or the
reading will not be correct.
463
ENGINE
NOTICE
Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle
components.
62L019c
Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged.
Check the oil level on the dipstick once again after
adding the oil.
If the oil level is below or only slightly above the low mark,
add engine oil of the same type as already in the engine.
Remove the oil filler cap and add engine oil a little at a time,
checking the dipstick. We recommend that you use a funnel
when adding oil. The approximate quantity of oil needed to fill
between the low level mark and the full level mark on the
dipstick is indicated below for reference.
When the level reaches within the correct range, return the
filler cap and turn the cap clockwise until you hear a click.
Oil quantity. L (qt., lmp. qt.)
464
1.5 (1.6, 1.3)
ENGINE
Engine oil selection
Oil identification marks
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Lexus vehicle. Use
Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to
satisfy the following grade and viscosity.
Oil grade: API grade SL “Energy- Conserving” or ILSAC
multigrade engine oil.
Recommended viscosity (SAE): 5W-30
62L042
Outside temperature
SAE 5W-30 is the best choice, for good fuel economy and
good starting in cold weather.
If SAE 5W-30 is not available, SAE 10W-30 may be used.
However, it should be replaced with SAE 5W-30 at the next
oil change.
62L038
API Service Symbol
ILSAC Certification Mark
Either or both API registered marks are added to some oil
containers to help you select the oil you should use.
The API Service Symbol is located anywhere on the outside
of the container.
The top portion of the label shows the oil quality by API
(American Petroleum Institute) designation such as SL.
The center portion of the label shows the SAE viscosity
grade such as SAE 5W-30. “Energy-Conserving”, shown
in the lower portion, indicates that the oil has fuel-saving
capabilities.
The ILSAC (International Lubricant Standardization and
Approval Committee) Certification Mark is displayed on the
front of the container.
465
ENGINE
To ensure excellent lubrication performance for your engine,
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is available, which has been
specifically tested and approved for all Lexus engines.
CHECKING THE ENGINE COOLANT
LEVEL
Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details about
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil”.
62L041
1 Reservoir cap 2 “FULL” (upper) line
3 “LOW”(lower) line
Look at the see- through coolant reservoir when the
engine is cold. The coolant level is satisfactory if it is
between the“FULL” and “LOW” lines on the reservoir. If
the level is low, add the coolant. (For the coolant type, see
“Coolant type selection” described below.)
The coolant level in the reservoir will vary with engine
temperature. However, if the level is on or below the “LOW”
line, add coolant. Bring the level up to the “FULL” line.
466
ENGINE
If the coolant level drops within a short time after replenishing,
there may be a leak in the system. Visually check the radiator,
hoses, engine coolant filler cap, radiator cap and drain cock
and water pump.
Coolant type selection
If you can find no leak, have your Lexus dealer test the cap
pressure and check for leaks in the cooling system.
Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high
quality ethylene glycol based non- silicate, non- amine,
non- nitrite, and non- borate coolant with long- life hybrid
organic acid technology. (Coolant with long-life hybrid organic
acid technology is a combination of low phosphates and
organic acids.)
CAUTION
To prevent burning yourself, do not remove the radiator
cap when the engine is hot.
Use of improper coolants may damage your engine cooling
system.
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant
and 50% deionized water. This coolant provides protection
down to about –35C (–31F).
NOTICE
Do not use plain water alone.
Lexus recommends “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant,” which
has been tested to ensure that it will not cause corrosion nor
result in malfunction of your engine coolant system with proper
usage. “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is formulated with
long- life hybrid organic acid technology and has been
specifically designed to avoid engine cooling system
malfunction on Lexus vehicles.
Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details.
467
ENGINE
CHECKING THE RADIATOR AND
CONDENSER
SPARK PLUGS
If either of the above parts are extremely dirty or you are not
sure of their condition, take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
To prevent burning yourself, be careful not to touch the
radiator or condenser when the engine is hot.
62R031c
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the radiator and condenser, do
not perform the work by yourself.
Your engine is fitted with iridium-tipped spark plugs.
NOTICE
Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs and do not adjust
gaps for your engine performance and smooth
drivability.
468
ENGINE
469
SECTION
6–3
SERVICE PROCEDURES AND
SPECIFICATIONS
Chassis
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking tire inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rotating tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking and replacing tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing snow tires and chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aluminum wheel precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Suspension and chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
470
471
476
477
478
481
490
491
492
494
495
496
497
CHASSIS
SPECIFICATIONS
– DIFFERENTIAL
Oil capacity
Oil type and
viscosity
1.35 L (1.42 qt., 1.19 lmp.qt.)
Vehicles without synthetic oil
information label
Hypoid gear oil API GL-5
Above –18C (0F): SAE 90
Below –18C (0F): SAE 80W or SAE 80W-90
Vehicles with synthetic oil
information label*
Toyota Genuine Differential Synthetic gear oil
API GL-5 SAE 75W-90 or its equivalent
NOTICE
NOTE:
*Vehicles with synthetic oil information label only:
The following label is affixed on the right side of the
differential carrier. Use the type and viscosity shown on
the label when the differential oil is replaced.
Synthetic oil information label
Vehicles with synthetic oil information label only:
Use of differential oil other than “Toyota Genuine
Differential Synthetic gear oil API GL-5 SAE 75W-90” or its
equivalent may damage the differential gear of your vehicle
and diminish fuel efficiency. For the reasons mentioned
above, Lexus recommends use of “Toyota Genuine
Differential Synthetic gear oil API GL-5 SAE 75W-90”.
Another differential oil of matching quality can also be
used, (but note that despite the similarity in nomenclature
between “Toyota Genuine Differential Synthetic gear oil
API GL-5 SAE 75W-90” and oils that meet SAE 75W-90
specifications, compliance with the SAE specification
does not guarantee that an oil has all characteristic
required to avoid the problem described above.) If you are
unable to locate an equivalent to “Toyota Genuine
Differential Synthetic gear oil API GL-5 SAE 75W-90”,
contact your Lexus dealer for further details or another
duly qualified and equipped professional.
471
CHASSIS
– AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Fluid capacity
Drain and refill
2.3 L (2.4 qt., 2.0 lmp.qt.)
Fluid type
Toyota Genuine ATF WS*
*Change automatic transmission fluid only as necessary.
Generally, it is necessary to change automatic transmission
fluid only if your vehicle is driven under one of the Special
Operating Conditions listed in your “Owner ’s Manual
Supplement / Scheduled Maintenance”. When changing the
automatic transmission fluid, use only “Toyota Genuine ATF
WS” (ATF JWS 3324 or NWS 9638) to aid in assuring
maximum transmission performance.
472
NOTICE
Using automatic transmission fluid other than “Toyota
Genuine ATF WS” may cause deterioration in shift
quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied
by vibration, and ultimately damage the automatic
transmission of your vehicle.
CHASSIS
– BRAKES
Pedal clearance
70 mm (2.8 in.) Min. *1
Pedal free play
1 - 6 mm (0.04 - 0.24 in.)
Brake pad wear limit
1.0 mm (0.04 in.)
Parking brake lining wear limit
1.0 mm (0.04 in.)
Parking brake adjustment
5 - 7 clicks *2
Fluid type
SAE J1703 or FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3
*1Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with the pressure of 490 N (50 kgf, 110 lbf.) with the engine running
*2Parking brake adjustment when depressed with the pressure of 294 N (30 kgf, 66.1 lbf.)
– STEERING
Free play
Less than 30 mm (1.2 in.)
Power steering fluid
Automatic transmission fluid DEXRONII or III
473
CHASSIS
– TIRES AND WHEELS (Type A)
Tire size
Tire inflation pressure
Recommended cold tire inflation pressure
P225/55R17 95H
Front 220 kPa (2.2 kgf/cm2 or bar, 32 psi)
Rear 220 kPa (2.2 kgf/cm2 or bar, 32 psi)
For sustained high speeds above 160 km/h (100 mph), in
countries where such speeds are permitted by law, add 20 kPa
(0.2 kgf/cm2 or bar, 3 psi) to the front tires and rear tires, but
never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure molded
on the tire sidewall.
Wheel size
17 x 7 1/2JJ
Wheel nut torque
103 N·m (10.5 kgf·m, 76 ft·lbf.)
NOTE:
For complete information on tires (e.g. replacing tires or replacing wheels), see “Checking tire inflation pressure”
through “Aluminum wheel precautions” on page 478 through 496.
474
CHASSIS
– TIRES AND WHEELS (Type B)
Tire size
Tire inflation pressure
Recommended cold tire inflation pressure
245/45R18 96W
Front 230 kPa (2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar, 33 psi)
Rear 230 kPa (2.3 kgf/cm2 or bar, 33 psi)
For sustained high speeds above 160 km/h (100 mph), in
countries where such speeds are permitted by law, add 40 kPa
(0.4 kgf/cm2 or bar, 6 psi) to the front tires and rear tires, but
never exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure molded
on the tire sidewall.
Wheel size
18 x 7 1/2JJ
Wheel nut torque
103 N·m (10.5 kgf·m, 76 ft·lbf.)
NOTE:
For complete information on tires (e.g. replacing tires or replacing wheels), see “Checking tire inflation pressure”
through “Aluminum wheel precautions” on page 478 through 496.
475
CHASSIS
CHECKING BRAKE FLUID
63L023a
CAUTION
Take care when filling the reservoir because brake fluid
can harm your hands or eyes and damage painted
surfaces. If fluid gets in your eyes, flush your eyes with
clean water immediately. If you still feel uncomfortable
with your eyes, go to the doctor.
NOTICE
If you spill some of the fluid, be sure to wipe it off to
prevent it from damaging the parts or paintwork.
To check the fluid level, simply look at the see-through
reservoir. The level should be between the “MAX” and
“MIN” lines on the tank.
It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the
brake pads wear. So be sure to keep the reservoir filled.
If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it may indicate a
serious mechanical problem.
If the level is low, add FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703
brake fluid to the brake reservoir.
Remove and replace the reservoir cap by hand. Add brake
fluid up to the “MAX” line.
Use only newly opened brake fluid. Once opened, brake fluid
absorbs moisture from the air, and excess moisture can cause
a dangerous loss of braking efficiency.
476
CHASSIS
CHECKING POWER STEERING
FLUID
63L012a
63L011a
1 If cold O.K.
4 If hot add
Check the fluid level on the through the reservoir. If
necessary, add automatic transmission fluid DEXRONII
or III.
If the vehicle has been driven around 80 km/h (50 mph) for 20
minutes (a little more in frigid temperatures), the fluid is hot
(60C - 80C or 140F - 175F). You may also check the level
when the fluid is cold (about room temperature, 10C - 30C
or 50F - 85F) if the engine has not been run for about five
hours.
2 If hot O.K.
3 If cold add
Clean all dirt off the reservoir and look at the fluid level. If the
fluid is cold, the level should be in the “COLD” range. Similarly,
if it is hot, the fluid level should be in the “HOT” range. If the
level is at the low side of the appropriate range, add automatic
transmission fluid DEXRONII or III to bring the level within
the range.
To remove the reservoir cap, turn it counterclockwise and lift
up. To reinstall it, turn it clockwise. After replacing the reservoir
cap, visually check the steering box case, vane pump and hose
connections for leaks or damage.
477
CHASSIS
CAUTION
The reservoir may be hot so be careful not to burn
yourself.
CHECKING TIRE INFLATION
PRESSURE
NOTICE
Avoid overfilling, or the power steering could be
damaged.
When adding the power steering fluid, avoid spilling
it. The generator under the power steering reservoir
could be damaged if fluid is spilled on it.
63L027a
The recommended cold tire inflation pressure, tire
size and the combined weight of occupants and
cargo (vehicle capacity weight) are described on the
tire and loading information label.
478
CHASSIS
You should check the tire inflation pressures every two
weeks, or at least once a month. And don’t forget the
spare! The pressure for the spare tire should be the
same as that for the standard tire. (See page 474 and
475.)
The following instructions for checking tire inflation
pressure should be observed:
The pressure should be checked only when the
tires are cold. If your vehicle has been parked for at
least 3 hours and has not been driven for more than
1.5 km or 1 mile since, you will get an accurate cold
tire inflation pressure reading.
Always use a tire pressure gauge. The appearance
of the tire can be misleading. Besides, tire inflation
pressures that are even just a few pounds off can
degrade ride and handling.
Do not bleed or reduce tire inflation pressure after
driving. It is normal for the tire inflation pressure to
be higher after driving.
Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight.
Passengers and luggage weight should be located so
that the vehicle is balanced.
Inspection and adjustment procedure
63L024
1 Tire valve
2 Tire pressure gauge
1. Remove the tire valve cap.
2. Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge to the tire
valve.
3. Read the pressure using the graduations of the
gauge.
4. In case the tire inflation pressure is not within the
prescribed range, insert the compressed air from the
valve. In case of applying too much air, press the center
of the valve and release the air to adjust.
5. After completing the tire inflation pressure
measurement and adjustment, apply soapy water to the
valve and check for leakage.
479
CHASSIS
6. Install the tire valve cap.
If a gauge and air pump are not available, have your
vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
Be sure to reinstall the tire valve caps. Without the
valve caps, dirt or moisture could get into the
valve core and cause air leakage. If the caps have
been lost, have new ones put on as soon as
possible.
Incorrect tire inflation pressure may waste fuel, reduce
the comfort of driving, reduce tire life and make your
vehicle less safe to drive.
If a tire needs frequent refilling, have it checked by your
Lexus dealer.
480
CAUTION
Keep your tires properly inflated. Otherwise, the
following conditions may occur and cause an
accident resulting in death or serious injuries.
Low tire pressure (underinflation):
Excessive wear
Uneven wear
Poor handling
Possibility of blowouts from an overheated tire
Poor sealing of the tire bead
Wheel deformation and/or tire separation
A greater possibility of tire damage from road
hazards
High tire pressure (overinflation):
Poor handling
Excessive wear
Uneven wear
A greater possibility of tire damage from road
hazards
CHASSIS
TIRE INFORMATION
Tire symbols
63L029
The illustration indicates typical tire symbols.
481
CHASSIS
482
1
Tire size: For details, see “Tire size” on page
483.
2
DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN): For
details, see “DOT and Tire Identification Number
(TIN)” on page 483.
3
Location of tread wear indicators: For details,
see “Checking and replacing tires” on page 492.
4
Tire ply composition and materials : Plies
mean a layer of rubber-coated parallel cords.
Cords mean the strands forming the plies in the
tire.
5
Summer tire or all season tire: An all season
tire has “M+S” on the sidewall. The tire not
marked with “M+S” is a summer tire. For details,
see “Types of tires” on page 490.
6
Radial tires or bias-ply tires: A radial tire has
“RADIAL” on the sidewall. A tire not marked with
“RADIAL” is a bias-ply tire.
7
“TUBELESS” or “TUBE TYPE”: A tubeless tire
does not have a tube inside the tire and air is
directly filled in the tire. Tube type tire has a tube
inside the tire and the tube maintains the air
pressure.
8
Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation
pressure: For details, see “Checking and
replacing tires” on page 492.
9
Maximum cold tire inflation pressure: This
means the pressure to which a tire may be
inflated. For recommended cold tire inflation
pressure, see “Tires and wheels” on page 474.
10
Uniform tire quality grading: For details, see
“Uniform tire quality grading “ on page 485.
CHASSIS
DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)
63SA11a
The illustration indicates typical DOT and Tire
Identification Number (TIN)
1 “DOT” symbol
2 Tire Identification Number (TIN)
3 Tire manufacturer’s identification mark
4 Tire size code
5 Manufacturer’s optional tire type code
6 Manufacturing week
7 Manufacturing year
Tire size
63L022
The illustration indicates typical tire size.
1 Tire use (P=Passenger car, T=Temporary use)
2 Section width (in millimeters)
3 Aspect ratio (tire height to section width)
4 Tire construction code
(R=Radial, D=Diagonal)
5 Wheel diameter (in inches)
6 Load index (2 digits or 3 digits)
7 Speed symbol (alphabet with one letter)
The “DOT” symbol certifies that the tire conforms to
applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
483
CHASSIS
Name of each section of tire
63L025a
63SA14
1 Section width
2 Tire height
3 Wheel diameter
484
1 Bead
2 Sidewall
3 Shoulder
4 Tread
5 Belt
6 Inner liner
7 Reinforcing rubber
8 Carcass
9 Rim lines
10 Bead wires
11 Chafer
CHASSIS
Uniform tire quality grading
This information has been prepared in accordance
with regulations issued by the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration of the U.S. Department
of Transportation. It provides the purchasers and/or
prospective purchasers of Lexus vehicles with
information on uniform tire quality grading.
Your Lexus dealer will help answer any questions
you may have as you read this information.
DOT quality grades - All passenger vehicle tires
must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades. Quality grades can be
found where applicable on the tire sidewall between
tread shoulder and maximum section width. For
example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature
A
Treadwear - The treadwear grade is a comparative
rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified government
test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear
one and a half (1 - 1/2) times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance
of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA, A, B, C - The traction grades, from highest
to lowest, are AA, A, B and C, and they represent the
tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may
have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on braking (straight ahead) traction tests and
does not include cornering (turning) traction.
Temperature A, B, C - The temperature grades are A
(the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance
to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified
indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade
C corresponds to a level of performance which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grades for this tire are
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
485
CHASSIS
Glossary of tire terminology
Tire related term
486
Meaning
Accessory weight
the combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be replaced) of
automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, power
seats, radio, and heater, to the extent that these items are available as
factory-installed equipment (whether installed or not)
Cold tire inflation
pressure
tire pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours or more, or it
has not been driven more than 1.5 km or 1 mile under that condition.
Curb weight
the weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum
capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so equipped, air conditioning and
additional weight optional engine
Intended outboard
sidewall
(a) the sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears
manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than
the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or
(b) the outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side
that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle.
Maximum inflation
pressure
the maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated and it is shown
on the sidewall of the tire
CHASSIS
Tire related term
Meaning
Maximum loaded vehicle
weight
the sum of —
(a) curb weight;
(b) accessory weight;
(c) vehicle capacity weight; and
(d) production options weight
Normal occupant weight
68 kg (150 lb.) times the number of occupants specified in the second column of
Table 1 that follows.
Occupant distribution
distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column of Table 1 that
follows.
Production options weight
the combined weight of those installed regular production options weighing over
2.3 kg (5 lb.) in excess of those standard items which they replace, not previously
considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty brakes, ride
levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim
Recommended inflation
pressure
Rim
cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer
a metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are
seated
487
CHASSIS
Tire related term
Meaning
Rim diameter
(Wheel diameter)
nominal diameter of the bead seat
Rim size designation
rim diameter and width
Rim type designation
the industry of manufacturer’s designation for a rim by style or code
Rim width
nominal distance between rim flanges
Vehicle capacity weight
(Total load capacity)
the rated cargo and luggage load plus 68 kg (150 lb.) times the vehicle’s
designated seating capacity
Vehicle maximum load on
the tire
the load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its
share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing by two
Vehicle normal load on
the tire
the load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its
share of the curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight
(distributed in accordance with Table 1 that follows) and dividing by two
Weather side
the surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated tire
Table 1 – Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacities
488
CHASSIS
Designated seating capacity,
Number of occupants
Vehicle normal load,
Number of occupants
Occupant distribution in a normally
loaded vehicle
2 through 4
2
2 in front
5 through 10
3
2 in front, 1 in second seat
489
CHASSIS
TYPES OF TIRES
Determine what kind of tires your vehicle is originally
equipped with.
1. All season tires
All season tires are designed to provide better traction
in snow and to be adequate for driving in most winter
conditions, as well as for use all year round.
All season tires, however, do not have adequate traction
performance compared with snow tires in heavy or loose
snow. Also, all season tires fall short in acceleration and
handling performance compared with summer tires in
highway driving.
2. Summer tires
Summer tires are high-speed capability tires best suited
to highway driving under dry conditions.
Since summer tires do not have the same traction
performance as snow tires, summer tires are
inadequate for driving on snow-covered or icy roads.
For driving on snow- covered or icy roads, we
recommend using snow tires. If installing snow tires, be
sure to replace all four tires.
490
CAUTION
Do not mix all season and summer tires on your
vehicle as this can cause dangerous handling
characteristics, resulting in loss of control.
Do not use tires other than the manufacturer’s
designated tires, and never mix tires or wheels
of the sizes different from the originals, as this
could result in loss of control and could cause
death or serious injury.
CHASSIS
ROTATING TIRES
63L020a
Before storing radial, snow or studded tires, mark the
direction of rotation and be sure to install them in the
same direction when using them again. Tires should be
stored in a cool dry place.
Initial adjustment of the tire pressure warning
system is necessary after you have rotated your
tires. See “Tire pressure warning system” on page
367.
To equalize tire wear and help extend tire life, Lexus
recommends that you rotate your tires according to
the maintenance schedule. (For scheduled
maintenance information, please refer to the
“Owner ’s Manual Supplement / Scheduled
Maintenance”.) However, the most appropriate
timing for tire rotation may vary according to your
driving habits and road surface conditions.
The wheel assemblies must be rotated as illustrated
above.
When rotating tires, check for uneven wear and
damage. Abnormal wear is usually caused by incorrect
tire inflation pressure, improper wheel alignment,
out-of-balance wheels, or severe braking.
491
CHASSIS
CHECKING AND REPLACING TIRES
The effectiveness of snow tires is lost if the tread
wears down below 4 mm (0.16 in.).
When to replace your tires
If you have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks
deep enough to expose the fabric, or bulges
indicating internal damage, the tire should be
replaced.
62L026
If a tire often goes flat or cannot be properly repaired due
to the size or location of a cut or other damage, it should
be replaced. If you are not sure, consult with your Lexus
dealer.
If air loss occurs while driving, do not continue driving.
Driving even a short distance can damage a tire beyond
repair.
1 New tread 2 Tread wear indicator
3 Worn tread
Replace the tires when the tread wear indicators
show. The location of the tread wear indicators is
shown by the “TWI” or “∆” marks, etc., molded on
the sidewall of each tire.
The tires on your Lexus have built- in tread wear
indicators to help you know when the tires need
replacement. When the tread depth wears to 1.6 mm
(0.06 in.) or less, the indicators will appear. If you can
see the indicators in two or more adjacent grooves, the
tire should be replaced.
492
Any tires which are over 6 years old must be
checked by a qualified technician even if damage is
not obvious.
Tires deteriorate with age even if they have never or
seldom been used.
This applies also to the spare tire and tires stored for
future use.
CHASSIS
Tire selection
When replacing a tire, use a tire of the same size and
construction , and the same or greater maximum
load as the originally installed tires.
Using any other size or type of tire may seriously affect
handling, ride, speedometer/odometer calibration,
ground clearance, and clearance between the body and
tires or snow chains.
Check that the maximum load of the replaced tire is
greater than 1/2 of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings
(GAWR) of either the front axle or the rear axle,
whichever is greater. As for the maximum load of the
tire, see the load limit at maximum cold tire inflation
pressure mentioned on the sidewall of the tire, and as for
the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR), see the
Certification Label. For details about the Certification
Label and sidewall of the tire, see pages 445 and 481.
CAUTION
Observe the following instructions. Otherwise, an
accident may occur resulting in death or serious
injuries.
Do not mix radial, bias belted, or bias-ply tires
on your vehicle, as this may cause dangerous
handling characteristics resulting in loss of
control.
Do not use tires other than the manufacturer’s
recommended size, as this may cause
dangerous handling characteristics resulting in
loss of control.
If you need to change from conventional tires to radial
tires or vice versa, replace them as a set.
493
CHASSIS
INSTALLING SNOW TIRES AND
CHAINS
When to use snow tires or chains
Snow tires or chains are recommended when driving on
snow or ice.
On wet or dry roads, conventional or radial tires provide better
traction than snow or studded tires.
Snow tire selection
If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size,
construction and load capacity as the originally installed
tires.
Do not use tires other than stated above. Since your vehicle
has radial tires as original equipment, make sure your snow
tires also have radial construction. Do not install studded tires
without first checking local regulations for possible restrictions.
CAUTION
Observe the following instruction. Otherwise, an
accident may occur resulting in death or serious
injuries.
Do not use snow tires other than the manufacturer’s
recommended size, as this may cause dangerous
handling characteristics resulting in loss of control.
494
Snow tire installation
Snow tires should be installed on all wheels.
Installing snow tires on the rear wheels only can lead to an
excessive difference in road grip capability between the front
and rear tires which could cause loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION
Do not drive with the snow tires incorrectly inflated.
Never drive over 120 km/h (75 mph) with any type of
snow tires.
Tire chain selection
Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary
according to location or type of road. Always check local
regulations before installing chains.
Use SAE Class “S” type radial tire chains, with the exception
of radial cable chains or V-bar type chains.
CHASSIS
Chain installation
REPLACING WHEELS
Install the chains on the rear tires as tightly as possible.
Do not use tire chains on the front tires. Retighten chains
after driving 0.5 - 1.0 km (1/4 - 1/2 mile).
When installing chains on your tires, carefully follow the
instructions of the chain manufacturer.
CAUTION
Do not exceed 50 km/h (30 mph) or the chain
manufacturer’s
recommended
speed
limit,
whichever is lower.
Drive carefully avoiding bumps, holes, and sharp
turns, which may cause the vehicle to bounce.
Avoid sharp turns or locked-wheel braking, as use of
chains may adversely affect vehicle handling.
When driving with chains installed, be sure to drive
carefully. Slow down before entering curves to avoid
losing control of the vehicle. Otherwise an accident
may occur.
If the chains are installed, the tire pressure warning
system may not operate properly. See “Tire pressure
warning system” on page 367.
When to replace your wheels
If you have wheel damage such as bending, cracks or
heavy corrosion, the wheel should be replaced.
If you fail to replace a damaged wheel, the tire may slip off the
wheel or cause loss of handling control.
Wheel selection
When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure
that they are equivalent to those removed in load capacity,
diameter, rim width, and offset.
Correct replacement wheels are available at your Lexus
dealer.
A wheel of a different size or type may adversely affect
handling, wheel and bearing life, brake cooling,
speedometer/odometer calibration, stopping ability, headlight
aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clearance, and tire or snow
chain clearance to the body and chassis.
Replacement with used wheels is not recommended as they
may have been subjected to rough treatment or high mileage
and could fail without warning. Also, bent wheels which have
been straightened may have hidden structural damage and
therefore should not be used. Never use an inner tube in a
leaking wheel which is designed for a tubeless tire.
495
CHASSIS
CAUTION
Observe the following instruction. Otherwise, an
accident may occur resulting in death or serious
injuries.
Do not use wheels other than the manufacturer’s
recommended size, as this may cause dangerous
handling characteristics resulting in loss of control.
Initial adjustment of the tire pressure warning system is
necessary after you have replaced your wheels. See “Tire
pressure warning system” on page 367.
ALUMINUM WHEEL PRECAUTIONS
When installing aluminum wheels, check that the wheel
nuts are tight after driving your vehicle the first 1600 km
(1000 miles).
If you have rotated, repaired, or changed your tires, check
that the wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1600 km (1000
miles).
When using tire chains, be careful not to damage the
aluminum wheels.
Use only Lexus wheel nuts and wrench designed for your
aluminum wheels.
When balancing your wheels, use only Lexus balance
weights or equivalent and a plastic or rubber hammer.
As with any wheel, periodically check your aluminum
wheels for damage. If damaged, replace immediately.
496
CHASSIS
SUSPENSION AND CHASSIS
CAUTION
Do not modify the suspension/chassis with lift kits,
spacers, springs, etc. It can cause dangerous handling
characteristics, resulting in loss of control.
497
CHASSIS
498
SECTION
6–4
SERVICE PROCEDURES AND
SPECIFICATIONS
Electrical components
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking battery condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery recharging precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking and replacing the blade type fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking the cartridge type fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking the headlight aim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
500
507
510
510
513
514
515
516
499
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
SPECIFICATIONS
- FUSES
- FUSE LOCATIONS
64L208a
64L098a
Driver’s side kick panel
1
2
3
4
500
Engine compartment
Passenger’s side kick panel
Driver’s side kick panel
Trunk
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
64L099a
Passenger’s side kick panel
64L097c
Trunk
501
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
64L204
Engine compartment (with electronically modulated air suspension)
Engine compartment (without electronically modulated air suspension)
64L205
502
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
No.
FUSE
AMPERE
1
TI & TE
20
Tilt and telescopic steering
2
PANEL
7.5
Lexus park assist system, Rear
seat heater, Rear climate
control seat, Multi-information
display, Audio system,
Cigarette lighter, Instrument
panel light, Coin box light, Rear
mirror light, Glove box light,
Power rear seat, Electronically
modulated air suspension
system, Turn signal lights,
Clock, Shift lock system,
Vehicle stability control system,
Sunshade, Power rear view
mirror control system, Console
box light, Fuel opener system,
Adaptive front-lighting system
3
D P/SEAT
30
Power seat system
4
GAUGE
7.5
Gauges and meters, Lexus
park assist system, Shift lock
system
5
MPX-IG
7.5
Tilt and telescopic steering,
Power door lock system, Power
seat system, Engine
immobilizer system
6
D S/HTR
15
Seat heater, Climate control
seat system
7
AIR SUS
20
Electronically modulated air
suspension system
8
D-ACC
7.5
Shift lock system, Theft
deterrent system
64L206
Engine compartment
CIRCUIT
503
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
504
No.
FUSE
AMPERE
CIRCUIT
No.
FUSE
AMPERE
9
PWR
OUTLET
15
25
DOME
10
Vanity lights, Outer foot lights,
Ignition switch light, Clock,
Gauges and meters, Interior
lights, Personal lights
10
D-CIG
15
Rear cigarette lighter
11
OBD
7.5
On-board diagnosis system
26
MPX-B2
7.5
Gauges and meters, Vehicle
stability control system,
Illuminated entry system, TEL
12
AM1
7.5
Starting system
13
ABS-IG
7.5
Vehicle stability control system
14
D B/ANC
5
27
P RR-IG
10
Refreshing seat
28
H-LP LVL
7.5
Headlight leveling system,
Adaptive front-lighting system
15
SECURITY
7.5
Theft deterrent system
16
A/C
7.5
Air conditioning system
29
P-IG
7.5
Rain sensor, Air conditioning
system, Moon roof,
Multi-information display, Clock
17
STOP
5
Stop lights
18
D RR-IG
10
Refreshing seat
30
P S/HTR
15
Seat heater, Climate control
seat system
19
IG2
30
SRS airbag system, Engine
immobilizer system, Steering
lock system, Starting system
31
P-ACC
7.5
HAZ
15
Emergency flashers
Air conditioning system, Audio
system, Clock,
Multi-information display,
Illuminated entry system
20
21
STR LOCK
7.5
Steering lock system
32
P-CIG
15
Front cigarette lighter
33
RADIO
NO.1
7.5
34
RR DOOR
LH
20
Power outlet
Seat belts
22
AM2
7.5
All components in “STA” and
“IG2”, Starting system
23
MPX-B1
7.5
Power door lock system,
Engine immobilizer system,
Steering lock system, Front
power seat, Rear power seat
24
MPX-B3
7.5
Tilt and telescopic steering,
Headlight switch, Windshield
wiper and washer switch, Turn
signal switch
CIRCUIT
Audio system
Power door lock system, Power
window, Door closer system,
Door courtesy lights
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
No.
35
FUSE
P DOOR
AMPERE
CIRCUIT
No.
FUSE
AMPERE
25
Power door lock system, Power
rear view mirror control system,
Outside rear view mirror
defogger, Door closer system,
Door courtesy lights, Power
windows
45
RR
S/SHADE
15
46
LCE LP
7.5
License plate lights
47
S/ROOF
30
Moon roof
Audio system, Navigation
system
48
FUEL OPN
10
Fuel opener system, Trunk lid
closer system
49
AMP
30
Audio system
50
P P/SEAT
30
Power seat system
51
RR SEAT
LH
30
RR SEAT
RH
30
36
TEL
7.5
37
P B/ANC
5
Seat belts, Seat belt buckle
illumination
38
RR DOOR
RH
20
Power door lock system, Power
window, Door closer system,
Door courtesy lights
52
CIRCUIT
Sunshade
Power seat system
Power seat system
39
D DOOR
25
Power door lock system, Door
closer system, Power rear view
mirror control system, Outside
rear view mirror defogger, Door
courtesy lights, Power windows
LUG J/B
50
RR IG
7.5
Lexus park assist system,
Electronically modulated air
suspension system, Theft
deterrent system, TEL
53
40
All components in “RR SEAT
RH”, “RR SEAT LH”, “S/ROOF”,
“AMP”, “RR IG”, “RR ECU-B”,
“P P/SEAT”, “RR S/HTR”, “RR
S/SHADE”, “RR A/C”, “RR
ACC”, “FUEL OPN” and “LCE
LP”, Tail lights and Stop lights
41
RR ACC
7.5
Audio system, TEL
54
ABS 2
50
Vehicle stability control system
7.5
Rear air conditioning system,
Theft deterrent system, Trunk
light, Refreshing rear seat
55
HEATER
50
Air conditioning system
56
ABS 1
30
Vehicle stability control system
42
RR ECU-B
43
RR A/C
7.5
Rear air conditioning system,
Air purifier
57
DEFOG
40
Rear window defogger
AIR SUS
40
RR S/HTR
30
Seat heater, Climate control
seat system
58
44
Electronically modulated air
suspension system
505
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
No.
FUSE
AMPERE
59
R/B
60
All components in “FR FOG”,
“TAIL”, “WASHER”, “FR IG”,
“WIP”, “H-LP CRN” and “A/C
IG”
60
FAN
80
Air conditioning system
80
All components in “TI & TE”, “D
P/SEAT”, “A/C”, “OBD”,
“STOP”, “AM1”, “MPX-IG”,
“ABS-IG”, “GAUGE”,
“AIRSUS”, “D S/HTR”,
“SECURITY”, “PANEL”, “D
B/ANC”, “PWR OUTLET”,
“D-CIG”, “D RR-IG” and
“D-ACC”
61
62
63
506
D-J/B
ALT
P-J/B
CIRCUIT
140
Charging system
80
All components in “RR DOOR
RH”, “RR DOOR LH”, “D
DOOR”, “H-LP LVL”, “P
DOOR”, “P S/HTR”, “P-IG”,
“P-ACC”, “P B/ANC”, “P-CIG”,
“TEL” and “P RR-IG”
64
BATT
30
All components in “RADIO
NO.1”, “AM2”, “HAZ” and “STR
LOCK”
65
ST
30
Starting system
66
D/C CUT
20
All components in “DOME”,
“MPX-B1”, “MPX-B2” and
“MPS-B3”
67
ALT-S
5
Charging system
68
FAN
50
Air conditioning system
No.
FUSE
AMPERE
CIRCUIT
69
LUG J/B
60
All components in “RR SEAT
RH”, “RR SEAT LH”, “S/ROOF”,
“AMP”, “RR IG”, “RR ECU-B”,
“P P/SEAT”, “RR S/HTR”, “RR
S/SHADE”, “RR A/C”, “RR
ACC”, “FUEL OPN” and “LCE
LP”, Tail lights and Stop lights
70
H-LP R
LWR
15
Right-hand headlight (low
beam)
71
H-LP L
LWR
15
72
EFI NO.2
7.5
Multiport fuel injection
system/sequential multiport fuel
injection system
73
STA
7.5
Multiport fuel injection
system/sequential multiport fuel
injection system
74
INJ
10
Multiport fuel injection
system/sequential multiport fuel
injection system
75
IGN
7.5
Multiport fuel injection
system/sequential multiport fuel
injection system
76
FR IG
7.5
Electric cooling fan, Headlight
cleaner, Charging system,
Starting system, Rear window
defogger
77
A/C IG
7.5
Air conditioning system
78
WIP
30
Windshield wiper
Left-hand headlight (low beam)
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
CIRCUIT
CHECKING BATTERY CONDITION
No.
FUSE
AMPERE
79
FR FOG
15
Fog lights
80
WASHER
20
Windshield washer
81
TAIL
7.5
Tail lights, Parking lights, Side
marker lights
82
H-LP CLN
30
Headlight cleaner
BATTERY PRECAUTIONS
The battery produces flammable and explosive
hydrogen gas.
Precautions
CAUTION
83
EFI NO.1
25
Multiport fuel injection
system/sequential multiport fuel
injection system
84
HORN
10
Horns
Do not cause a spark by contacting the battery
terminals with tools.
85
ETCS
10
Multiport fuel injection
system/sequential multiport fuel
injection system
Do not smoke or light a match near the battery.
86
H-LP HI
20
Headlights (high beam)
The electrolyte contains poisonous and corrosive
sulfuric acid.
Avoid contact with eyes, skin or clothes.
Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.
Wear protective safety glasses when working near
the battery.
Keep children away from the battery.
EMERGENCY MEASURES
If electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush your eyes with
clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate
medical attention. If possible, continue to apply
water with a sponge or cloth while traveling to the
medical office.
507
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
If electrolyte gets on your skin, thoroughly wash the
contacted area. If you feel a pain or burn, get medical
attention immediately.
Checking battery exterior
If electrolyte gets on your clothes, there is a
possibility of its soaking through to your skin, so
immediately take off the exposed clothing and follow
the procedure above, if necessary.
64L085a
If you accidentally swallow electrolyte, drink a large
quantity of water or milk. Follow with milk of
magnesia, beaten raw egg or vegetable oil. Then go
immediately for emergency help.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
1 Terminals
2 Hold-down clamp
Check the battery for corroded or loose connections,
cracks, or loose hold-down clamps.
1. If the battery is corroded, wash it off with a solution of warm
water and baking soda. Coat the terminals with grease to
prevent further corrosion.
2. If the connections are loose, tighten the clamp bolts - but do
not overtighten.
3. Tighten the hold- down clamp only enough to keep the
battery firmly in place. Overtightening may damage the battery
case.
508
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
NOTICE
Make sure the engine and all accessories are turned
off before performing maintenance.
Checking battery condition
Checking by indicator
When checking the battery, remove the ground cable
first and reinstall it last.
Be careful not to cause a short circuit with tools.
64L086a
Take care no solution gets into the battery when
washing it.
Check the battery condition by the indicator color.
1
BLUE - Good condition.
2
WHITE - Charging necessary. Have the battery checked
by your Lexus dealer.
3
RED - Have the battery checked by your Lexus dealer.
NOTICE
Do not refill the battery with water.
509
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
BATTERY RECHARGING
PRECAUTIONS
CHECKING AND REPLACING THE
BLADE TYPE FUSES
During recharging, the battery is producing hydrogen
gas.
Therefore, before recharging:
1. If recharging with the battery installed on the vehicle, be
sure to disconnect the ground cable.
2. Make sure the power switch on the recharger is off when
connecting the charger cables to the battery and when
disconnecting them.
CAUTION
Always charge the battery in an unconfined area. Do
not charge the battery in a garage or closed room
where there is not sufficient ventilation.
Only do a slow charge (5 A or less). Charging at a
quicker rate is dangerous. The battery may explode
causing personal injuries.
64L087a
Engine compartment
64L089a
NOTICE
Never recharge the battery while the engine is running.
Also, make sure all accessories are turned off.
Engine compartment
510
1 Spare fuses
2 Pull-out tool
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
64L207
Driver’s side kick panel
64L092
Trunk
1. Turn the ignition switch off and open the fuse box lid.
Determine which fuse may be causing the problem. The lid of
the fuse box shows the name of the circuit for each fuse.
64L090
64L203
Passenger’s side kick panel
2. Make sure the inoperative component is turned off. Pull
the suspected fuse straight out with the pull-out tool and
check it. If it has blown, push a new fuse into the clips.
511
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
It is a good idea to purchase a set of spare fuses and keep them
in your vehicle for emergencies.
omg061c
If the new fuse immediately blows out, there is a problem with
the electrical system. Have your Lexus dealer correct it as
soon as possible.
CAUTION
Good
Blown
a. Look carefully at the fuse. If the thin wire is broken, the fuse
has blown. If you are not sure or if it is too dark to see, try
replacing the suspected fuse with one of the same value that
you know is good.
b. Only install a fuse with the amperage rating designated on
the fuse box lid.
If you do not have a spare fuse, in an emergency you can pull
out the “D-CIG” “P RR-IG” or “OBD” fuse, which may be
dispensable for normal driving, and use it if its amperage rating
is the same.
If you cannot use one of the same amperage, use one lower
than, but as close to the amperage as possible. If the
amperage is lower than that specified, the fuse might blow out
again but this does not indicate anything wrong. Be sure to get
the correct fuse as soon as possible and return the substitute
to its original clips.
512
Never use a fuse with a higher amperage rating, or any
other object, in place of a fuse. This may cause
extensive damage and possibly a fire.
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
CHECKING THE CARTRIDGE TYPE
FUSES
omg062d
64L201
Good
Engine compartment
Blown
If the headlights or other electrical components do not
work and the blade type fuses are O.K., check the
cartridge type fuses. If any of the cartridge type fuses are
blown, they must be replaced.
If there is an overload in the circuits from the battery, the fuses
are designed to blow before the entire wiring harness is
damaged.
64L202
CAUTION
Always use a genuine Lexus fuse or equivalent for
replacement. Never install an ordinary wire-even for a
temporary fix. This may cause extensive damage and
possibly a fire.
Engine compartment
513
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
NOTICE
ADDING WASHER FLUID
Before replacing the fuses, have the cause of electrical
overload determined and repaired by your Lexus dealer.
64L095b
If the washer tank becomes nearly empty, add washer
fluid.
You may use plain water as washer fluid. However, in cold
areas where temperatures range below the freezing point, use
washer fluid containing antifreeze. This product is available at
your Lexus dealer and most auto parts stores. Follow the
manufacturer’s directions for how much to mix with water.
NOTICE
Do not use engine antifreeze or any other substitute
because it may damage your vehicle’s paint.
514
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
CHECKING THE HEADLIGHT AIM
64L228
1 Vertical movement adjusting bolt 1
2 Vertical movement adjusting bolt 2
Adjusting the vertical aiming
64L229
1. Turn the vertical movement adjusting bolt 1 in either
direction using a Phillips-head screwdriver. At this time, keep
the turning direction and number of turns in mind.
Before checking the headlight aim:
1. Be sure that the body around the headlight is not deformed.
2. Park the vehicle on a level spot.
3. Get into the driver’s seat and put the vehicle in a state ready
for driving (with a full tank).
4. Bounce the vehicle several times.
515
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
REPLACING LIGHT BULBS
64L230
The illustrations on the following pages show the locations of
light bulbs. If it is necessary to replace a bulb, take your vehicle
to your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. Use bulbs with the
bulb numbers and wattage ratings given in the table.
CAUTION
To prevent burning yourself, do not replace the light
bulbs while they are hot.
2. Turn the vertical movement adjusting bolt 2 the same
number of turns and in the same direction as step 1 using a
Phillips-head screwdriver.
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
require special handling. They can burst or shatter if
scratched or dropped. Hold a bulb only by its plastic
or metal case. Do not touch the glass part of a bulb
with bare hands.
Do not touch the high voltage socket when the
headlights turn on.
20000 V is momentarily
generated and may cause severe injury by an electric
shock.
Do not disassemble, repair or take apart the headlight
bulbs, connector, power supply circuits and rotated
components. Or you may be injured by electric
shocks. Call your dealer when the headlights fail to
work or have to be replaced or disposed of.
NOTICE
Only use a bulb of the listed type.
516
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
The inside of the lens of exterior lights such as headlights may
temporarily fog up when the lens becomes wet in the rain or in
a car wash. This is not a problem because the fogging is
caused by the temperature difference between the outside and
inside of the lens, just like the windshield fogs up in the rain.
However, if there is a large drop of water on the inside of the
lens, or if there is water pooled inside the light, contact your
Lexus dealer.
LIGHT LOCATION
64L209
Light Bulbs
Bulb No.
W
Type
1
Headlight (High beam)
9005
60
A
2
Parking light
---
5
D
3
Headlight (Low beam)
---
35
B
4
Front turn signal light
---
21
D
5
Front side marker light
---
5
D
6
Fog light
9006
51
C
517
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
64L210a
Light Bulbs
64L211
Bulb No.
W
Type
Light Bulbs
W
Type
1
High mounted stoplight
---
21
D
1
Front personal light
---
8
F
2
Trunk light
194
3.8
D
2
Front interior light
---
8
E
3
License plate light
---
5
D
3
Front vanity light
---
3
E
4
Back-up light
921
18
D
4
Rear vanity light
---
3
E
5
Rear turn signal light
---
21
D
5
Rear interior light,
Rear personal light
---
8
F
Door courtesy light
194
3.8
D
6
518
Bulb No.
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
A: HB3 halogen bulbs
B: D2S discharge bulbs
C: HB4 halogen bulbs
D: Wedge base bulbs
E: Double end bulbs
F: Single end bulbs
519
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
520
SECTION
6–5
SERVICE PROCEDURES AND
SPECIFICATIONS
Body
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Protecting your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Washing and waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning the interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
522
523
524
526
521
BODY
SPECIFICATIONS
– DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
Overall length
5015 mm (197.4 in.)
Overall width
1830 mm (72.0 in.)
Overall height
– with electronically modulated air suspension
– without electronically modulated air
suspension
1470 mm (57.9 in.)*
1490 mm (58.7 in.)*
Wheelbase
2925 mm (115.2 in.)
Tread
– Front
with electronically modulated air suspension
without electronically modulated air suspension
– Rear
with electronically modulated air suspension
without electronically modulated air suspension
1575 mm (62.0 in.)
1570 mm (61.8 in.)
1575 mm (62.0 in.)
1570 mm (61.8 in.)
Vehicle capacity weight (occupants + cargo)
410 kg (900 lb.)
Towing capacity (trailer weight + cargo weight)
907 kg (2000 lb.)
*Unladen vehicle
– FUEL TANK
Capacity
522
84 L (22.2 gal., 18.5 lmp.gal.)
BODY
PROTECTING YOUR VEHICLE
FROM CORROSION
Proper care of your Lexus can help ensure long- term
corrosion prevention.
The most common causes of corrosion to your vehicle
are:
The accumulation of road salt, dirt and moisture in
hard-to-reach areas under the vehicle.
Chipping of paint or undercoating caused by minor
accidents or by stones and gravel.
The following conditions will cause or accelerate
corrosion of your vehicle, so it is important to keep your
vehicle, particularly the underside, as clean as possible
and to repair any damage to paint or protective coatings
as soon as possible.
The presence of road salt or dust control chemicals, salt in
the air near the sea coast, industrial air pollution.
High humidity, especially at temperatures just above
freezing point.
Certain parts of your vehicle are wet or damp for an
extended period of time, even though other parts of the
vehicle are dry.
To help prevent corrosion on your Lexus, follow these
guidelines:
Keep your vehicle clean by regular washing. In addition,
observe the following points.
If you drive on salted roads in the winter or if you live near
the ocean, you should hose off the undercarriage at least
once a month to minimize corrosion.
High pressure water or steam is effective for cleaning the
vehicle’s underside and wheel housings. Pay particular
attention to these areas as it is difficult to see all the mud and
dirt. It will do more harm than good to simply wet the mud
and debris without removing. The lower edge of doors,
rocker panels and frame members have drain holes which
should not be allowed to clog with dirt as trapped water in
these areas can cause corrosion.
Wash the underside of the vehicle thoroughly when winter
is over.
See “Washing and waxing” on page 524 for more tips.
Check the condition of your vehicle’s paint and trim. If you
find any chips or scratches in the paint, touch them up
immediately to prevent corrosion from starting. If the chips or
scratches have gone through the bare metal, have a qualified
body shop make the repair.
Components of the vehicle which are prevented from
quick-drying due to lack of proper ventilation are exposed
to high ambient temperature.
523
BODY
Check the interior of your vehicle. Water and dirt can
accumulate under the floor mats and could cause corrosion.
Occasionally check under the mats to make sure the area is
dry. Be particularly careful when transporting chemicals,
cleansers, fertilizers, salt, etc. These should be transported in
proper containers. If a spill or leak should occur, immediately
clean and dry the area.
Use mud shields on your wheels. If you drive on salted or
gravel roads, mud shields help protect your vehicle. Full-size
shields, which come as near to the ground as possible, are the
best. We recommend that the fittings and the area where the
shields are installed be treated to resist corrosion. Your Lexus
dealer will be happy to assist in supplying and installing the
shields if they are recommended for your area.
Keep your vehicle in a well ventilated garage or a roofed
place. Do not park your vehicle in a damp, poorly
ventilated garage. If you wash your vehicle in the garage, or
if you drive it covered with water or snow, your garage may be
so damp as to cause corrosion. Even if your garage is heated,
a wet vehicle can corrode if the ventilation is poor.
WASHING AND WAXING
Washing your Lexus
Keep your vehicle clean by regular washing.
The following cases may cause weakness to the paint or
corrosion to the body and parts. Wash your vehicle as soon
as possible.
When driving in a coastal area
When driving on a road sprinkled with antifreeze
When exposed to coal tar, tree sap, bird droppings and
carcass of an insect
When driving in areas where there is a lot of smoke, soot,
dust, iron dust or chemical substance
When the vehicle becomes remarkably dirty with dust and
mud
Hand-washing your Lexus
Work in the shade and wait until the vehicle body is not hot
to the touch.
1. Rinse off loose dirt with a hose. Remove any mud or road
salt from the underside of the vehicle or in the wheel wells.
2. Wash with a mild car-wash soap, mixed according to the
manufacturer’s instructions. Use a soft cotton mitt and keep
it wet by dipping it frequently into the wash water. Do not rub
hard - let the soap and water remove the dirt.
524
BODY
Plastic wheel ornaments: The plastic wheel ornaments are
damaged easily by organic substances. If any organic
substance splashes an ornament, be sure to wash it off with
water and check if the ornament is damaged.
CAUTION
Do not attach the heavily damaged plastic wheel
ornament. It may fly off the wheel and cause accidents
while the vehicle is moving.
Aluminum wheels: Use only a mild soap or neutral detergent.
Urethane bumpers and side moldings: Wash carefully. Do
not scrub with abrasive cleaners. The bumper and side
molding faces are soft.
Road tar: Remove with turpentine or cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces.
Automatic car wash
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the antenna, make sure to remove
it before driving your Lexus through an automatic car
wash.
Your vehicle may be washed in an automatic car wash, but
remember that the paint can be scratched by some types of
brushes, unfiltered washing water, or the washing process
itself. Scratching reduces paint durability and gloss, especially
on darker colors. The manager of the car wash should be able
to advise you whether the process is safe for the paint on your
vehicle.
Waxing your Lexus
Polishing and waxing is recommended to maintain the
original beauty of your Lexus’ finish.
NOTICE
Do not use organic substances (gasoline, kerosene,
benzine or strong solvents), which may be toxic or
cause damage.
3. Rinse thoroughly - dried soap can cause streaking. In hot
weather you may need to rinse each section right after you
wash it.
4. To prevent water spots, dry the vehicle using a clean soft
cotton towel. Do not rub or press hard - you might scratch the
paint.
Apply wax once a month or if the vehicle surface does not repel
water well.
1. Always wash and dry the vehicle before you begin waxing,
even if you are using a combined cleaner and wax.
2. Use a good quality polish and wax. If the finish has become
extremely weathered, use a car-cleaning polish, followed by
a separate wax. Carefully follow the manufacturer ’s
instructions and precautions. Be sure to polish and wax the
chrome trim as well as the paint.
525
BODY
3. Wax the vehicle again when water does not bead but
remains on the surface in large patches.
2. Wring water from a clean cloth and thoroughly wipe off all
traces of detergent with it.
CLEANING THE INTERIOR
3. Wipe off the surface of the leather with a dry soft cloth. Allow
the leather to dry in a ventilated shaded area. Excess of wet
may cause the hardening or shrinking of the leather.
CAUTION
Be careful not to splash water or spill liquid on the
floor. This may prevent the side airbags from
activating correctly, resulting in serious injury.
Do not wash the vehicle floor with water, or allow
water to get onto the floor when cleaning the vehicle
interior or exterior. Water may get into audio
components or other electrical components above or
under the floor carpet (or mat) and cause a
malfunction; and it may cause body corrosion.
Leather Interior
The selected leather is used in your Lexus. Due to
characteristics of leather products, some parts of leather may
be rough, uneven or scratched originally.
To keep good appearance, we recommend you to clean it
periodically twice a year.
Remove dirt on the leather in the following ways:
1. Wipe it off lightly using a soft cloth (e.g. gauze) dampened
with 5% solution of neutral detergent for wool.
526
NOTICE
Dirt or sand adhered to the leather may damage the
treated surface and cause it to wear earlier. Remove
dirt or sand using a vacuum cleaner.
If a stain should fail to come out with a neutral
detergent, apply a cleaner that does not contain an
organic solvent.
Never use organic substances such as benzine,
alcohol or gasoline, or alkaline or acid solutions for
cleaning the leather as these could cause
discoloring.
Use of a nylon brush or synthetic fiber cloth, etc. may
scratch the fine grained surface of the leather.
Mildew may develop on soiled leather upholstery. Be
especially careful to avoid oil spots. Try to keep your
upholstery always clean.
BODY
Long exposure to direct sunlight may cause the
leather surface to harden and shrink. Keep your
vehicle in a shaded area, especially in the summer.
The interior of your vehicle is apt to heat up on hot
summer days, so avoid placing on the upholstery
items made of vinyl or plastic or containing wax as
these tend to stick to leather when warm.
Improper cleaning of the leather upholstery could
result in discoloration or staining.
Synthetic Leather Areas
(Dash and sun visors)
The synthetic leather areas may be easily cleaned with a
mild soap or detergent and water.
First vacuum over the upholstery to remove loose dirt. Then,
using a sponge or soft cloth, apply the soap solution to the
synthetic leather. After allowing it to soak in for a few minutes
to loosen the dirt, remove the dirt and wipe off the soap with a
clean damp cloth. If all the dirt does not come off, repeat the
procedure. Commercial foaming- type cleaners are also
available which work well. Follow the manufacturer’s
instructions.
NOTICE
Do not use solvent, thinner, gasoline or window cleaner
on the interior.
527
BODY
Carpets, Windows and Seat Belts
Begin by vacuuming thoroughly to remove as much dirt as
possible. Several types of foam cleaners are available; some
are in aerosol cans and others are powders or liquids which
you mix with water to produce a foam. To shampoo the
carpets, use a sponge or brush to apply the foam. Rub in
overlapping circles. Do not apply water - the best results are
obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as possible. Read the
shampoo instructions and follow them closely.
The seat belts may be cleaned with mild soap and water
or with lukewarm water.
Use a cloth or sponge. As you are cleaning, check the belts
for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.
NOTICE
Use a good foam-type shampoo to clean the carpets.
Do not use dye or bleach on the belts - it may weaken
them.
Do not use the belts until they become dry.
The windows may be cleaned with any household
window cleaner.
When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be
careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or
connectors.
528
Air Conditioning Control Panel, Car Audio,
Instrument Panel, Console Panel, and
Switches
Use a soft damp cloth for cleaning.
Soak a clean soft cloth in water or lukewarm water then lightly
wipe off any dirt.
NOTICE
Do not use organic substances (solvents, kerosene,
alcohol, gasoline, etc.) or alkaline or acidic solutions.
These chemicals can cause discoloring, staining or
peeling of the surface.
If you use cleaners or polishing agents, make sure
their ingredients do not include the substances
mentioned above.
If you use a liquid car freshener, do not spill the liquid
onto the vehicle’s interior surfaces. It may contain
the ingredients mentioned above. Immediately clean
any spill using the method mentioned above.
If you have any questions about the cleaning of your
Lexus, your local Lexus dealer will be pleased to answer
them.
SECTION
7
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
FOR U.S. OWNERS
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
529
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS FOR U.S. OWNERS
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
FOR U.S. OWNERS
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or death,
you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A.,
Inc. (Toll-free: 1-800-25-LEXUS).
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A.,
Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto
Safety Hotline toll- free at 1- 800- 424- 9393 (or
366-0123 in Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation,
Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety from
the Hotline.
530
GAS STATION INFORMATION
Fuel selection:
Select premium unleaded gasoline with an Octane Rating
of 91 (Research Octane Number 96) or higher for optimum
engine performance. However, if such premium type
cannot be obtained, you may temporarily use unleaded
gasoline with an Octane Rating as low as 87 (Research
Octane Number 91).
Do not use plain water alone.
For checking the engine coolant, see page 466.
Automatic transmission:
Fluid type - “Toyota Genuine ATF WS”
See page 472 for detailed information.
Fuel tank capacity:
84 L (22.2 gal., 18.5 lmp.gal.)
Tire information:
See page 478 through 496 for detailed information.
Engine oil:
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent
Tire inflation pressure:
Oil grade: API grade SL “Energy-Conserving” or ILSAC
multigrade engine oil.
Recommended oil viscosity - SAE 5W- 30 if normal
temperatures are below 38C (100F)
Oil capacity: L (qt., lmp.qt.)
Drain and refill
with filter
5.1 (5.4, 4.5)
without filter 4.5 (4.8, 4.0)
See page 463 for detailed information.
Engine coolant:
Capacity: 9.5 L (10.0 qt, 8.4 lmp.qt.)
Tire size
P225/55R17 95H
245/45R18 96W
cold tires
kPa (kgf/cm2 or bar, psi)
Front
Rear
220 (2.2, 32)
220 (2.2, 32)
230 (2.3, 33)
230 (2.3, 33)
For sustained high speeds above 160 km/h (100 mph), in
countries where such speeds are permitted by law, add the
tire pressure given below to the front tires and rear tires, but
never exceed the maximum cold tire pressure molded on
the tire sidewall.
P225/55R17 95H
245/45R18 96W
20kPa (0.2 kgf/cm2 or bar, 3 psi)
40kPa (0.4 kgf/cm2 or bar, 6 psi)
Coolant type - “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar
high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine,
non- nitrite, and non- borate coolant with long- life hybrid
organic acid technology (Coolant with long- life hybrid
organic acid technology is a combination of low phosphates
and organic acids.)
lsu
You should know as much about the quality and
importance of proper maintenance of your new
vehicle as the people who built it.
The Lexus authorized Repair Manual tells you
how to maintain your vehicle and enables you to
correctly perform your own maintenance.
The best way to keep your new vehicle in top running
order is to maintain it properly from the moment you
drive it off the showroom floor.
The Lexus authorized Repair Manual is packed with
literally everything you need to know to perform your
own maintenance in virtually every area of your new
vehicle.
cm-1
Maintenance procedures for the engine, chassis,
body, electrical system, and more, are clearly
explained and illustrated.
Periodic maintenance and tune-up
Periodic maintenance and tune-up helps to prevent small
problems from growing into larger ones later on. The repair
manual outlines exactly what maintenance is required and
clearly explains how to do the work yourself step-by-step.
Areas covered include such things as spark plug replacement,
valve clearance adjustment and engine oil and filter
replacement.
cm-2
Where to obtain the
Repair Manual
The repair manual for LS430, written in English, may be
purchased as applicable from any Lexus dealer.
Pub. Name: 2004 LS430 Repair Manual
Pub. No.:
Vol.1 RM1048U1
Vol.2 RM1048U2

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project